Opis Instalacji Man Cats

TESTING AND DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
MAN-cats
User Manual V 6.00
Imprint
For any queries or suggestions regarding this user manual, please contact the “Technical Documentation” de-
partment at the following address:
MAN Truck & Bus SE
Department SMSOD
Dachauer Strasse 667
80995 München
Editorial deadline: 06/2021

Exclusion clause
This user manual may be subject to change due to technical progress. Computer specifications and manuals
are subject to change without notice.
For this reason, you can find the current version of the user manual on the MAN After Sales Portal.
MAN Truck Bus SE assumes no liability for damage incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or
discrepancies between the computer and the manuals.
If any modifications are made without the written approval of MAN Truck & Bus SE, then MAN Truck & Bus SE
shall not be liable for any warranty or guarantee claims arising from damage and defects attributable to unau-
thorised modifications. Furthermore, MAN Truck & Bus SE does not assume liability for any damage resulting
from the unauthorised modification.
MAN Truck & Bus SE assumes corresponding qualification of the persons performing all tasks (particularly
safety-relevant tasks) when working with MAN-cats.
Disclaimer
All the designations of products mentioned in the user manual are trademarks of the respective companies. The
omission of a trademark symbol or TM does not indicate that the designation is a free brand name.
Copyright© 2021 MAN Truck & Bus SE
Reproduction, copying or translation of this document in any form, wholly or in part, requires the written per-
mission of MAN Truck & Bus SE.
Edition:
Version 6.00 – English
HMC600_0 Imprint 1
Contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 7
2 General safety instructions....................................................................................................................... 8
3 Recording vehicle data.............................................................................................................................. 9
4 l Requirements........................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Hardware requirements.........................................................................................................12
4.2 Software requirements..........................................................................................................13
4.3 Infrastructure requirements...................................................................................................14
5 l Brief overview of start-up........................................................................................................................ 17
5.1 Preparatory measures...........................................................................................................18
5.2 Overview: MAN-cats installation............................................................................................19
5.3 Overview: MAN-cats start-up................................................................................................20
6 l MAN After Sales Portal (ASP).................................................................................................................. 21
6.1 Overview of the MAN After Sales Portal................................................................................22
6.2 Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal...........................................................................23
6.3 Profile information on the MAN After Sales Portal.................................................................24
6.4 Webshop...............................................................................................................................25
7 l MAN-cats installation............................................................................................................................... 27
7.1 Overview of MAN-cats installation.........................................................................................28
7.2 Installing MAN-cats via download (preparation)....................................................................29
7.3 Installing MAN-cats offline (preparation)...............................................................................31
7.4 MAN-cats installation............................................................................................................32
8 l SmartCard................................................................................................................................................. 39
8.1 Overview of SmartCard.........................................................................................................40
8.2 SmartCard users...................................................................................................................43
8.3 Purchasing SmartCards........................................................................................................43
8.4 Activating technician SmartCard...........................................................................................44
8.5 Changing the technician SmartCard PIN...............................................................................48
8.6 Updating the technician SmartCard.......................................................................................50
8.7 Loss of technician SmartCard...............................................................................................51
9 l User and runtime rights........................................................................................................................... 53
9.1 Purchasing runtime rights.....................................................................................................55
10 l Licence file............................................................................................................................................. 57
10.1 Purchasing a licence file.......................................................................................................58
10.2 Storing the computer ID........................................................................................................59
11 l MAN-cats Installer ................................................................................................................................. 63
11.1 News (notification centre)......................................................................................................66
11.2 Functions/settings of the MAN-cats Installer.........................................................................68
11.3 Checking for updates............................................................................................................69
11.4 MAN-cats troubleshooting.....................................................................................................70
2 Contents HMC600_0
11.5 Add software.........................................................................................................................74
11.6 Download applications..........................................................................................................75
11.7 Download file........................................................................................................................78
11.8 Exporting an installation (in preparation)...............................................................................86
11.9 Showing the log....................................................................................................................90
11.10 Settings.................................................................................................................................92
11.11 Showing download..............................................................................................................102
11.12 Exiting and closing..............................................................................................................103
11.13 Taskbar selection menu......................................................................................................104
12 l Updating MAN-cats.............................................................................................................................. 105
12.1 Updating the MAN-cats software.........................................................................................106
12.2 Updating MAN-cats control files..........................................................................................108
13 l MAN-cats user interface...................................................................................................................... 111
13.1 Application area.................................................................................................................. 113
13.2 Header bar.......................................................................................................................... 113
13.3 Toolbar................................................................................................................................ 113
13.4 Status bar........................................................................................................................... 114
14 l Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) T400..................................................................................... 115
14.1 Requirements..................................................................................................................... 116
14.2 Hardware description..........................................................................................................120
14.3 Start-up of T400 Vehicle Communication Interface.............................................................127
14.4 Vehicle Communication Interface Manager ........................................................................138
14.5 Starting the configuration wizard.........................................................................................187
14.6 Starting the VCI application.................................................................................................189
14.7 Checking for and installing VCI firmware updates...............................................................192
14.8 WiFi connection between VCI and service computer...........................................................204
14.9 WiFi standard restrictions 802.11a/b/g/n.............................................................................209
14.10 Selecting a VCI for vehicle diagnostics...............................................................................214
14.11 Changing the Vehicle Communication Interface type .........................................................217
14.12 VCI recording......................................................................................................................220
14.13 User preferences and system settings................................................................................221
14.14 Uninstalling the T400 series VCI.........................................................................................223
14.15 Error messages...................................................................................................................225
14.16 Technical data of T400 series VCI.......................................................................................226
14.17 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................227
15 l Working with MAN-cats....................................................................................................................... 233
15.1 Launching the MAN-cats program.......................................................................................234
15.2 Logging into MAN-cats........................................................................................................235
15.3 Vehicle identification...........................................................................................................238
HMC600_0 Contents 3
15.4 Vehicle information page.....................................................................................................244
15.5 Vehicle-specific information portal.......................................................................................247
15.6 System navigation...............................................................................................................249
15.7 Diagnostic session options..................................................................................................250
16 l Information portal................................................................................................................................ 251
16.1 Information portal ...............................................................................................................252
16.2 Display area........................................................................................................................252
17 l MAN Diagnostic Assistant................................................................................................................... 255
17.1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................256
17.2 MAN Diagnostic Assistant...................................................................................................257
17.3 MAN Diagnostic Assistant user interface.............................................................................260
17.4 Application example for SPN (diagnostic code) category....................................................262
17.5 Application example for “Components” category.................................................................263
17.6 Application example for “Circuit diagram” category.............................................................264
17.7 Multi-core cables.................................................................................................................282
17.8 Print circuit diagram............................................................................................................285
17.9 Multiplex information (MUX)................................................................................................289
17.10 Application example for “Cable numbers” category.............................................................291
17.11 Change in vehicle resolution in MAN-cats...........................................................................292
18 l Control unit selection.......................................................................................................................... 293
18.1 Diagnostic memory.............................................................................................................298
18.2 Identification........................................................................................................................299
18.3 Flashing..............................................................................................................................300
18.4 Repeat detection of control unit selection............................................................................304
19 l Vehicle-related diagnostics................................................................................................................. 307
19.1 Control unit detection..........................................................................................................308
19.2 Input of vehicle number plate..............................................................................................315
19.3 Repeating control unit detection..........................................................................................316
19.4 Diagnostic memory of complete vehicle..............................................................................318
19.5 Ordering a conversion data file (UDF).................................................................................325
19.6 Action/orders without vehicle..............................................................................................326
19.7 Action/order with vehicle.....................................................................................................378
19.8 Programming......................................................................................................................408
19.9 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................446
19.10 Workshop routine................................................................................................................486
19.11 WWH OBD and OBD..........................................................................................................500
19.12 Bus/coach body container...................................................................................................516
20 l System-related diagnostics................................................................................................................. 523
20.1 System navigation...............................................................................................................524
4 Contents HMC600_0
20.2 Control unit detection..........................................................................................................526
20.3 Reading out diagnostic memory..........................................................................................527
20.4 Control unit identification.....................................................................................................533
20.5 Monitoring...........................................................................................................................535
20.6 Actuator test........................................................................................................................554
21 l Tools..................................................................................................................................................... 557
21.1 Tools...................................................................................................................................558
21.2 DLS coil tester....................................................................................................................559
22 l Application tools.................................................................................................................................. 561
22.1 Screenshots........................................................................................................................562
22.2 Document viewer................................................................................................................567
22.3 Purging data.......................................................................................................................569
22.4 Internal data logger.............................................................................................................570
23 l System settings.................................................................................................................................... 571
23.1 Opening system settings.....................................................................................................572
23.2 System settings interface....................................................................................................573
23.3 Overview of system settings:..............................................................................................580
24 l Uninstalling MAN-cats......................................................................................................................... 581
24.1 Preparing uninstallation......................................................................................................584
24.2 Uninstalling MAN-cats.........................................................................................................585
24.3 Uninstalling CodeMeter Runtime (WIBU)............................................................................590
24.4 Uninstalling the Diagnostic Assistant Application (MAN).....................................................592
24.5 Uninstalling MAN-cats registry............................................................................................593
24.6 Uninstalling MAN-cats I Emulator........................................................................................594
24.7 Uninstalling MAN VCI T400 software..................................................................................596
24.8 Uninstalling MAN VCI T200 software (optional)...................................................................597
24.9 Manually deleting file directories.........................................................................................601
25 l Buttons and status displays................................................................................................................ 603
25.1 General buttons..................................................................................................................604
25.2 Buttons on the permanent toolbar.......................................................................................604
25.3 Application-dependent buttons............................................................................................605
25.4 Status symbols and displays............................................................................................... 611
25.5 MAN-cats Installer...............................................................................................................614
25.6 VCI Manager.......................................................................................................................616
26 Tips and tricks........................................................................................................................................ 617
27 Support................................................................................................................................................... 618
HMC600_0 Contents 5
6 Contents HMC600_0
1 Introduction
Explanations of the structure of the MAN-cats User Manual.
Please check at regular intervals on the MAN After Sales Portal whether you have the latest
version of the user manual.
The table of contents contains hyperlinks. Clicking on the name of the chapter moves the reader
to the selected chapter content.
First check your system for compatibility ( Chapter “Hardware requirements”). You can then be-
gin the installation. During the installation, follow the specifications in the user manual without fail.
Following installation, the user-specific descriptions and specifications are explained. This infor-
mation is required for login and work in MAN-cats. We have included cross-references for these
cases. The cross-references display the required information, e.g. ( Chapter...).
The texts in this user manual are divided as follows:
Body text: To introduce or describe a chapter.
Text in bulleted lists:
Bullet points
► Instruction
Result of the instruction
User tip
Warning/safety note
In addition, the following information can be found on the edge of each page:
Fig. 1.1
Figure numbers
Figure for a button relevant for the work step
Section headings (e.g. definition, instructions, etc.) Example
Cross-references to chapters, Item numbers in pictures or to other manuals can be found in brack-

ets and are shown as follows:
( Chapter “Sample chapter”)
(📖 Example manual)
( Item 1)
( Figure 3.1)
HMC600_0 Introduction 7
2 General safety instructions
Read the user manual carefully before start-up. Observe all safety notes in the user manual, in the MAN-cats
testing and diagnostic system and from the vehicle and tool manufacturer.
Observe applicable national law. In some cases, functions provided by the system may only be performed by
persons with special training or certification.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away and shift the gearbox into neutral. Work on hot and moving parts (e.g.
engine) must be carried out with care in order to avoid burns and other injuries. When tilting the cab, secure all
loose parts and the doors. Risk of death from high voltage. When working on the UltraCaps, strictly observe the
safety regulations. Work on the airbag must be carried out only by qualified specialist personnel.
Comply with the applicable accident prevention regulations. All pending work may only be carried out by qualified
personnel. Please observe the current repair manuals and the relevant test records. Perform all work with the
greatest possible care. Any incorrect parameter settings may lead to serious system faults.
Basic principles: Check the entire system installation after replacing system components and after any work re-
lated to these components.
When working with MAN-cats, you will see special safety notes for certain work steps. The safety notes must
always be observed and followed.
8 General safety instructions HMC600_0

3 Recording vehicle data
The vehicles of MAN Truck & Bus SE are equipped with data storage devices that can record and store infor-
mation about the vehicle condition, vehicle specifications and malfunctions.
Examples of stored data in the vehicle include:
Vehicle configuration data, e.g. regarding installed electronic systems

Vehicle usage data, e.g. mileage and consumption
Diagnostic memory data
Maintenance data, e.g. maintenance appointments, monitored and displayed maintenance components
The vehicle data assists in the diagnosis of vehicle systems as well as in maintenance and service. It also serves
to improve the quality and safety of vehicles. It is not possible to produce movement profiles based on this data.
The diagnostic system MAN-cats can be used to read out this data from the data storage devices of the vehicle
during the course of maintenance and service work. After a malfunction has been remedied, the data in the vehi-
cle is continually overwritten or deleted.
Part of the stored data is sent to MAN Truck & Bus SE Corporate Center, where it is used as an important aid
for damage investigation and avoidance, fault analysis as well as for vehicle configuration, use optimisation and
further development.
Furthermore, this information can be used for official investigations or for the settlement of disputes involving
MAN Truck & Bus SE companies and also be made available to third parties.
When vehicles from MAN Truck & Bus SE are used, situations are conceivable in which the above described
technical data could permit identification of persons in conjunction with other information (tachograph, accident
report, witness statements etc.).
HMC600_0 Recording vehicle data 9

10 Recording vehicle data HMC600_0
4 l Requirements
Contents
4.1 Hardware requirements.........................................................12
4.2 Software requirements...........................................................13
4.3 Infrastructure requirements....................................................14
HMC600_0 Requirements 11
4.1 Hardware requirements
4.1.1 Service computer

Overview Category Description
Random access memory 8 GB or more

Free hard disk space at least 60 GB
Display resolution 1366 x 768 pixels (recommended)
Network interface at least one Ethernet connection
WLAN
Interface USB 3.0
Processor Intel i5-5300U, i5-7260U or higher is recommended
Miscellaneous Contact-based SmartCard read/write device, internal or external.
Further information is available on the MAN After Sales Portal.
4.1.2 Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI)

No warranty is provided for compatibility of interfaces that are not certified by MAN Truck & Bus SE.
Interface compatible with D-PDU-API-ISO 22900 Version 2.2

Interfaces can be certified by the manufacturer with MAN Truck & Bus.
Further information on the subject of Vehicle Communication Interface is provided on the MAN
After Sales Portal.
4.1.3 SmartCard
When running MAN-cats using a SmartCard, user and runtime rights need to be acquired and then
issued.
12 Requirements HMC600_0
4.2 Software requirements
Microsoft Windows 10 operating system with the available updates (current service packs, se- Overview
curity updates, etc.)
Current Internet browser, e.g. Microsoft Edge/Internet Explorer
Anti-virus program (recommended, observe country-specific requirements)
Windows configuration
A difference between the system time of the service computer and MAN-cats can lead to opera-
tional malfunctions.
Correctly set time zone on the service computer.
► If necessary, store the time zone corresponding to the site or region in the Windows system
settings.
4.2.1 MAN-cats requirements

Access to the MAN After Sales Portal Overview
User and runtime rights
Licence file
4.3 Infrastructure requirements
Introduction The requirements and the set-up of the infrastructure depend on the site and may require system
knowledge. For queries about the infrastructure requirements and setting up your network access,
please consult the responsible system administrator or the IT manager at your company.
A difference between the system time of the service computer and MAN-cats can lead to opera-
tional malfunctions.
4.3.1 Connection configuration

Overview Individual applications and functions in MAN-cats may require a multiple connection to be set up
between individual network components.
MAN-cats offers various options for this. An overview of the different connection variants as well as
the necessary hardware components and requirements is provided below.
A vehicle communication interface (VCI) that has been approved by MAN Truck & Bus is recom-
mended as the interface for the connection between the vehicle and service computer.
When the MAN Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) is used, no further adjustments to the VCI
using the configuration wizard are required to change between the connection variants. Variant 1
is recommended in this case as the most reliable process connection.
4.3.2 Overview of connection variants

Overview VCI/service computer Internet Requirements
Variant 1 Cable connection between Wireless connection Connection via USB

VCI and MAN-cats service between service cable
computer computer and network WLAN access to the
(router or access point) network
Available Internet
connection
VCI/service computer Internet Requirements
Variant 2 Wireless connection between Cable connection Connection to the service

VCI and service computer between service computer via WiFi
computer and network Connection to the
(router or access network by means of
point) Ethernet cable
Available Internet
connection
VCI/service computer Internet Requirements
Variant 3 Wireless connection between Wireless connection WLAN access to the

VCI, service computer and between VCI, service network
network (router or access computer and network Available Internet
point) (router or access point) connection
Further information and detailed descriptions for the connection setup between the MAN-cats
service computer and the MAN Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) are provided in
( Chapter “Vehicle Communication Interface Manager”).
The following network connections are supported by MAN-cats:
Broadband connection (e.g. DSL) or company network

Mobile network connection (mobile phone, smartphone, Internet surf stick)
The respective owner of the MAN-cats diagnostic system is responsible for providing a network
connection and the required components (hardware/software). Please contact the responsible
system administrator with any questions relating to network configuration.
5 l Brief overview of start-up
Contents
5.1 Preparatory measures...........................................................18
5.2 Overview: MAN-cats installation............................................19
5.3 Overview: MAN-cats start-up.................................................20
HMC600_0 Brief overview of start-up 17

Introduction A number of work steps must be carried out for MAN-cats start-up. The following work steps are
divided as follows:
Preparatory measures
MAN-cats installation
MAN-cats start-up
The listed work steps serve only as an overview of the measures required as part of MAN-cats
start-up. Detailed information on the individual work steps is provided in the linked chapters.
5.1 Preparatory measures

Instructions ► Set up service computer (observe system requirements and install additionally required soft-
ware ( Chapter “Hardware requirements”).
► Log into/register in the MAN After Sales Portal.

(Company details are required for registration. A credit card must be stored for the use of articles,
applications or products subject to charge) ( Chapter “Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal”).
Full access (activation) to all offerings (information, applications or products) of the MAN After
Sales Portal may take some time.
► Purchase the “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file) via the MAN After
Sales Portal for operation of MAN-cats without using a MAN-cats SmartCard
( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights without technician SmartCard”).
or
► Purchase MAN-cats SmartCard via the MAN After Sales Portal

( Chapter “Purchasing SmartCards”).
► Purchase required runtime rights packages via the MAN After Sales Portal for operation of
MAN-cats with a SmartCard ( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights with technician SmartCard”).
MAN-cats SmartCards are delivered by post and this takes time. The administrator PIN required
for activation is sent separately and also by post.
The runtime rights packages must be purchased and assigned individually for each technician
SmartCard.
If a computer ID is used, the runtime rights are tied to the hardware
( Chapter “Storing the computer ID”).
18 Brief overview of start-up HMC600_0

5.2 Overview: MAN-cats installation
The free MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software can be installed as follows: Introduction
Installation via download from the MAN After Sales Portal

Offline installation
5.2.1 Installation via download from the MAN After Sales Portal
► Execute the quick link for the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software in the MAN After Sales Instructions
Portal (download must be performed via the MAN-cats service computer).
An Internet connection is required to download the MAN-cats software.
► Install the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software.
This is a guided installation where instructions from the installation wizard are displayed
( Chapter “Installing MAN-cats via download (preparation)”).
5.2.2 Offline installation

Starting the provided offline installation from an external data medium (USB data medium, hard
drive, etc.):
► Connect the external data medium with the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software to the Instructions
MAN-cats service computer.
► Open Windows Explorer, e.g. by clicking on the corresponding icon in the Windows taskbar
► Open the directory in which the MAN-cats software is located.

Start > Computer > Removable media > MAN-cats software directory
► Double-click on the file “MAN-cats setup.exe”.
► Install the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software.
This is a guided installation where instructions from the installation wizard are displayed
( Chapter “Installing MAN-cats offline (preparation)”).
HMC600_0 Brief overview of start-up 19

5.3 Overview: MAN-cats start-up
Introduction There are two ways to start up the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software:
MAN-cats start-up with technician SmartCard

MAN-cats start-up without SmartCard
5.3.1 MAN-cats start-up with technician SmartCard

Instructions ► Launch the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software (double-click on the MAN-cats icon on
the desktop of the service computer).
( Chapter “Launching the MAN-cats program”)
► Activate the MAN-cats technician SmartCard.

( Chapter “Activating technician SmartCard.”)
The administrator SmartCard with the same workshop ID is required to activate the technician
SmartCard.
► Activate the runtime rights packages on the MAN-cats technician SmartCard.

(First login,  Chapter “Activating technician SmartCard.”)
An Internet connection is required to activate the runtime rights packages.
► Set up a vehicle communication interface in MAN-cats using the VCI Manager.

( Chapter “Starting the VCI application”)
5.3.2 MAN-cats start-up without SmartCard

Instructions ► Launch the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software (double-click on the MAN-cats icon on
the desktop of the service computer).
( Chapter “Launching the MAN-cats program”)
► Purchase a licence file ("Online Basic" runtime rights) on the MAN After Sales Portal.
( Chapter “Purchasing a licence file”)
► Log into MAN-cats with the licence file.

( Chapter “Logging into MAN-cats”)
20 Brief overview of start-up HMC600_0

6 l MAN After Sales Portal (ASP)
Contents
6.1 Overview of the MAN After Sales Portal.................................22
6.2 Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal...........................23
6.3 Profile information on the MAN After Sales Portal..................24
6.4 Webshop...............................................................................25
HMC600_0 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) 21

6.1 Overview of the MAN After Sales Portal
Introduction MAN Truck & Bus SE uses the MAN After Sales Portal to provide information and offers regarding
repairs, maintenance, services and training. As a registered user, you will receive access to tech-
nical documentation, circuit diagrams, standard times, Technical Information sheets and Service
Bulletins, among other things.
You can access the MAN After Sales Portal via the following hyperlink: http://www.asp.man.eu/
The ordering methods described in this chapter differ for contracted MAN service partners.
Please contact your national company or importer about this.
Overview of content (selection):
Repair and maintenance manuals

Information and software for vehicle diagnostics with the MAN testing and diagnostic system
MAN-cats
Online catalogue for MAN Genuine spare parts
Available seminars and training courses
Contact details for the MAN Service network
Technical support
Approved service products
The content of the MAN After Sales Portal is constantly updated and adapted to the latest state of
the art.
Why do I need the MAN After Sales Portal?

The MAN After Sales Portal is required for use and for information relating to MAN-cats, updates
and support. Registration and general use are free of charge.
In addition, it is also possible to purchase SmartCards / licence files and the runtime rights required
for operation of MAN-cats. When purchasing runtime rights, the system differentiates between
users with a Smart Card and users without a Smart Card. You can find further information about
purchasing SmartCards/licence files and the required runtime rights in the following chapters:
Users with MAN-cats SmartCard ( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights”)

Users without MAN-cats SmartCard ( Chapter “Purchasing a licence file”)
Required main steps on the MAN After Sales Portal for setting up MAN-cats for workshop
operation:
Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal

Purchase of the MAN-cats diagnostic system as a complete system in the webshop
Participation in the MAN-cats online training
Purchase of the required rights to perform repairs and maintenance or diagnostics
22 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) HMC600_0

6.2 Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal
A one-off registration on the MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) is required in order to operate MAN-cats. Introduction
Registration is possible at any time, free of charge and without obligation. To be able to use ap-
plications that are subject to charge, you must log in as an ASP administrator or you will need a
logged-in ASP administrator.
You can access the MAN After Sales Portal via the following hyperlink: http://www.asp.man.eu/
It can take some time to gain full access (e.g. to the webshop) on the MAN After Sales Portal. It
is therefore recommended that registration take place as early as possible.
Registering on the MAN After Sales Portal Instructions
Fig. 6.1
► Open the MAN After Sales Portal in the browser using the following hyperlink:
http://www.asp.man.eu/
► Click on the “Register free” ( Item 1) button to start the registration process.
► Follow the instructions during the registration process until it is complete.

6.3 Profile information on the MAN After Sales Portal
Introduction Information and details relating to registration can be found in the MAN After Sales Portal in the
“My profile” area ( Item 1;  Fig. 6.2).
Overview
Fig. 6.2
User profile settings and changes can be performed only by the MAN After Sales Portal adminis-
trators in a company.
Item Description
1 The “My profile” area contains the following menu items:

Personal details
Language settings
Change password
Company data
Diagnostic data
Licensed items
Purchased user articles
Purchased company articles
My orders
Authorisations
Request portal role
Manage credit cards
2 The display field contains all the information about the selected menu item.

6.4 Webshop
The webshop ( Fig. 6.1) can be accessed via the “Webshop” navigation Item in the navigation Introduction
bar. Runtime rights for diagnostics, licence files, SmartCards, loan items, diagnostics hardware
as well as various information materials, vehicle documentation, etc. can be purchased here. It is
also possible to apply for access to applications such as the Standard Time Catalogue or spare
parts catalogue.
Individual rights-related areas of the webshop are visible only after logging into the MAN After
Sales Portal (ASP).
To be able to use applications that are subject to charge, you must log in as an ASP administra-
tor or you will need a logged-in ASP administrator.
Overview
Fig. 6.3
Pos. Column Explanation
1 Product search Targeted search for an Item number or designation.
2 Basket Information about the current status of the shopping cart. To open the
shopping cart, click on the “Go to shopping cart” button.
3 Webshop menu List of all available items for the logged-in user profile.
Select Item by clicking on the “Shopping cart” button.

7 l MAN-cats installation
Contents
7.1 Overview of MAN-cats installation.........................................28
7.2 Installing MAN-cats via download (preparation).....................29
7.3 Installing MAN-cats offline (preparation)................................31
7.4 MAN-cats installation.............................................................32
HMC600_0 MAN-cats installation 27

7.1 Overview of MAN-cats installation
Introduction There are two options for installing the MAN-cats software:
Installation via download from the MAN After Sales Portal

( Chapter “Installing MAN-cats via download (preparation)”)
The MAN-cats Installer can be downloaded from the MAN After Sales Portal via a download
hyperlink. An Internet connection is required to download the required software packages and
install the MAN-cats software.
The download hyperlink is available only to workshops without a MAN contract.
Offline installation
( Chapter “Installing MAN-cats offline (preparation)”)
The complete MAN-cats software is available as a download in the MAN-cats Installer under Ap-
plications. The downloaded file can then be unpacked and copied to an external data medium.
This option is intended, for example, to permit several service computers to be set up (download
volume) for regions with poor Internet bandwidth and, where applicable, to restore a damaged
MAN-cats installation.
A fault-free installation can only be guaranteed if you observe the following installation instructions
 Chapter “MAN-cats installation”.
28 MAN-cats installation HMC600_0

7.2 Installing MAN-cats via download (preparation)
Prior registration on the MAN After Sales Portal is necessary for this.
( Chapter “Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal”)
To start download of the MAN-cats Installer, log into the MAN After Sales Portal and navigate to the Instructions
“Diagnostic software” area as follows:
Home > Diagnostic > MAN-cats > Information for ... / Diagnostic software ( Fig. 7.1)
Fig. 7.1
► Click on the “Go to MAN-cats software” hyperlink ( Item 1) to go to the next page.
Fig. 7.2
► Start download of the MAN-cats installation program by clicking on the displayed image
( Item 1) (www.mcupdate.mantruckandbus.com/mc3launcher).

Fig. 7.3
The download progress ( Item 1) is displayed in the browser window (example for Microsoft
Edge).
Fig. 7.4
► After successful download, launch the MAN-cats installation program by clicking on the hyper-
link ( Item 1) (example for Microsoft Edge).
► Confirm the dialogue box for user account control.

After launching the MAN-cats installation program, a dialogue box opens for selecting the lan-
guage for the installation routine. The language displayed in the dialogue box depends on the
language of the operating system.
MAN-cats installation, see  Chapter “MAN-cats installation”.

7.3 Installing MAN-cats offline (preparation)
Offline installation of MAN-cats is normally carried out using an external data medium (e.g. USB Introduction
data medium, hard drive, etc.). In contrast to installation via download from the After Sales Portal,
the offline installation may have an older version depending on when it was provided. After the
initial installation, an Internet connection to the MAN update server is required to use MAN-cats. A
software update is performed and current control files required for operation must also be down-
loaded. ( Chapter “Updating MAN-cats control files”). The user must have administrator rights
for the service computer in order to be able to perform any necessary settings on the service com-
puter for installation.
All files required for offline installation can be downloaded from the update server of
MAN Truck & Bus SE and stored on an external data medium using a service comput-
er with installed MAN-cats software and the MAN-cats Installer ( Item 1;  Fig. 7.5).
You can find further information about downloading files using the MAN-cats Installer in
. Chapter “Overview of MAN-cats installation”
Fig. 7.5
The setup file must be started from the external data medium in order to start installation.
Starting the offline installation from an external data medium (USB data medium, hard drive, etc.):
► Connect external data medium to the MAN-cats service computer.
► Open Windows Explorer, e.g. by clicking on the corresponding icon in the Windows taskbar
► Open the directory in which the MAN-cats software is located:

Start > Computer > Removable media (name of the external data medium > directory with
MAN-cats software.
MAN-cats installation, see  Chapter “MAN-cats installation”.

7.4 MAN-cats installation
Instructions After launching the MAN-cats installation program, a dialogue box opens for selecting the lan-
guage for the installation routine. The language displayed in the dialogue box depends on the
language of the operating system.
Fig. 7.6
► Select the desired installation language by means of the drop-down menu ( Item 1).
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 1) to confirm the selection.

The installation process is prepared ( Fig. 7.7).
Fig. 7.7
It is recommended not to change the default target directory.
► If required, click on the “Change” button ( Item 1) to change the target directory.
► Click on the “Next” button ( Item 2) to continue the installation process.

The “Question” dialogue box ( Fig. 7.8) opens.

Fig. 7.8
In this work step, it is defined whether MAN-cats is to be launched automatically when the service
computer is started.
► Click on the button for the desired option ( Item 1).
The selection made here can be changed in the system settings of the service computer. Please
contact the system administrator or IT manager in the company for changes to the service com-
puter settings.
Installation of MAN-cats on the service computer is started ( Fig. 7.9).
Fig. 7.9
The installation process runs automatically.

Fig. 7.10
► Click on the button corresponding to the purchased licence ( Item 1).

The licence agreement ( Fig. 7.12) opens.
Security warning of the Windows firewall ( Fig. 7.12) (optional)
Fig. 7.11
► If necessary, tick the “Private networks,...” check box ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Allow access” button ( Item 2).

Fig. 7.12
► Read the licence agreement.
► Click on the “I agree to the terms of the licence agreement” button ( Item 1) if you wish to
continue the installation process.
or
► Click on the “I do not agree to the terms of the licence agreement” button ( Item 2) to can-
cel the installation process.
Fig. 7.13
The MAN-cats Installer opens and connects to the update server ( Item 1) to determine the re-
quired downloads.

Fig. 7.14
The files required for installation of MAN-cats are transferred to the hard drive of the service com-
puter ( Fig. 7.14). The overall progress and the status of the current action are displayed in the
form of bar progress bars. After completion of the download procedure, a dialogue box opens with
an overview of the software packages for installation ( Fig. 7.15).
Fig. 7.15
The dialogue box provides information such as the name of the application, the size of the file
and a version comparison of the individual applications.
► Click on the “Install update” button ( Item 1) to start installation.

Administrator rights for the service computer are required in some cases for installation of
MAN-cats. For this reason, various dialogue boxes of the user account management function
are displayed during the installation process. These contain information on the change and the
required approval. These changes must be confirmed for fault-free operation.
Remain at the service computer until installation has been completed.
Progress display for MAN-cats installation ( Fig. 7.16).
Fig. 7.16
Installation process with various information windows (example  Fig. 7.17).

Fig. 7.17
After installation has been successfully completed, a message is displayed stating that it is neces-
sary to restart the service computer ( Fig. 7.18).
Fig. 7.18
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 1) to restart the system.
After the service computer has restarted, MAN-cats can be launched via the corresponding icon
on the desktop of the service computer or alternatively via the Start menu.
Start > All Programs > MAN-cats.
When MAN-cats is started for the first time after installation, further data packages are installed.
A corresponding amount of time must be planned for this.
A software update is required after offline installation of MAN-cats. Further information on soft-
ware updates for MAN-cats can be found in  Chapter “Updating the MAN-cats software”.

8 l SmartCard
Contents
8.1 Overview of SmartCard..........................................................40
8.2 SmartCard users....................................................................43
8.3 Purchasing SmartCards.........................................................43
8.4 Activating technician SmartCard............................................44
8.5 Changing the technician SmartCard PIN................................48
8.6 Updating the technician SmartCard.......................................50
8.7 Loss of technician SmartCard................................................51
HMC600_0 SmartCard 39
8.1 Overview of SmartCard
Introduction In order to use all MAN-cats functions, it is necessary to use a SmartCard ( Fig. 8.1). The runtime
rights of the individual diagnostic packages as well as special authorisations or restrictions of the
user are stored on the Smart Card.
All the SmartCards of a workshop have the same workshop identification (WID) and each Smart-
Card has its own individual fingerprint.
The fingerprint is stored in the corresponding control units of the vehicle for certain applications or
functions of MAN-cats.
FRONT
Fig. 8.1
Item Designation Description
1 Workshop identification The WID serves as workshop identification and is identical

(WID) for all SmartCards from a single workshop.
When logging in with a SmartCard to a MAN-cats system,
the workshop identification (WID) is read out and temporarily
stored on the service computer.
2 User identification (finger- The fingerprint serves as user identification and is therefore
print) assigned individually for all SmartCards. The fingerprint can-
not be changed.
When logging in with a technician SmartCard to a MAN-cats
system, the fingerprint is read out and temporarily stored on
the service computer. In addition, the fingerprint is stored as
a signature in the individual control units depending on the
work performed.
40 SmartCard HMC600_0
Back
Fig. 8.2
1 Header The administrator SmartCard is marked in red on the back and

the technician SmartCard in grey.
2 User name Administrator or technician
3 SmartCard ID A SmartCard ID starting with “A” is an administrator SmartCard

and starting with “0” is a technician SmartCard.
4 Licence holder Workshop with site.
Information on SmartCards:
Administrator SmartCard (red) Technician SmartCard (grey)
Four-digit PIN by PIN letter Four-digit PIN

PIN cannot be changed PIN can be individually changed by a tech-
nician
PIN has no time limit PIN has no time limit
If an incorrect PIN is entered five times, the admin- Is blocked if an incorrect PIN is entered five
istrator SmartCard will be permanently locked times
Blocked administrator SmartCards must be re- Activation and unblocking by administrator
placed by MAN Truck & Bus possible
Administrator rights for all technician SmartCards
in your own workshop
Two administrator SmartCards per workshop
SmartCard does not contain any runtime rights
If the administrator PIN or PIN letter are lost, no support can be provided by MAN Truck & Bus
SE. In this case, an administrator SmartCard including a new PIN letter must be ordered as a
replacement.
The administrator must be informed immediately if the technician SmartCard is lost.
8.2 SmartCard users
The use of the MAN-cats SmartCard is divided into the following user roles:
Administrator
Mechanic
Further information on SmartCards is available on the MAN After Sales Portal.
Tasks and obligations of SmartCard users:
Benutzer (Users) Column
Administrator Order SmartCard ( Chapter “SmartCard”)

Activate SmartCard ( Chapter “Activating technician SmartCard.”)
Assign a SmartCard to a user before initial use
Assign start PIN
Manage user-specific updates
Purchasing user and runtime rights
Unlock blocked technician SmartCards
( Chapter “Activating technician SmartCard.”)
Defining user rights
Mechanic Change SmartCard PIN
( Chapter “Changing the technician SmartCard PIN”)
Notify the administrator immediately if the SmartCard is lost
8.3 Purchasing SmartCards

The SmartCard must be purchased on the MAN After Sales Portal. The areas and Introduction
items listed in the webshop depend on the user rights on the MAN After Sales Portal
( Chapter “Activating technician SmartCard.”).
Further information can be found in the “Diagnostic” area of the MAN After Sales Portal. Instructions
MAN-cats SmartCards are delivered by post and this takes time. The administrator PIN letter
required for activation is sent separately by post.
New runtime rights can be purchased at any time for SmartCards that are already owned. The
purchased SmartCards are valid for a maximum of 5 years.
8.4 Activating technician SmartCard.
Introduction A new technician SmartCard must be activated before it can be used. To activate, the first step is
to insert the administrator SmartCard and enter the corresponding administrator PIN. A start PIN
must then be assigned to the technician SmartCard and the respective user informed of this.
When logging in for the first time on a newly installed MAN-cats system with the administrator
SmartCard, an Internet connection is required so that the corresponding system files can be
transferred from the MAN server.
Instructions
Fig. 8.3
► Insert the administrator SmartCard into the SmartCard read/write device and wait until the
message “SmartCard inserted and ready” ( Item 1) is displayed.
Fig. 8.4
The display changes to “Login with administrator SmartCard” ( Item 1).
► Enter the administrator PIN ( Item 2).
► Confirm the administrator PIN with the “Login with SmartCard” button ( Item 3).
“Unlock SmartCard” ( Fig. 8.5) is started.
Fig. 8.5
► Remove the administrator SmartCard from the SmartCard read/write device.
Fig. 8.6
► Insert the technician SmartCard into the SmartCard read/write device and wait until the mes-
sage “SmartCard inserted and ready” ( Item 1) is displayed.
The “Enter new PIN” dialogue box ( Fig. 8.7) opens.
Fig. 8.7
The PIN
is a 4-digit number and only numbers from 0 to 9 may be used
has no time limit
can be changed by the user at any time
can be reset at any time using the administrator SmartCard
► Enter the new 4-digit SmartCard PIN ( Item 1) (numbers 0 to 9 only).
► Enter the new SmartCard PIN ( Item 2) again.
The new SmartCard PIN is automatically transferred to the technician SmartCard ( Fig. 8.8).
Fig. 8.8
► After successfully saving the SmartCard PIN, click on the “Back to start page” button
( Item 1).
You are returned to the login screen ( Fig. 8.9).
Fig. 8.9
► Hand over technician SmartCard with associated SmartCard PIN to technician.
When logging in for the first time with the newly activated technician SmartCard, an Internet
connection must be available to then transfer the relevant user and runtime rights from the MAN
server.
8.5 Changing the technician SmartCard PIN
Introduction This chapter describes how to change the PIN of the technician SmartCard. This is recommended
after receiving the technician SmartCard and/or if you suspect that the PIN has become known.
Instructions
Fig. 8.10
► If necessary, insert the technician SmartCard into the SmartCard read/write device and wait
until the message “SmartCard inserted and ready” is displayed.
► Click on the “Opens the Change PIN dialogue” button ( Item 1).

The “Change PIN” dialogue box opens ( Fig. 8.11).
Fig. 8.11
► Enter the current SmartCard PIN ( Item 1).
► Enter the new SmartCard PIN ( Item 2).
► Enter the new SmartCard PIN ( Item 3) again.
The new SmartCard PIN is automatically transferred to the technician SmartCard
( Fig. 8.12).
Fig. 8.12
► After successfully saving the SmartCard PIN, click on the “Back to start page” button
( Item 1).
You are returned to the login screen ( Fig. 8.13).
Fig. 8.13
8.6 Updating the technician SmartCard
Introduction The smooth running of MAN-cats can only be guaranteed with a regularly updated technician
SmartCard.
It may be necessary to update the technician SmartCard for the following reasons:
Updating the runtime rights when purchasing new or additional packages of runtime rights
Regular updating as part of the use of the technician SmartCard
8.6.1 Updating packages of runtime rights

After packages of runtime rights have been purchased, these have to be activated on the corre-
sponding technician SmartCard. To do so, it is necessary to update the technician SmartCard.
The corresponding technician SmartCard is updated automatically at the next login to MAN-cats.
An Internet connection is essential for this.
8.6.2 Regular updating of the technician SmartCard

Regular updating of the technician SmartCard is required for the runtime rights stored on the tech-
nician SmartCard. The technician SmartCard must be updated at regular intervals of four weeks
at the most. The corresponding technician SmartCard is updated automatically at the next login to
MAN-cats. An Internet connection is essential for this.
Corresponding information is displayed when logging in to MAN-cats.
When logging in with a technician SmartCard or using a licence file (computer ID), corresponding
symbols are shown in the information bar of MAN-cats depending on the remaining activation time
of the runtime rights.
Symbol Explanation
Runtime rights valid for between one and four weeks
Runtime rights valid for less than one week
After this period has expired, it is no longer possible to log in to MAN-cats without updating the
technician SmartCard ( Fig. 8.14). If an attempt is made to log in with an expired technician
SmartCard, the technician SmartCard will be locked and cannot be used again until a connection
to the server has been established.
Fig. 8.14
8.7 Loss of technician SmartCard
Report loss of the technician SmartCard to the administrator immediately.
Further information on SmartCards is available on the MAN After Sales Portal.
9 l User and runtime rights
Contents
9.1 Purchasing runtime rights......................................................55
9.1.1 Purchasing runtime rights with technician SmartCard............55
9.1.2 Purchasing runtime rights without technician SmartCard.......56
HMC600_0 User and runtime rights 53

Introduction User rights
The MAN-cats test and diagnostic system was designed to be used with a wide range of products
and brands. So-called user rights allow the test and diagnostic system to be adapted in terms of
its functions, possibilities and offerings to the specific needs of the respective user groups. For
example, the “Workshop” role offers all the functions and contents for the repair of vehicles. Users
of other user groups, such as the “Service Engine” role, are provided with all the functions and
content for diagnosing and repairing engines for installation (rail, marine, etc.) in a targeted way.
For the sake of clarity, this user group is not offered vehicle-relevant content.
The user rights can be used to adapt the MAN-cats test and diagnostic system individually for the
desired area.
Runtime rights
The term runtime rights refers to all rights packages available for user rights for operation of
MAN-cats. These may be, for example: read-only access with the technician SmartCard, licence
file or optional additional packages.
Runtime rights are offered for different periods, e.g. hours, days, etc. User and runtime rights can
be purchased on the MAN After Sales Portal.
Once the runtime rights for a technician SmartCard have expired, MAN-cats can no longer be
operated with this technician SmartCard.
If there is an existing connection with a vehicle, started diagnostic sessions can also be completed
after expiry of the runtime rights.
The runtime rights are tied to hardware when a computer ID is used.
54 User and runtime rights HMC600_0

9.1 Purchasing runtime rights
The ordering methods described in this chapter differ for contracted MAN service partners.
Please contact your national company or importer about this.
The “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file) with subsequent download can be purchased via Introduction
the MAN After Sales Portal (http://www.asp.man.eu/). The computer ID of the service computer
( Chapter “Storing the computer ID”) and an Internet connection are required for this. Further
information about purchasing a licence file can be found in  Chapter “User and runtime rights”.
Instructions for purchasing the licence file can be found on the MAN After Sales Portal
(www.asp.man.eu).
9.1.1 Purchasing runtime rights with technician SmartCard
Purchasing runtime rights before you have received the technician SmartCard will shorten the
period of use for the purchased runtime.
A technician SmartCard with “Active” status is necessary for purchasing runtime rights. Informa-
tion about the status of your purchased SmartCard is available on the MAN After Sales Portal
under the menu items “My profile” and “Diagnostic data”.
All runtime rights must be purchased and assigned individually for each technician SmartCard.
► Purchase SmartCard. Instructions
► Log into the MAN After Sales Portal ( Chapter “Overview of the MAN After Sales Portal”).
► Open the webshop ( Chapter “Webshop”).
► Select the desired runtime rights (MAN-cats Item group > Runtime rights).
Clicking on the “Shopping cart” button opens the “SmartCard assignment” window.
► Assign the runtime rights to the desired technician SmartCard and confirm with the “OK” button.
► Confirm the displayed list of items.
► Click on the “Go to checkout” button to call up the payment process.
HMC600_0 User and runtime rights 55

► Select the desired payment method (select credit card).
► Complete the purchase by clicking on the “Pay now” button.
► To activate the runtime rights on the selected technician SmartCard, you must update the tech-
nician SmartCard.
9.1.2 Purchasing runtime rights without technician SmartCard

Introduction The “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file) must be purchased in order to operate MAN-cats
without a technician SmartCard. The licence file then made available for download is required to
log in to MAN-cats. The computer ID of the service computer is required to purchase the “Online
Basic” runtime rights (licence file).
► Store computer ID ( Chapter “Storing the computer ID”).
► Purchase licence file (“Online Basic” runtime rights) ( Chapter “Purchasing a licence file”).
56 User and runtime rights HMC600_0

10 l Licence file
Contents
10.1 Purchasing a licence file........................................................58
10.2 Storing the computer ID.........................................................59
10.2.1 Copying the computer ID to the clipboard..............................59
10.2.2 Storing the computer ID manually..........................................61
HMC600_0 Licence file 57

10.1 Purchasing a licence file
Introduction A licence file (“Online Basic” runtime rights) is required to access or log into MAN-cats without a
SmartCard. The computer ID of the service computer is required to purchase the licence file.
The fingerprint cannot be stored as a signature when accessing the system without a SmartCard,
which is why the user then has only a limited working area available.
Instructions for purchasing the licence file can be found on the MAN After Sales Portal
(www.asp.man.eu).
When you log in with a licence file, the system performs a time check between the licence file
and the server. An Internet connection is required for this.
The purchased “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file) functions only for the computer ID that
you have specified. It is therefore only possible to log in on the service computer with the corre-
sponding computer ID.
Instructions ► Log into the MAN After Sales Portal.
► Open the webshop ( Chapter “Webshop”).
► Select the desired “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file).
► Assign the “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file) to a computer ID that has already been
stored.
► Confirm the displayed list of items.
► Call up payment process.
► Select the desired payment method (select credit card).
► Complete the purchase by clicking on the “Pay” button.
After completing the purchase of the “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file), this file must be
stored locally by downloading it to the corresponding MAN-cats service computer. The directory
location is needed for opening the file in MAN-cats.
► In the dialogue box, click on the “Go to Online Basic” button in order to directly access the menu
Item "Purchased company articles".
► Download the licence file “Rights package read access to vehicle computer ID”.
► Save on a local data medium and import the file to the desired MAN-cats system (only when
downloading the licence file from a different computer)
58 Licence file HMC600_0

10.2 Storing the computer ID
During installation of MAN-cats, a so-called computer ID is generated for the service computer Introduction
used.
When the “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file) are purchased, it is necessary to specify the
computer ID of the corresponding service computer. By doing this, the purchased “Online Basic”
runtime rights (licence file) are assigned to this service computer.
The computer ID can be found on the start screen of MAN-cats ( Item 1;  Fig. 10.1).
► Log in to the MAN After Sales Portal as administrator. Instructions
► Call up the menu Item “Administration”.
► Call up the sub-items “Diagnostic Management” and “Manage SmartCard / Computer ID / Se-
cureID token” ( Fig. 10.2).
► Store the computer ID automatically or manually in the input field provided:

 Chapter “Copying the computer ID to the clipboard”
 Chapter “Storing the computer ID manually”
10.2.1 Copying the computer ID to the clipboard
The prerequisite is that access to the MAN After Sales Portal is possible via the MAN-cats com-
puter.
To prevent any incorrect entry of the computer ID when purchasing the licence file, it is possible to
copy the computer ID directly to the clipboard of the service computer.
Fig. 10.1
► Click on the “Copies the computer ID to the clipboard” button ( Item 1).

The corresponding message of the operating system ( Item 2) is shown. This message can
be closed.

► Switch to the MAN After Sales Portal.
Fig. 10.2
► In the MAN After Sales Portal, insert the computer ID from the clipboard into the input line
( Item 1).
► Click on the “Add new computer ID” button ( Item 3) to add the entered computer ID.
► Click on the “Save” button ( Item 2) to apply the information.

10.2.2 Storing the computer ID manually
If the computer ID is entered incorrectly, a subsequently purchased licence file will not function
on the service computer. Avoid typing errors when entering the computer ID.
Fig. 10.3
► Read off the computer ID ( Item 1;  Fig. 10.1) and enter it in the input field ( Item 1).
► Check the entered computer ID ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Add new computer ID” button ( Item 3) to add the entered computer ID.
► Click on the “Save” button ( Item 2) to apply the information.

11 l MAN-cats Installer
Contents
11.1 News (notification centre)........................................................66
11.2 Functions/settings of the MAN-cats Installer............................68
11.3 Checking for updates...............................................................69
11.4 MAN-cats troubleshooting........................................................70
11.5 Add software............................................................................74
11.6 Download applications.............................................................75
11.7 Download file...........................................................................78
11.8 Exporting an installation (in preparation)..................................86
11.9 Showing the log.......................................................................90
11.10 Settings...................................................................................92
11.11 Showing download.................................................................102
11.12 Exiting and closing.................................................................103
11.13 Taskbar selection menu.........................................................104
HMC600_0 MAN-cats Installer 63

Introduction The MAN-cats Installer acts as a management program in MAN-cats. Among other things, it
offers the option of displaying current messages/information, downloading available applications
and files, displaying log information or changing the system configuration of MAN-cats.
The MAN-cats Installer is also responsible for the starting procedure for MAN-cats. Every time
that MAN-cats is launched, the MAN-cats Installer checks whether any software packages are
available to download. A connection to the update server is required for this.
The MAN-cats Installer is also used for installing the MAN-cats software via the MAN After Sales
Portal or from an external data medium. It controls the download of necessary updates, software
packages and their subsequent installation.
Overview
Fig. 11.1
1 Information area The contents of the corresponding buttons and changing MAN-cats
messages are displayed in this area.
2 Window control Offers the option of returning to the start screen and minimising,
maximising or closing the dialogue box (the MAN-cats Installer con-
tinues running in the background and is only closed when MAN-cats
is closed).
3 Brand logo The brand logo indicates which area of the multi-brand tester has
been selected or started automatically.
4 Download This area enables applications or files provided on the update serv-
er to be downloaded.
Download ( Chapter “Download applications”)

Download ( Chapter “Download file”)
64 MAN-cats Installer HMC600_0

5 Settings The “Settings” area includes the following items:
General
Connection
File system
User interface
Actions
Info
6 “Protokoll” (Record) The “Log” area contains information about the installation procedures
performed and download activities.( Chapter “Showing the log”)
7 MAN-cats Installer The various buttons provide quick access to the following functions:
functions
Search for update
Error rectification
Add software
Downloading application
Downloading file
Export installation
( Chapter “Functions/settings of the MAN-cats Installer”)
8 Cancel Ends the MAN-cats Installer. To do this, MAN-cats must first be

closed.
9 Language setting The country flag symbolises the set language for the MAN-cats In-
staller and MAN-cats. The button provides quick access to the lan-
guage settings of the MAN-cats installer. By clicking on the country
flag, the language setting of the MAN-cats Installer can be changed
immediately and the language setting for the MAN-cats software
can be pre-set. The change in the language setting for MAN-cats
will become active when the system is next restarted.
Please note: Log information etc. that was recorded before the time
of language changeover will not be updated retroactively to the new
language.
10 Data source con- Shows the source of the data, applications or files for MAN-cats:
nection status
MAN update server or
Offline installation (directory/file path)

11.1 News (notification centre)
Overview
Fig. 11.2
Item Description
1 Information area for accessing the individual view (full screen mode) of the currently
displayed messages.
2 Preview of the latest message. Click on a message to display it in the entire information
area (full-screen mode).
Messages of the MAN-cats Installer in full-screen mode
Fig. 11.3

Item Description
1 Individual display of the message with further information, if available.

2 List of several messages ( Fig. 11.4) with further information, if available.
3 “Print message” button. Prerequisite: the printer is installed and set up on the service
computer.
4 Click on the “Close” button to return to the start screen.
5 Click on the “Right” button to display older messages.
6 Click on the “Left” button to display new messages. This button is only shown if the latest
message is not displayed.
Fig. 11.4

11.2 Functions/settings of the MAN-cats Installer
Introduction In order to access the individual functions and settings of the MAN-cats Installer, the individ-
ual buttons must be clicked on or quick access opened via the icon in the taskbar. Individu-
al functions and applications are described in detail in  Chapter “Checking for updates” to
 Chapter “Taskbar selection menu” .
Instructions Option 1: Open the main menu by quick access.
► Right-click on the “MAN-cats” button in the Windows taskbar or in the information area.
The “Main menu” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.5) opens.
Fig. 11.5
Option 2: Open the main menu of the MAN-cats Installer.
Fig. 11.6
The main menu ( Item 1) of the MAN-cats Installer contains the following functions:
Check for updates

Error rectification
Add software
Download applications
Downloading file
Export installation (in preparation)

11.3 Checking for updates
In normal use of MAN-cats and with an existing Internet connection, MAN-cats automatically Introduction
searches for new content (notifications and software packages) on the update server during the
start-up process and then at regular intervals and downloads them if required.
If necessary, e.g. after a long period of working without an Internet connection, it is also possible to Instructions
check for notifications and/or software packages manually via the menu Item “Check for updates”
and to download these as appropriate. An Internet connection is required for the function.
Fig. 11.7
► Click on the “Check for updates” button ( Item 1).

MAN-cats Installer searches for updates ( Fig. 11.8).
Fig. 11.8
The search operation ( Item 2) is carried out. If updates are found, they are automatically downloaded in
the background “Download” ( Item 1).

11.4 MAN-cats troubleshooting
Introduction If a malfunction message appears during the start-up process of MAN-cats due to an incorrect
installation of damaged or missing files, it is possible to rectify the problem with the “Troubleshoot-
ing” function.
Instructions
Fig. 11.9
► Click on the “Troubleshooting” button ( Item 1).

The “Troubleshooting” dialogue box (  Fig. 11.10) opens.
Fig. 11.10
► Click on the “Information” button ( Item 1) of the required troubleshooting process.

The “Help” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.11) for the possible error opens.

Fig. 11.11
► Read through the information ( Item 2).
► Use the arrows ( Item 3) to scroll forwards and backwards.

Proceed as follows to access the Help page:
► For further information, click on the help link ( Item 1) or the “Left” arrow.
The “Help page” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.12) opens.
Fig. 11.12
► Select the desired help link ( Item 1) for the wizard.

The corresponding dialogue box opens.

Menu items in the “Troubleshooting” dialogue box are arranged in ascending order according to
how long they take. In the event of a malfunction, please first execute the menu items “Analyse
connection problems”, “Check for completeness”.
The menu items “Reinstall diagnostic processes”, “Repair main applications” and “Reinstall
everything” take a lot of time.
The following options are available in this function:

Analyse connection problems
If there are connection problems with the MAN update server, select the menu Item “Analyse con-
nection problems” for troubleshooting options.
Various checks, for example on proxy settings or Internet quality, will be carried out automatically.
The result of the check is then displayed in a dialogue box.
Check for completeness.

This check verifies that all MAN-cats® software packages have been fully installed.
It detects any potentially missing software packages/files.
The result of the check is displayed in a dialogue box.
Reinstall diagnostic processes

This check is used to analyse the various diagnostic packages and then attempt a repair.
Faulty diagnostic packages may be downloaded and installed again from the update server.
Repair main applications

Please perform this action if you suspect that one or more main applications, such as the MAN-cats
software, the VCI software, the licence centre or the MAN-cats Emulator are damaged.
The relevant applications will be uninstalled and subsequently reinstalled. Please allow sufficient
time for this operation.

Re-install all files
With this action MAN-cats can be reinstalled completely.
By selecting the relevant check boxes you can choose to reinstall individual modules or all mod-
ules.
The selected modules will be uninstalled, downloaded and reinstalled.
In rare cases, a malfunction message may be displayed and the MAN-cats Installer may not be
visible on the screen. The icon for the MAN-cats Installer is located in the Windows taskbar or in
the information area.

11.5 Add software
Introduction The “Add software” menu Item offers the option of downloading and subsequently installing special
software packages provided on the MAN update server for individual functions, applications and/
or user groups.
Instructions
Fig. 11.13
► Click on the “Add software” button ( Item 1).

The “Add software” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.14) opens.
Fig. 11.14
If the display area is empty, this means that there are currently no software packages available
for download.
► Select a corresponding software package and start the download and installation by clicking on
the “OK” button ( Item 1).

11.6 Download applications
This menu Item ( Item 1) allows you to download optional applications and save them in a freely Introduction
selectable directory/folder. Files are provided on the MAN update server as compressed/packed
files (e.g. ZIP format). After downloading, this file may have to be extracted/unpacked before in-
stallation. Further information on the corresponding applications will be made available separately
as appropriate. An Internet connection is required for this function.
Instructions
Fig. 11.15
► Click on the “Download applications” button ( Item 1).

Information is retrieved from the MAN update server ( Fig. 11.16).
Fig. 11.16
The dialogue box with the applications to be installed ( Fig. 11.17) opens.

Fig. 11.17
Item Description
1 Input area for filter options. You can restrict the list of applications to the applications you
are looking for by entering search terms.
2 Display area of all available applications. If the display area is empty, this means that
there are currently no applications available for download.
3 Display of the total required memory space for all selected applications.
Fig. 11.18

► Mark the desired applications in the check box ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Directory” button ( Item 2) to check or change the storage location.
The default storage location can be changed in the configuration ( Chapter “File system”) for
the MAN-cats Installer.
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 3) to start downloading the applications.

The other work steps, e.g. extracting/unpacking the applications, are identical to those of the
“Download file” function ( Chapter “Download file”) and are described there.
Detailed information on the respective application, any required installation or operation etc. will
be provided in a separate document.

11.7 Download file
Introduction This menu Item ( Item 1) allows optionally provided files or file packages to be downloaded and
saved in a freely selectable directory/folder. Files are provided on the MAN update server as com-
pressed/packed files (e.g. ZIP format). After downloading, this file may need to be extracted/un-
packed before use. Further information on the corresponding files and file packages will be made
available separately as appropriate. An Internet connection is required for this function.
Instructions
Fig. 11.19
► Click on the “Download file” button ( Item 1).

The “Download file” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.20) opens.
Fig. 11.20
The “Select file” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.21) opens.

Fig. 11.21
Item Description
1 Input area for filter options. You can filter the list of files/file packages by entering search
terms for the file or file package you are looking for.
2 Display area of all available files/file packages. If the display area is empty, this means
that there are currently no files/file packages available for download.
3 Display of the total required memory space for all selected files/file packages. A mes-
sage will be displayed if there is insufficient memory space.

Fig. 11.22
► Mark the desired files by means of the check box ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Directory” button ( Item 2) to check or change the storage location.
The default storage location can be changed in the MAN-cats Installer settings
( Chapter “File system”).
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 3) to start downloading the files.

The MAN-cats Installer switches to the “Download” area ( Fig. 11.23).
Fig. 11.23

The download progress of the individual files is shown in the display area ( Item 1).
The entire download progress is displayed in the display area ( Item 6).
If necessary, the following work steps can be carried out:
► Click on the “Stop download” button ( Item 3) to pause the entire download.
► Click on the “Allow download to continue” button ( Item 2) to continue the entire download.
► Click on the “Select directory” button ( Item 5) to open the target directory and adapt it if re-
quired.
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 4) to cancel the respective download.

When the downloads are complete, the “Downloads complete” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.24) opens.
Fig. 11.24
► Click on the “OK” button.

The “Downloads complete” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.24) closes.
► Restart MAN-cats to start the installation process.

11.7.1 Download process
Introduction Once the download operation has started, the MAN-cats Installer automatically switches to the
“Download” function. The download process can be viewed, interrupted and continued there. The
download can also be deleted or the target directory changed.
Overview
Fig. 11.25
Item Description
1 Button for continuing an interrupted download process.

2 Button for interrupting all current download processes. All file packages shown in the
display area represent a download procedure and are interrupted when the button is
pressed. The loading bar is then hidden.
3 Button for opening the target directory directly ( Chapter “Copying file packages”). The
button should only be pressed after the download procedure has been completed as
only then will all file packages be visible. File packages can be unpacked or copied via
the dialogue box.
4 Button for cancelling and removing the currently active download.
5 Progress display of the current download process.
6 Progress display of all currently running download processes. The display disappears
after the download processes have been completed.
The default target directory and the downloads it contains are not automatically deleted by
MAN-cats. It is therefore possible that there may no longer be sufficient memory space on the
service computer in the case of frequent downloads of large file packages.
Check the target directory at regular intervals and remove any file packages that are no longer
needed.

11.7.2 Copying file packages
After completion of the download procedure, it is possible to copy the downloaded file packages Introduction
to a different location, e.g. to an external data medium or a new target directory on the service
computer.
Instructions
Fig. 11.26
► Click on the “Select directory” button ( Item 1).

The “Target directory” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.27) opens.
Fig. 11.27
The copy operation is a basic function of the operating system and is described in its
documentation

11.7.3 Extracting/unpacking file packages
Introduction If several files and/or files which belong together or entire directories are to be sent or made avail-
able for download, these are normally provided as compressed/packed file packages. These can
be extracted/unpacked with Windows functions for further work steps or for installing software
programs.
The description of the following work steps is based on the Microsoft Windows 10 operating sys-
tem by way of example. Deviations in other operating systems are possible.
Instructions
Fig. 11.28
► Right-click on the desired file with the mouse.
► Click on the “Extract all” button ( Item 1).

The “Extract directory” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.29) opens.

Fig. 11.29
► Click on the “Browse” button ( Item 2) and specify the target directory.
► Check target directory ( Item 1).
► Activate the “Display files after extraction” check box ( Item 3).
► Click on the “Extract” button ( Item 4).

The directory is extracted and opened in the “Extracted directory” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.30).
Fig. 11.30
All content of the extracted/unpacked file package is displayed and is available for further use.

11.8 Exporting an installation (in preparation)
Introduction This function is used to provide a complete installation for a different system. In this process,
missing content is downloaded and all the necessary installation files for an installation medium
are made available. This means that it is not necessary to download the installation files again on
the target system.
Instructions Depending on the hardware equipment and Internet connection, this function requires an increased
amount of time. This must be taken into account when creating an installation export.
► Click on the “Export installation” button ( Item 1).

The “Export installation” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.31) opens
Fig. 11.31
► Read through the message and confirm with the “Yes” button ( Item 1).
Fig. 11.32
► Click on the “Directory” button ( Item 1).


Fig. 11.33
It is recommended to use the default target directory to create the installation export.
► Set the desired target directory ( Item 1) according to the operating system used.
► Click on the “Select storage location” button ( Item 2).


Fig. 11.34
► Compare required memory space ( Item 1) with available memory space ( Item 2) of the
selected target directory ( Item 3).
► If necessary, select a new target directory with sufficient storage capacity.
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 4).

The “Start copying process” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.35) opens.
Fig. 11.35
► Click on the “Start copying process” button ( Item 1).

The copying process starts and runs automatically.
After copying has been completed, the “Copying complete” dialogue box opens ( Fig. 11.36).

Fig. 11.36
► Click on the “Open directory” button ( Item 1).

The “Directory” dialogue box (  Fig. 11.37) opens.
Fig. 11.37
The data record ( Item 1) is available for further use.
► Close all still open dialogue boxes for the “Export installation” process.

11.9 Showing the log
Introduction The MAN-cats Installer has a log function which allows the installation operations and download
activities to be logged and displayed.
Overview
Fig. 11.38
► Click on the “Show log” button ( Item 1).

The MAN-cats Installer opens the “Log” tab ( Fig. 11.39).
Fig. 11.39

Column/sym-
Item Explanation
bol
1 “Export protocol” button for saving log information in the desired target
directory.
The "Export protocol" function supports the user in providing information in
support cases.
2 “Print log” button for printing log information. Prerequisite: Printer has been
installed.
The “Print log” function supports the user in providing information in sup-
port cases.
3 “Open filter” button for opening the input field and “Delete filter” button.
4 Input field and “Delete filter” button.
5 “Category” button for filtering by the following categories:

Download
Installation
Roll back
All
6 Date Time of execution of the individual actions.
7 Severity Information, fault message, warning

(log type)
8 Type of action “I” = component was installed, added
“D” = component, file package was downloaded
9 User Last updated 02/21 without information
10 Work Last updated 02/21 without information
11 Message Message and description of the action.
12 “Empty log” button to delete the log information that was previously avail-
able.
13 Browse Scroll forwards and backwards in the available pages.

14 Page size Number of displayed messages per page.
15 Last updated 02/21 without information

11.10 Settings
Introduction The “Open configuration” menu Item can be used to perform system-relevant settings for MAN-cats
and to create log files for MAN-cats Support.
Instructions
Fig. 11.40
► Click on the “Settings” button ( Item 1).

The MAN-cats Installer opens the “Settings” tab ( Fig. 11.41).
Fig. 11.41
The “Settings” window always starts in the most recently selected setting option.

Item Description
1 Bar with buttons for setting options:

General
Connection
File system
User interface
Actions
Info
2 Display area with settings options for the individual settings.

General
Fig. 11.42
► If required, click on the “General” button ( Item 3).
► Activate the “Operating mode” button ( Item 1).

The MAN-cats Installer remains open as a window.
or
► Deactivate the “Operating mode” button ( Item 1).

The MAN-cats Installer is closed when MAN-cats is started.
► To reopen the MAN-cats installer, double-click on the “MAN-cats Installer” button in the taskbar.
► Click on the button for the desired language ( Item 2).

The desired language is set ( Item 4).
► Click on the “Save” button ( Item 5).

The settings are saved.
► Restart MAN-cats.

Connection
Fig. 11.43
Item Description
1 Maximum download rate in MB/s

2 Proxy server settings:
Use automatic settings. It is initially attempted to establish a connection without a
proxy server. The proxy server is only used after this.
Use system settings
Do not use a proxy server.
► Click on the “Connection” button ( Item 3).
► Perform the desired settings under “Maximum download rate” ( Item 1) and “Proxy server
settings” ( Item 2).


File system
Fig. 11.44
It is recommended to keep the default directories or paths. This can significantly shorten the time
required for troubleshooting with online help.
► Click on the “File system” button ( Item 4).
Changing the installation path
► Click on the “Directory path” button ( Item 1).

The “Installation destination” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.45) opens.
Fig. 11.45
Original installation drive: C:/ > MAN > MAN-CATS III

Changing the download directory
► Click on the “Directory path” button ( Item 2;  Fig. 11.44).

The “Download directory” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.46) opens.
Fig. 11.46
Original installation drive: C:/ > MAN > MAN-CATS III > download
Changing the additional download path
► Click on the “Additional directory path” button ( Item 2;  Fig. 11.44).

Fig. 11.47
Original installation drive: C:/ > MAN > MAN-CATS III > temp

Changing the additional download path
► Click on the “Directory path” button ( Item 2;  Fig. 11.44).

Fig. 11.48
Original installation drive: C:/ > MAN > MAN-CATS III > temp
► Click on the “Save” button ( Item 5;  Fig. 11.44).


Actions
Fig. 11.49
► Click on the “Actions” button ( Item 5).
► Click on the “Troubleshooting” button ( Item 1).

The “Troubleshooting” dialogue box opens. ( Chapter “MAN-cats troubleshooting”)
► Click on the “Create working area snapshot” button ( Item 2).
► Click on the “Resubmit download request” button ( Item 3).
► Click on the “Delete saved proxy password” button ( Item 4).

► Restart the MAN-cats installer.

Info
Fig. 11.50
► Click on the “Info” button ( Item 3).

The following information is stored in the “Company information” area ( Item 2):
Address
Phone number
Fax
E-mail
Contact address
► Click on the “Display licence agreement” button ( Item 1).
The “Licence agreements” dialogue box ( Fig. 11.51) opens.
Fig. 11.51

► Scroll to the top of the dialogue box, read through the licence agreement and close the dialogue
box by clicking on the “OK” button ( Item 1).

For details on editing the information, see

 Chapter “Functions/settings of the MAN-cats Installer”.

11.11 Showing download
Introduction Using the “Show download” menu item, it is possible to display the current download procedures,
e.g. normal MAN-cats updates, special applications or software packages. Information is displayed
about the designation of the software packages and the current status of the download procedures.
Instructions
Fig. 11.52
► Click on the “Download” button ( Item 1).

The MAN-cats installer opens the “Download” tab ( Fig. 11.53).
Fig. 11.53

11.12 Exiting and closing
The MAN-cats Installer is normally ended automatically when the MAN-cats software is ended. Introduction
The icon disappears from the Windows taskbar or the information area.
If the MAN-cats installer does not close automatically due to a problem in individual cases, it is
possible to exit the MAN-cats Installer manually with the “Exit” function ( Item 1). This ensures
that the MAN-cats software restarts without any problems.
Use the “Exit” function only if the MAN-cats Installer is not ended automatically.
Fig. 11.54

11.13 Taskbar selection menu
Introduction The individual functions of the MAN-cats Installer can also be accessed via the quick access func-
tions in the Windows taskbar or the information area.
Instructions
Fig. 11.55
► Right-click on the MAN-cats Installer icon ( Item 1) in the Windows taskbar or in the informa-
tion area.
The “Menu items” dialogue box ( Item 2) opens.
► Select the desired menu Item in the “Menu items” dialogue box ( Item 2).
The MAN-cats Installer is opened in the desired menu item.

12 l Updating MAN-cats
Contents
12.1 Updating the MAN-cats software.........................................106
12.2 Updating MAN-cats control files...........................................108
HMC600_0 Updating MAN-cats 105

12.1 Updating the MAN-cats software
Introduction Regular updating is necessary to ensure that the full functional scope of MAN-cats is always avail-
able.
The MAN-cats software is updated in two work steps:
Download software packages ( Chapter “Downloading software packages”)

Install software packages ( Chapter “Installing software packages”)
12.1.1 Downloading software packages

Automatic update
Every time MAN-cats is started and there is an existing Internet connection, the MAN-cats Install-
er automatically checks for updates. The system compares the versions of the installed software
packages and the available software packages on the MAN update server.
Available updates are downloaded during the operation of MAN-cats. Work with MAN-cats can be
continued during the download (download takes place in the background).
When MAN-cats is next restarted, you will be informed that software packages are available for
installation ( Chapter “Installing software packages”).
Manual updates
If no Internet connection was available when MAN-cats was started, no check is performed for
MAN-cats updates. You therefore have the option of checking for software updates and download-
ing the software packages manually via the MAN-cats Installer ( Chapter “Checking for updates”).
Instructions 12.1.2 Installing software packages

When MAN-cats is restarted and software updates are available, a dialogue box with an overview
of all software packages available for updating is displayed ( Fig. 12.1). You can now either carry
out the updates immediately or postpone this to a later, more convenient time.
Fig. 12.1
106 Updating MAN-cats HMC600_0

► Click on the “Install update” button ( Item 1) to update MAN-cats immediately.
Depending on the number and size of the data packages and the performance of the service
computer, the update process may take some time. MAN-cats is not available during the update
process.
► Click on the “Skip installation” button ( Item 2) to postpone the update of MAN-cats until a
later, more convenient time. You will again be offered the option of updating when MAN-cats is
next restarted.
Fig. 12.2
The update is usually complete when the “Status information” dialogue box ( Item 1) has been
closed.
Depending on the scope of the update, a message may be displayed requesting you to restart the
service computer.
Fig. 12.3
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 1) to restart the service computer and complete the update.

12.2 Updating MAN-cats control files
Control files are data packages that contain vehicle-specific information. The data packages are
needed for individual service processes. The control files contain information such as:
Installed control units of a specific vehicle series

Available special actions for Technical Information sheets (TIs) for individual vehicles
Data for vehicle parametrisation
The control files are generated by MAN database systems, and are then made available and can
be downloaded via the update server of MAN Truck & Bus SE. Downloading new control files takes
place automatically when diagnostic sessions are closed and uploaded if the versions on the ser-
vice computer are older than those on the update server.
The control files can also be downloaded manually if required. There are two options available for
this:
In the vehicle identification.

( Chapter “Updating the control files in the vehicle identification”)
In the MAN-cats system settings/user preferences.

( Chapter “Opening system settings”)
An Internet connection is required to update the control files.
► Log in to MAN-cats to access the vehicle identification ( Fig. 12.4).
Fig. 12.4

12.2.1 Updating the control files in the vehicle identification
► Click on the “Purge data” button ( Item 1;  Fig. 12.4) to start updating the MAN-cats control
files.
Fig. 12.5
The update process takes place without any user interaction and has been completed when the
dialogue box ( Fig. 12.5) has been closed.
12.2.2 Updating the control files in the system settings
Fig. 12.6
► Click on the “System settings” button ( Item 1) to open the settings.

The “System settings” window opens (Fig. 12.7).

Fig. 12.7
► Open the menu in the following path:

Information > Versions of the control files ( Item 1).
► Then click on the “Update now” button ( Item 2) to download new MAN-cats control files if
required.
Fig. 12.8
The update process takes place without any user interaction and has been completed when the
dialogue box ( Fig. 12.8) has been closed.

13 l MAN-cats user interface
Contents
13.1 Application area................................................................... 113
13.2 Header bar........................................................................... 113
13.3 Toolbar................................................................................. 113
13.4 Status bar............................................................................ 114
HMC600_0 MAN-cats user interface 111

Introduction The MAN-cats software has a graphic user interface. Menu navigation is possible using the mouse,
keyboard and/or touchpad.
Fig. 13.1
Fig. 13.2
Item Description
1 Scope
2 Header bar
3 Application-specific toolbar
4 Permanent toolbar
5 Status bar
112 MAN-cats user interface HMC600_0

13.1 Application area
The application area contains all the information about the individual applications and/or functions
such as selection menus, monitoring windows etc.
13.2 Header bar

Additional information is displayed in the header bar, such as:
Designation of the application area

Vehicle identification number (17-character VIN)
Vehicle production number (7-character VIN)
Control unit designation and the associated Item number
The scope of additional information displayed in the header bar depends on the currently open
application area in MAN-cats.
13.3 Toolbar
Toolbars consist of individual buttons. Using these buttons, it is possible to access individual tools
and functions that are needed for working with MAN-cats. The buttons are actuated by clicking with
the mouse cursor, for example.
Two different types of toolbars are used in MAN-cats:
Application-specific toolbar
Permanent toolbar
Individual buttons may be deactivated depending on the running application. Buttons that are
deactivated by a running application are transparent. The defined button function cannot be
selected in this case.
13.3.1 Application-specific toolbar

The application-specific toolbar contains all the buttons that are needed for working with the cur-
rently selected application. The number and selection of buttons in the application-specific toolbar
vary depending on the running application.
13.3.2 Permanent toolbar

The permanent toolbar is always present independently of the application area. The functions of
the individual buttons are independent of the application area.
HMC600_0 MAN-cats user interface 113

13.4 Status bar
The status bar shows you various information about the status of your MAN-cats system and the
currently logged-in user. The display is as follows (from left to right):
Date
Time
Workshop ID
Fingerprint
Application path
Smart Card status
114 MAN-cats user interface HMC600_0

14 l Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) T400
Contents
14.1 Requirements...................................................................... 116
14.2 Hardware description...........................................................120
14.3 Start-up of T400 Vehicle Communication Interface..............127
14.4 Vehicle Communication Interface Manager..........................138
14.5 Starting the configuration wizard..........................................187
14.6 Starting the VCI application.................................................189
14.7 Checking for and installing VCI firmware updates................192
14.8 WiFi connection between VCI and service computer...........204
14.9 WiFi standard restrictions 802.11a/b/g/n..............................209
14.10 Selecting a VCI for vehicle diagnostics................................214
14.11 Changing the Vehicle Communication Interface type...........217
14.12 VCI recording.......................................................................220
14.13 User preferences and system settings.................................221
14.14 Uninstalling the T400 series VCI..........................................223
14.15 Error messages...................................................................225
14.16 Technical data of T400 series VCI.......................................226
14.17 Maintenance........................................................................227
HC600_0 Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) T400 115

14.1 Requirements
14.1.1 Basic requirements

Certain mandatory requirements must be met for start-up, configuration and use of the MAN T400
series Vehicle Communication Interfaces (VCIs). Fault-free operation can only be guaranteed if all
of the requirements described in the following chapters are fulfilled.
The specified hardware and software requirements are only a basic requirement (as at Decem-
ber 2020) and may be increased due to system updates. Information on this subject is available
on the MAN After Sales Portal.
The basic requirements are:
The service computer’s hardware and operating system in accordance with

( Chapter “Requirements”) or the user manual for the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic sys-
tem.
MAN-cats software with MAN Truck & Bus SE diagnostic package version 20.50 or higher.
MAN-cats T400 series software with Installer version 5.53 or higher.
MAN T400 series Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI).
It is not necessary to install the software for the MAN T400 series Vehicle Communication Inter-
faces (VCIs) separately. This takes place as part of the MAN-cats update process. Information on
updating the MAN-cats software is provided in the MAN-cats user manual.
The requirements (diagnostic package and Installer) can be checked in the MAN-cats system
settings (User preferences button > Information > System), see MAN-cats user manual and
( Chapter “Opening system settings”).
116 Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) T400 HMC600_0

14.1.2 Connection configurations
Individual applications and functions in MAN-cats may require a multiple connection to be set up
between individual network components.
MAN-cats offers various options for this. An overview of the different connection variants as well as
the necessary hardware components and requirements is provided below.
A VCI that has been approved by MAN Truck & Bus SE is recommended as the interface for the
connection between the vehicle and service computer.
When the MAN Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) is used, no further adjustments to the VCI
using the configuration wizard are required to change between the variants. Variant 1 is recom-
mended in this case as the most reliable process connection.
HC600_0 Requirements 117

Overview of connection variants:
Variant 1 VCI/service computer Internet Requirements
Cable connection Wireless connection Connection via USB cable

between VCI and between service computer WiFi access to the network
service computer and network (router or
Available connection with Inter-
access point)
net
Wireless connection Cable connection between Connection to the service

between VCI and service computer and net- computer via WiFi
service computer work (router or access point) Connection to the network
by means of Ethernet cable
Available Internet connec-
tion
Wireless connection Wireless connection between WiFi (WLAN) access to the

between VCI, service VCI, service computer and network
computer and network network (router or access Available Internet connec-
(router or access point) tion
point)

Further information and detailed descriptions about how to establish a connection between the
service computer and VCI ( Chapter “Vehicle Communication Interface Manager”).
The respective owner of the MAN-cats diagnostic system is responsible for providing a network
connection and the required components (hardware/software). Please contact the responsible
system administrator with any questions relating to network configuration.
HC600_0 Requirements 119

14.2 Hardware description
14.2.1 Description of the components

Introduction Certain mandatory requirements must be met for start-up, configuration and use of the MAN T400
series Vehicle Communication Interfaces (VCIs). Fault-free operation can only be guaranteed if all
of the requirements described in the following chapters are fulfilled.
Version Interface type
Wire- VCI T420, VCI T425 and VCI T427

less
Cable VCI T430
The following illustration ( Fig. 14.1) shows the individual main components of the T400 series
VCI.
The T400 series VCI may only be operated with the new adapter cables approved for the T400
series VCI. Operation with the previous T200 series adapter cables is not permitted for functional
reasons and will automatically invalidate the warranty.
Only MAN-approved USB cables with a corresponding magnetic plug ( Item 3) may be con-
nected to the magnetic socket ( Item 4) of the T400 series VCI.
The shape of the socket and plug and the polarity of the magnets ensure that the plug is con-
nected the right way round.
Overview
Fig. 14.1
Item Description
1 Connector for diagnostic socket HD-OBD.

The plug connector is used to supply power to the VCI and for communication with the
vehicle.
2 Three status LEDs, for operational readiness, communication with the service com-
puter and with the vehicle. The LEDs are located on the front and rear of the VCI
( Chapter “Description of the LED indicators”).
3 USB cable with magnetic plug for connecting the VCI and service computer for operation
as a cable interface.
4 Magnetic socket with polarity reversal protection
120 T400 Vehicle Communication Interface HMC600_0

Accessories for T400 series VCI
Fig. 14.2
Accessories can be obtained via the MAN MANTIS portal.

Magnetic socket cover ( Item 1) and magnetic plug holder ( Item 2) can be retrofitted as a set.
The magnetic socket cover ( Item 1) prevents contamination of the VCI’s polarity reversal-pro-
tected magnetic socket. It can be used with both cable and wireless interface types.
► Place the magnetic socket cover ( Item 1) onto the VCI’s polarity reversal-protected magnetic
socket until it audibly clicks into place.
HC600_0 T400 Vehicle Communication Interface 121

Fig. 14.3
The magnetic plug holder ( Item 2) prevents the magnetic plug from being disconnected from the
VCI. Use is recommended for cable interface types.
► Guide the USB connection through the magnetic plug holder ( Item 2).
► Insert the magnetic plug ( Item 1) into the magnetic plug holder ( Item 2).
► Place the magnetic plug holder ( Item 2) onto the VCI’s polarity reversal-protected magnetic
socket until it audibly clicks into place.

14.2.2 Description of the LED indicators
The individual status LEDs are described below. LEDs with identical functions are on the front and Introduction
back of the VCI.
14.2.2.1 Status LED “Operational readiness”

The operational readiness status LED ( Item 1) is green and provides information about the op- Overview
erating status of the VCI.
Fig. 14.4
LED Status Description – operational readiness
-------------------- Off The VCI is switched off and/or is not connected to the power
supply.
Flashing slowly The VCI is starting or shutting down.
Off but flashing The VCI is in stage 1 of recovery mode.
on for short
periods
On but switch- The VCI is in stage 2 of recovery mode.
ing off for short
periods
Permanently on The start-up process of the VCI is complete. The device is
ready for operation.

14.2.3 Status LED “Service computer communication”
The service computer communication status LED ( Item 1) is red and provides information on the
communication status between the VCI and service computer.
Fig. 14.5
---------------------------- Off There is no communication between the service com-

puter and the VCI.
There is no connection between the service computer
and the VCI via WiFi (WLAN - Wireless Local Area Net-
work) or a USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
Off but flashing The VCI is attempting to establish a connection with the
on for short service computer by WiFi (infrastructure mode).
periods
Off but flashing A connection with the service computer has been estab-
on for short lished by WiFi or USB cable. However, the VCI has not
periods been assigned an IP address yet.
Flashing slowly Data is being transferred between the VCI and the ser-
vice computer, regardless of the selected connection
type (WiFi or USB).
Permanently on A connection with the service computer has been estab-
lished via WiFi or USB cable and the VCI has received
a valid IP address.

14.2.4 Status LED “Vehicle communication”
The status LED for communication with the vehicle ( Item 1) is green and provides information on
the communication status between the VCI and the electronic systems in the vehicle.
Fig. 14.6
-------------------- Off There is no active connection to a control unit in the vehicle.
P e r m a n e n t l y There is at least one active connection to a control unit in the

on vehicle.

14.2.5 Status LEDs “Firmware updates”
All three status LEDs ( Item 1) are activated when the VCI firmware is being updated.
Fig. 14.7
Slow synchro- Firmware update is in progress.

nous flashing Do not under any circumstances disconnect the VCI from its
power supply before the firmware update is complete.

14.3 Start-up of T400 Vehicle Communication Interface
This section provides a step-by-step description of the initial start-up procedure for a T400 series Introduction
Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI). The description deals exclusively with the work steps nec-
essary for initial commissioning of the VCI. For detailed information on the individual applications
(screens), please refer to the corresponding chapters.
14.3.1 Launching the VCI Manager

Instructions
Fig. 14.8
► If necessary, start MAN-cats on the service computer. The MAN-cats login screen will then open
( Fig. 14.8).
► Click on the “VCI Manager” button ( Item 1).

The “VCI selection window” ( Fig. 14.9) opens.

14.3.2 Starting the VCI application
Fig. 14.9
► Connect the T400 series VCI to the diagnostic socket or an external power supply and wait until
the VCI status LEDs light up continuously.
► Connect the T400 series VCI to the service computer using a USB cable.
A connection via the USB interface is mandatory for configuring the VCI, as fluctuations or inter-
ruptions when using a WiFi connection during configuration may result in damage to the VCI.
► Click on the “VCI application” button ( Item 1).

The “VCI application” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.12) opens.
If the service computer has a newer firmware version for T400, you will receive an automatic
update request.
Operation of the VCI Manager is locked when an interface application/function is opened. The VCI
Manager is automatically unlocked again when the interface application/function is terminated.
Fig. 14.10

Observe information in the dialogue box. The VCI Manager can be unlocked by clicking on the
“Unlock VCI Manager” button ( Item 1).
It is recommended not to unlock the VCI Manager while the MVCI application ( Fig. 14.10) is
running.
Fig. 14.11
The “VCI application” opens in the VCI overview ( Fig. 14.12).
Fig. 14.12
If no VCI is displayed, start a new search with the “VCI search” button ( Item 1).
All T400 series VCIs available under MAN-cats are displayed in the VCI overview.
Each table entry ( Item 2) shows current information about the respective T400 series VCI. For
example, the current “USB” connection type ( Item 3) between the T400 series VCI and the ser-
vice computer.
14.3.3 Checking for and installing VCI firmware updates

Check the Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) for updates, and install if required
( Chapter “Checking for and installing VCI firmware updates”).

14.3.4 Configuring the VCI via web interface
This chapter is valid only for wireless interface types ( Chapter “Hardware description”).
For users who have an MAN configuration file available, please continue with
( Chapter “VCI configuration using configuration file”).
For cable interface type, please continue with
( Chapter “Vehicle Communication Interface Manager”).
The following chapter describes how to configure the VCI via web interface in order to be able to
establish a WiFi connection to the service computer.
Fig. 14.13
► Click on the VCI button ( Item 1).

The application and configuration area ( Fig. 14.14) opens.

Fig. 14.14
► Click on the “Open VCI web interface” button ( Item 1).

The “VCI configuration” ( Fig. 14.15) opens.
Fig. 14.15
► Click on the “Network” button ( Item 1).

The “Network” settings area ( Fig. 14.16) opens.

Fig. 14.16
► Set WiFi ( Item 1) in accordance with ( Chapter “WiFi configuration area”).
► Set the WiFi infrastructure ( Item 2) in accordance with

( Chapter “WiFi infrastructure configuration”).
► Set the WiFi access point ( Item 3) in accordance with

( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”).
Fig. 14.17
► Click on the “Back” button ( Item 1).

The VCI overview ( Fig. 14.18) opens.

Fig. 14.18
► Click on the “Close” button ( Item 1).

The VCI overview ( Fig. 14.18) closes.

14.3.5 Establishing a WiFi connection between VCI and service
computer
For the following work steps, the corresponding Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) must be
connected to a power supply.
First, open the Windows network control panel. The symbol (bars for signal strength) for opening
the network control panel is located in the info area of the Windows task bar.
The connection between the VCI and service computer via WiFi is established by means of the
Windows Connection Manager. In the case of manual configuration, this requires the network
security key of the VCI that is being connected. Default network security key: “T420_12345”.
► Disconnect the USB cable from the VCI.
► Click on the WiFi symbol in the information area of the Windows taskbar.
The “Networks” overview window ( Fig. 14.19) opens.
Fig. 14.19
Part of the VCI network designation is documented on the VCI under “SN” (in the example, the
8-digit letter and number combination in the middle) or was assigned individually in the configu-
ration settings for the access point.
( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”)
► Click on the button ( Item 1) of the VCI that is being commissioned.
► Click on the “Connect” button ( Item 2) to start connection setup.

Fig. 14.20
To increase security, the standard network security key must be replaced by a network security
key that is valid for your workshop ( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”).
► Enter the standard network security key “T420_12345” in the input field ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Next” button ( Item 2) to confirm the input and observe the following notes.
Fig. 14.21
► Observe information in the dialogue box. Click on the “Yes” button ( Item 1).
The WiFi connection to the VCI will be established.
Fig. 14.22

It may take some time to establish the connection. It is complete when the “Disconnect” button
( Item 1) is displayed. The status display for the WiFi connection setup remains unchanged.
Fig. 14.23
It is recommended that you refresh the VCI selection after every initial setup and before every
new connection attempt between VCI and MAN-cats.
► Click on the “VCI connections” button ( Item 1).

The VCI selection ( Fig. 14.23) will be updated.
Fig. 14.24

► Compare the VCI designation ( Item 2).
► Click on the button of the corresponding VCI with the grey background ( Item 1).
After the VCI type has been selected successfully, the background colour of the VCI type selec-
tion will change from grey to green ( Fig. 14.24).
Fig. 14.25
The selected T400 series VCI is fully configured for operation under MAN-cats.
► Click on the button ( Item 1) to confirm the T400 series-type VCI.

The VCI is now connected to MAN-cats. The VCI Manager will be terminated.
Your MAN-cats testing and diagnostic system has been configured to the WiFi (WLAN) stand-
ard 802.11abgn as part of the initial start-up to reduce external interference and to achieve high
transmission rates and ranges.
This also allows for use of the 5 GHz frequency band. With the exception of the USA, this fre-
quency band is approved worldwide for internal use in enclosed spaces only.
If you use your testing and diagnostic system outside of enclosed spaces, the WiFi standard
must be changed, ( Chapter “WiFi configuration area”).
Country-specific regulations and laws apply.

14.4 Vehicle Communication Interface Manager
Introduction The Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) Manager is a program within MAN-cats that manages
the settings of the installed VCIs.
The VCI Manager also acts as an interface between the VCI and MAN-cats. Depending on the VCI
used, it is possible to import and export data and configurations for the VCI.
The applications, functions and settings of the VCI Manager are described in detail in this chapter.
The following section provides information on selecting a VCI and an overview of all available con-
figuration applications of the VCI Manager and their application areas.
14.4.1 Starting the VCI Manager

Instructions
Fig. 14.26
( Fig. 14.25).

The VCI selection window ( Fig. 14.26) opens.

Fig. 14.27
Item Description
1 VCI selection display panel with available/unavailable VCIs.

2 Application-specific toolbar of the VCI Manager.

14.4.2 VCI Manager user interface
Button Name Explanation
Import VCI Button has no function for the T400 series VCI.
configuration
Connection The connection wizard

wizard ( Chapter “Starting the connection wizard”) assists with con-
nection problems between the VCI and the service computer.
The user is requested to carry out certain troubleshooting rou-
tines. The procedure is guided and is supported by on-screen
instructions.
Configuration The configuration wizard
wizard ( Chapter “Starting the configuration wizard”) serves as a
tool for first-time communication between the VCI and MAN-
cats. The desired connection type of the VCI that is being
connected is selected and the network configuration of the
VCI is adapted to the service computer.
The user is guided through the configuration process and sup-
ported with on-screen instructions.
Configuration wizard: All the settings must be carried out manually for installation of a local work-
shop network. Knowledge of the network is required for this kind of set-up.
Exporting VCI Button has no function for the T400 series VCI.
configuration
VCI application In the VCI application, all the available functions of the select-
ed VCI manufacturer are summarised in a main dialogue. The
graphic interface of the VCI application always depends on the
respective manufacturer of the VCI.
The respective manufacturer of the VCI is responsible for the individual procedures in the VCI
application.
VCI type selec- Using the “VCI type selection” function, you can select the VCI
tion type for which you would like to configure the application. All
available VCI manufacturers are displayed in the VCI selection
display field.
VCI recording Using the “VCI recording” function, MAN-cats can record
the diagnostic communication for CAN bus and K-Line. The
log files can be uploaded to the MAN server together with a
request ID. This function is only available after logging into
MAN-cats and starting a diagnostic session. Recording is
completed automatically when a diagnostic session ends.
This function should only be started after consulting with Sup-
port. Further information can be found in the chapter “Working
with MAN-cats” (MAN-cats manual).

14.4.3 Refreshing the Vehicle Communication Interface selection
Instructions
Fig. 14.28


Selecting a VCI
After refreshing the selection, all available and unavailable VCIs will be displayed in the VCI se-
lection window.
The VCI selection window ( Fig. 14.28) also serves as the VCI Manager’s home screen.
Fig. 14.29
Fig. 14.30
The VCI ( Item 1) is now connected to MAN-cats.

14.4.4 Starting the connection wizard
The connection wizard helps you to establish a wireless connection between the Vehicle Commu- Introduction
nication Interface (VCI) and the service computer. If it is not possible to establish a connection,
instructions are displayed on the screen with possible causes and information for remedying the
connection problem.
Instructions
Fig. 14.31
► Click on the “Start the connection wizard” button ( Item 1).

The connection wizard ( Fig. 14.32) starts.
Fig. 14.32
The VCI Manager can be unlocked by clicking on the “Unlock VCI Manager” button ( Item 1).
It is recommended to not unlock the VCI Manager while the MVCI application is running.

VCI application and online help connection wizard
Additional information on the types of connections and the connection wizard.
Fig. 14.33
► Click on the “VCI application” button ( Taskbar).

The VCI application opens in the VCI overview ( Fig. 14.33).

Fig. 14.34
1 VCI overview Shows you which menu level you are currently in. You can click
on a menu Item to go back to the corresponding menu level.
2 Designation This is present in all views of the VCI application and is adapted
according to the action.
The following buttons can be found in the header:
VCI overview ( Item 1)
Settings ( Item 3)
Online help ( Item 4) and
Information on the application ( Item 5).
3 Settings Click on this button to open the settings window. The following
options are available:
Password configurator for the WiFi access point and

PC-WiFi adapter for connections with the VCI access point.
4 Online help Click on this button to open the online user manual for the
VCI application. The user manual opens in the default Internet
browser.
5 Version information Click on this button to call up information on the VCI application.
6 Application area The application area contains the “VCI search” button, the fil-
ter input field with the “Apply filter” button and the VCI table
( Fig. 14.37).

7 Footer This is present in all views of the VCI application. Buttons are
shown and hidden depending on the action.
Close: click this button to exit the VCI application.
Back (optional): click this button to return to the previous menu
level of the VCI application.
Settings/password configurator/WiFi adapter
► Click on the “Settings” button ( Item 3;  Fig. 14.33).

The “Settings information window” ( Fig. 14.34) opens.
Fig. 14.35
► Activate the check box ( Item 1) and the password will be created by the system.
or
► Untick the check box ( Item 1) and enter the desired password in the input field.
If the password meets the requirements (8–64 characters), the display changes from red to
blue.
► Click on the “Activate changes” button ( Item 2).

The password in the input field will be saved.

The settings information window ( Fig. 14.34) closes.

Fig. 14.36
If your service computer is equipped with only one WiFi adapter, please continue with the third
instruction.
► Click on the “WiFi adapter” button ( Item 1).

The selection window opens, displaying all available WiFi adapters.
► Select the desired WiFi adapter.

The changes are applied.

The settings information window ( Fig. 14.35) closes.

Information on the application
Fig. 14.37
► Click on the “Information on the application” button ( Item 1).

The application information window ( Fig. 14.37) opens. Information on manufacturer and
version can be found here.

The application information window ( Fig. 14.36) closes.

VCI application area
The VCI application area contains a list of all detected VCIs, as well as additional information
about the respective VCI.
Fig. 14.38
1 VCI search Clicking on the “VCI search” button refreshes the VCI table ( Item 4).
This may be necessary if changes have been made to the configuration
of a VCI or if a new VCI is available.
2 Filter input field Entry of certain filter criteria (character string, e.g. USB), according to
which the results in the VCI table are to be filtered ( Item 4).
3 Apply filter Click on the “Apply filter” button to filter according to the filter criteria
in the VCI table ( Item 4).
Clicking on the field again cancels the filter function. As an alternative,
the Enter key can be pressed.
4 VCI table The VCI table shows all detected VCIs with detailed information
( Fig. 14.37).
The column widths can be changed by positioning the mouse cursor
in the header bar on the column boundary ( Item 5). Pressing and
holding the left mouse button, move the mouse left or right to change
the width of the column.
The table can be sorted by any column. Position the cursor in the
column header by which you wish to sort the table ( Item 6). The
background of the column header will turn blue. The content of the
selected column is sorted by clicking the left mouse button. The
sorting sequence is indicated by an arrowhead ( Item 6) that points
upwards or downwards. Click in the same column header again to
reverse the order of sorting.

VCI table with detailed information
The VCI table contains several pieces of information about the VCIs that have been detected.
Fig. 14.39
Column Description
Name Designation of the VCI, as assigned as “VCI name” in the configuration

( Chapter “System configuration”).
Interface Connection type between VCI and service computer (USB, WiFi).
IP address IP address of the VCI.
FW version Installed VCI firmware version
FW update Status of the firmware installed on the VCI:
Empty: No firmware is available or no version requirement is specified.
Current: The firmware installed on the VCI is up to date.
Recovery: The VCI firmware version installed on the VCI is a recovery version.
Update VCI firmware ( Chapter “Updating the VCI firmware”).
Required: The firmware installed on the VCI is out of date. Update VCI firm-
ware ( Chapter “Updating the VCI firmware”).
Type VCI device type. In the case of the T400 series > WDI2.
Serial number Serial number of the VCI.
Board ID ID number of the VCI printed circuit board.
In the event of error messages, the data necessary for support by MAN Truck & Bus SE can be
extracted from the VCI tables.
► Click on the button ( Item 1) of the corresponding VCI.

The application and configuration area ( Chapter “Application and configuration area”)
opens.

14.4.5 Application and configuration area
The “Application and configuration area” contains an overview of all services and functions availa- Introduction
ble for the selected Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI). These are grouped by topic. You can
select the relevant button to open or run them.
When using the radio interface (VCI) as a cable interface, i.e. in conjunction with the USB cable,
no configuration measures are required, with the exception any firmware updates. The VCI is
immediately ready for operation.
Overview
Fig. 14.40
Required
Item connection Areas Functions
type
1 WiFi VCI configu- Adjust the configuration settings for the selected VCI
USB ration via the ( Chapter “Hardware description”).
web interface
2 WiFi VCI configu- Import/load configuration settings
USB ration using ( Chapter “Loading a configuration file in VCI”)
configuration Export/receive configuration settings
files
( Chapter “Retrieving a configuration file from VCI”).
3 WiFi Save VCI Save information from the selected VCI.

USB information ( Chapter “Saving information from the selected VCI”).
Save information from all available VCIs
( Chapter “Saving information from all available VCIs”).
4 USB Connection Set up a service computer for an automatic connection to a

to VCI WiFi WiFi access point configured in the VCI.
access point

Required
Item connection Areas Functions
type
5 WiFi Open VCI Update VCI firmware ( Chapter “Checking for and installing
USB firmware VCI firmware updates”).
updater
Instructions
► Click on the “Open VCI web interface” button ( Item 1).

The VCI configuration ( Fig. 14.40) opens.
VCI configuration
The “VCI configuration” user interface (web interface) contains all the options for configuring the
selected Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) in detail for all application cases. These are
grouped by topic. You can select the relevant button to open or run them.
The application is contained in the VCI, so it may take a few seconds for the content of the config-
uration module to display.
Fig. 14.41
The following configuration areas and options are available in the “VCI configuration” area (web
interface):

There are extensive configuration options for the Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI). These
should be used with care and only if the user has adequate knowledge of the relevant areas.
Item Area Description
1 System Configuration of the VCI designation (optional).

2 Network Configuration of the WiFi connection variant for use as a WiFi access
point or within a WiFi infrastructure (workshop network). (Basic set-
tings)
3 Advanced net- Configuration of the WiFi connection variant for use as a WiFi access
work point, within a WiFi infrastructure (workshop network) or a LAN (local
area network) connection.
(Advanced settings)
1-3 Menu bar Click on the relevant menu Item to open the corresponding configura-
tion page. This contains further menu sub-items as applicable. You can
find details or an overview of the configuration options in the following
descriptions.
4 Display and con- The contents of the selected menu Item or the menu sub-items that
figuration area have been opened are displayed.

14.4.6 System configuration
Introduction The designation of the Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) can be changed in the system con-
figuration.
Instructions
Fig. 14.42
► Click on the “System” button ( Item 1).

The “System” configuration option opens.
4 VCI name Provides the ability to replace the default confirmed VCI name with
an individually chosen VCI name. This may be useful if you are using
several VCIs of the same VCI type in one workshop.
The newly assigned VCI name is visible when the configuration set-
tings have been completed and the VCI selection restarted.
► Click on the input field “VCI name” ( Item 4) and enter the desired VCI name.
The VCI name may consist of between 1 and 64 characters. Give each VCI a unique name. You
may use upper and/or lower case letters and numbers. The use of special characters is not per-
mitted.

The designation of the VCI in the system configuration under “VCI name” and in the network
configuration in the WiFi access point menu under “WiFi network name” must
( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”) be identical. The “WiFi network name” is limited to
32 characters.

Settings are applied to the VCI. A progress bar shows the status of the activation. Activation is
complete when the message “Category saved successfully” is displayed.
► Click on the “Restart VCI” button ( Item 2) and wait until the VCI has finished restarting.
The message “Category saved successfully” is displayed.
The VCI restart is complete only when the LEDs for operational readiness and communication
with the service computer remain lit up.
► Press the “TRATON” button.

The system configuration start menu opens.
The VCI Manager is not updated automatically. To do this, click on the “VCI search” button. It
may be necessary to do this more than once.

14.4.7 Network configuration
Introduction The settings for wireless LAN operation (WiFi) are changed in the network configuration area. You
use the configuration to specify whether the VCI is integrated into a WiFi infrastructure or as a WiFi
access point and to perform the settings for the respective operating mode.
Observe local restrictions when using the wireless standard 802.11a/b/g/n.

( Chapter “Requirements”)
No settings are required for operation via USB cable (cable interface).
Instructions
Fig. 14.43

The “Network” configuration option opens.
Item Network configuration Description
2 WiFi Switching WiFi hardware on and off.

The operating mode, country code and standard used for the
WiFi connection of the VCI are configured here.
3 WiFi infrastructure If the “Use infrastructure” operating mode has been selected
under the “WiFi” network option, the WiFi network name and
WPA2-PSK password must be entered to connect the VCI to
the workshop network.
4 WiFi access point If the “Offer access point” operating mode has been selected
under the “WiFi” network option, the WiFi network name, WiFi
radio channel and WPA2-PSK password must be entered to be
able to operate the VCI as a WiFi access point.

There are two options available for editing the network configuration:
Edit directly in the provided overview ( Fig. 14.42) by clicking the relevant input or selection
fields.
Open the corresponding configuration area by clicking on the respective heading (blue). See the
descriptions below.
14.4.8 WiFi configuration area

The WiFi configuration area can be used to set up the WiFi operating mode and the WiFi stand-
ard, which describes which transfer rate, encryption or frequency should be used in the wireless
network.
Fig. 14.44
► Tick the check box for “Activate WiFi hardware” ( Item 2) if required.
If the WiFi hardware of the VCI was deactivated by check box, it is only possible to reactivate it
with a USB connection.
► Click on the “Operating mode” button ( Item 3) to open the selection list.
► Select the desired operating mode.

Operating mode Description
Offer access The factory setting and, in the majority of cases, the default connection be-
point tween the service computer and the VCI.
Check or adjust the corresponding settings in the access point configuration
area ( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”).
Use infrastruc- Integrate the VCI into an existing network.
ture Check or adjust the corresponding settings in the “Infrastructure” configuration
area ( Chapter “WiFi infrastructure configuration”).
Please contact the responsible system administrator with any questions relating to integration of
the VCI into an existing network.
► Click on the “Country code” button ( Item 4;  Fig. 14.43) to open the selection list.
► Select the applicable country code.
If the desired country code is not available, a connection via USB must be used.
Example selection:
DE: Germany
US: United States of America
EU: European Union except for Germany, Italy and France (separate selection)
IT: Italy
FR: France
JP: Japan
After selecting the WiFi country code, check which WiFi channels are permitted for the country
and whether the permissible channels for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz are available.
► Click on the “Standards” button ( Item 5;  Fig. 14.43).
► Select the desired WiFi standard.

Factory setting: 802.11abgn

T400 series VCIs optionally support the following standards:
Standard Frequency band Transfer rate (gross) up to
IEEE 802.11a 5 GHz 54 Mbit/s

IEEE 802.11b 2.4 GHz 11 Mbit/s
IEEE 802.11g 2.4 GHz 54 Mbit/s
IEEE 802.11n 2.4/5 GHz 450 Mbit/s
2.4 GHz frequency band (channels 1 to 14):
When selecting WiFi radio channels in the 2.4 GHz frequency band, please note that channel 14
is not permitted in Europe, and channels 12, 13 and 14 are not permitted in the USA.
5 GHz frequency band (channels 36 to 165):
When choosing the WiFi standard, note that with the exception of the USA, the 5 GHz frequency
band is approved worldwide for use in enclosed spaces only.
must be changed ( Chapter “WiFi configuration area”).
► If required, check the WiFi standard of the service computer or infrastructure network and ad-
just the settings corresponding to the VCI.
The service computers supplied by MAN Truck & Bus SE contain WiFi devices with the following
standards, for example:
Panasonic Toughbook CF54MK1: IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n
– recommended setting: 802.11abgn
If you go back without activating the changes, the changes will not be applied in the configura-
tion.
► Click on the “Activate changes” button ( Item 1;  Fig. 14.43).

The settings are applied to the VCI. A progress bar shows the status of the activation. Activa-
tion is complete when the message “Category saved successfully” ( Item 2;  Fig. 14.44) is
displayed.

Fig. 14.45
The message “Category saved successfully” is displayed in the information box ( Item 2).

The network configuration area ( Fig. 14.42) opens.

14.4.9 WiFi infrastructure configuration
The following settings only need to be configured if the “Use infrastructure” operating mode has
been selected in the WiFi configuration area.
Settings are changed in the “Infrastructure” area so that the T400 series Vehicle Communication
Interface (VCI) can be operated in a network.
Fig. 14.46
► Click the input field “WiFi network name” ( Item 2) and enter the corresponding network name.
Contact your responsible system administrator for more information about defining/assigning a
corresponding network name.
If more than 32 characters are entered, the configuration will not be adopted. If you do not enter
any characters (0), the configuration will be adopted but the network will not start.
The WiFi network name must be between 1 and 32 characters long. You may use upper and/or
lower case letters and numbers. The use of special characters is not permitted.
► Click the “WPA-PSK password” input field ( Item 3) and enter the corresponding password.
Contact your responsible system administrator regarding the password to be used.
tion.

displayed.
Fig. 14.47


14.4.10 WiFi access point configuration
The following settings must be configured if the “Offer access point” operating mode has been
selected in the WiFi configuration area. Use of a channel in the 5 GHz frequency band is recom-
mended. For this purpose, select a channel ≥ 36.
Settings are configured in the WiFi access point configuration so that the T400 series Vehicle Com-
munication Interface (VCI) can be operated through direct connection with the service computer.
Fig. 14.48
► Click the input field “WiFi network name” ( Item 3) and enter the corresponding network name.
The designation of the VCI in the system configuration under “VCI name”
( Chapter “System configuration”) and in the network configuration in the WiFi access point
menu under “WiFi network name” must be identical.
If more than 32 characters are entered, the configuration will not be adopted. If you do not enter
any characters (0), the configuration will be adopted but the network will not start.
The WiFi network name must be between 1 and 32 characters long. You may use upper and/or
lower case letters and numbers. The use of special characters is not permitted. The network name
defined here is visible once all settings have been completed in the Windows network control
panel.
► Click on the “WiFi radio channel” button ( Item 4) to open the selection list.
► Select the corresponding WiFi radio channel.

When selecting the WiFi radio channel, observe the relevant country-specific regulations and
laws.
2.4 GHz frequency band (channels 1 to 14):
When selecting WiFi radio channels in the 2.4 GHz frequency band, please note that channel 14
is not permitted in Europe, and channels 12, 13 and 14 are not permitted in the USA.
5 GHz frequency band (channels 36 to 165):
When selecting WiFi radio channels in the 5 GHz frequency band, please note that with the
exception of the USA (where channels 36 to 64 may also be used outdoors), channels 36 to 165
are approved worldwide for use in enclosed spaces only.
Automatic WiFi channel selection

If malfunctions occur in subsequent operation or if the WiFi connection between service comput-
er and VCI is slow, this may be due to the selected WiFi channel being overloaded. In this case,
we recommend that you use the “Automatic WiFi channel selection” option. In this process, the
device detects the WiFi channels on which other nearby devices are transmitting. The channel
determined is the one best suited for VCI in this environment. When the process is completed
successfully, this will be confirmed with the message “Device action confirmed successfully”.
The determined channel is displayed under “WiFi radio channel” and is now set to this value on
the device. This value is retained in the device. At any time, you can set it manually to a different
value, or you can run the automatic channel selection process again.
Notes:
Wherever possible, run the automatic channel selection at the intended VCI installation location.
The VCI must be supplied with power from the OBD plug in order to use the WiFi interface. This
is also required for automatic channel selection.
Determination of the channel depends on the country code and standard that have been set in
the “WiFi” category. If you change a value here, first click on the “Activate changes” button in
this category before running the automatic channel selection.
► Click on the “Automatic WiFi channel selection” button ( Item 2;  Fig. 14.47).

Automatic WiFi channel selection starts. A progress bar shows the status of automatic WiFi
channel selection. The automatic WiFi channel selection is completed when the message “De-
vice action saved successfully” is displayed.

The automatic WiFi channel selection selects the WiFi radio channel with the best connection
properties, regardless of the frequency band.
► The selected WiFi radio channel must be checked with regard to the applicable country-specific
regulations and laws.
► Click the “WPA2-PSK password” input field ( Item 5;  Fig. 14.47) and enter the correspond-
ing password.
The password that is to be assigned acts as a pairing key/network security key between the
service computer and the VCI. The password configurator can be used to assign a password that
complies with the rules ( Chapter “Settings/password configurator/WiFi adapter”).
The password should consist of between at least 8 and a maximum of 64 characters, and can
be chosen freely. It is recommended to use a combination of upper and/or lower case letters
as well as digits. The use of special characters is not permitted. If you are using several T400
series VCIs, we recommend using an identical pairing key/network security key to ensure easier
handling.
tion.

displayed.

Fig. 14.49


14.4.11 “Advanced” network configuration
In the advanced network configurations, settings can be made in the WiFi infrastructure and WiFi Introduction
access point configuration and a LAN connection (Local Area Network) can be set up.
Observe local restrictions when using the wireless standard 802.11a/b/g/n.

( Chapter “Hardware description”)
Instructions
Fig. 14.50
► Click on the “Network expanded” button ( Item 1).

The “Network expanded” configuration option opens.

2 WiFi Switching WiFi hardware on and off.

The operating mode, country code and standard used for the
WiFi connection of the VCI are configured here.
3 WiFi infrastructure If the “Use infrastructure” operating mode has been selected
under the “WiFi” network option, the WiFi network name and
WPA2-PSK password must be entered to connect the VCI to
the workshop network.
4 WiFi access point If the operating mode “Offer access point” was selected un-
der the network option “WiFi”, the name of the WiFi, the WiFi
wireless channel and the defined WPA2-PSK password must
be specified so that the VCI can be operated as a WiFi access
point.
5 LAN This chapter is being prepared. LAN is used to prepare special
use cases.
There are two options available for editing the network configuration:
Edit directly in the provided overview ( Fig. 14.49) by clicking the relevant input or selection
fields.
Open the relevant configuration area by clicking the respective header. See the descriptions
below.
14.4.12 WiFi configuration area

Description of the WiFi configuration area ( Chapter “WiFi configuration area”).

14.4.13 WiFi infrastructure configuration
In the WiFi infrastructure configuration area, system administrators can configure settings to inte-
grate the VCI into an existing network.
Fig. 14.51
1 Enable change Button for enabling/adopting all changes.

2 WiFi network name SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the WiFi network to which the
VCI is to connect.
Freely selectable name with a maximum of 32 characters; spe-
cial characters are not permitted.
► Enter the corresponding WiFi network name.
3 DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) – the operat-

ing mode of this network interface: Obtain an IP address as a
DHCP client or use static IP address.
► Press the “DHCP” button to open the selection list.
► Select the corresponding DHCP operating mode.

4 Static IP address Static IP address of this device in the network. This setting is
deactivated if “DHCP” operating mode is used.
► Enter the required IP address.

5 Network mask Network mask of this device in the network. The network mask
is used if the “Static IP address” option was selected under
“DHCP”. This setting is deactivated if “DHCP” operating mode
is used.
► If applicable, enter network mask.

6 Security type Method for encryption via password (PSK) or certificate file
(EAP).
► Press the “Security type” button to open the selection list.
► Select the corresponding security type.
7 WPA2-PSK password WiFi network password for WPA2-PSK encryption (8 –64 char-
acters).
► Enter the password (security type “WPA2-EAP”).
8 WPA2-EAP identity WPA2-EAP username for authentication at RADIUS (Remote

Authentication Dial-In User Service) server. “WPA2-EAP” must
be selected as the security type.
► Enter the user ID (security type “WPA2-EAP”).

9 WPA2-EAP password WPA2-EAP password for authentication at RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service) server.
► Enter the WPA2-EAP password (security type “WPA2-

EAP”).
10 WPA2-EAP private key File name of the WPA2-EAP private key that was loaded to the
VCI with a configuration file.
► Press the “Back” button.
► Load the configuration file into the VCI

( Chapter “Loading a configuration file in VCI”).
11 WPA2-EAP key pass- Password for WPA2-EAP private key. For the highest security
word standard, a certificate with password is issued. If required, it
must be adapted by system administrators.

Item Network configuration Explanation
12 WPA2-EAP certificate File name of the WPA2-EAP certificate file that was loaded to
the VCI with a configuration file.
► Press the “Back” button.
Load the configuration file into the VCI

( Chapter “Loading a configuration file in VCI”).
tion.

displayed.
Fig. 14.52
► Click on the “Network expanded” button ( Item 1).


14.4.14 WiFi access point configuration
In the WiFi access point configuration area, system administrators can configure settings to allow
operation of the VCI as an access point.
Fig. 14.53

2 WiFi network name SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the WiFi network to which the
VCI is to connect.
Freely selectable name with a maximum of 32 characters; spe-
cial characters are not permitted.
► Enter the corresponding WiFi network name.
3 WiFi wireless channel WiFi access point radio channel.
► Press the “WiFi radio channel” button to open the selection

list.
► Select the corresponding WiFi radio channel.
4 DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) – the operating

mode of this network interface: Obtain an IP address as a DHCP
client or use static IP address.

Network configu-
Item Description
ration
5 DHCP start ad- Start IP address for DHCP server.

dress
► Enter the relevant DHCP start address.
6 DHCP end address End IP address for DHCP server.
► Enter the relevant DHCP end address.

7 Static IP address Static IP address of this device in the network. This setting is deacti-
vated if “DHCP” operating mode is used.
8 Network mask Network mask of this device in the network. The network mask is
used if the “Static IP address” option was selected under “DHCP”.
This setting is deactivated if “DHCP” operating mode is used.
9 WPA2-PSK pass- WiFi network password for WPA2-PSK encryp-

word tion (8 –64 characters). Password configurator
( Chapter “Settings/password configurator/WiFi adapter”)
► Enter the password (security type “WPA2-PSK”).
tion.

displayed.

Fig. 14.54


14.4.15 LAN configuration
The LAN configuration is used to prepare for other types of connection. Currently (as of 03/2021),
it is not necessary to perform any settings here. The LAN configuration is used to prepare special
application cases.
Fig. 14.55

2 DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) – the operating
mode of this network interface: Obtain an IP address as a DHCP
client or use static IP address.
3 DHCP start address Start IP address for DHCP server.
► Enter the relevant DHCP start address.
4 DHCP end address End IP address for DHCP server.
► Enter the relevant DHCP end address.
5 Static IP address Static IP address of this device in the network. This setting is
deactivated if “DHCP” operating mode is used.

6 Network mask ► Network mask of this device in the network. The network
mask is used if the “Static IP address” option was selected
under “DHCP”. This setting is deactivated if “DHCP” operat-
ing mode is used.

14.4.16 VCI configuration using configuration file
Introduction This chapter describes how to load a pre-prepared configuration file into the VCI and save a con-
figuration file from the VCI. This description applies generally to all configuration files.
14.4.16.1 Loading a configuration file in VCI
Instructions
Fig. 14.56
► Click on the “Load the configuration file in VCI” button ( Item 1).

The “Explorer” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.56) opens.

The names of the configuration files shown here are examples.
Fig. 14.57
The configuration files are located in the following location:

Drive C:/ > MAN > MAN-CATS-III > VCI > DSA (SPX) > T420 > conf
The specified storage location is correct only if it was not changed during installation of
MAN-cats.
► Open the storage location using the specified file path.
► Select the corresponding configuration file (.conf) ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Open” button ( Item 2).

The “Import/load configuration file” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.57) opens.
Fig. 14.58
► Check the version of the selected configuration file.

The dialogue box “Import/load the configuration file” will close. The import may take some time.
This is indicated by the animated mouse cursor symbol. The import is complete when the fol-
lowing success message ( Fig. 14.58) is displayed.

Fig. 14.59

The “Success message” dialogue box closes, completing the “Load configuration file to VCI”
process.
14.4.16.2 Retrieving a configuration file from VCI
Fig. 14.60
► Click on the “Retrieve configuration file from VCI” button ( Item 1).


The names of the configuration files shown here are examples.
Fig. 14.61

MAN-cats.
► Assign corresponding designation for configuration file (.conf) ( Item 1).

The success message “Retrieve configuration file from VCI” ( Fig. 14.61) opens.
Fig. 14.62

The “Confirmation message” dialogue box will close and the “Retrieve configuration file from
VCI” process will be complete.

14.4.17 Saving VCI information
Introduction This chapter describes how to save information from the selected VCI or all available VCIs in XML
format on the service computer.
14.4.17.1 Saving information from the selected VCI
Instructions
Fig. 14.63
► Click on the “Save information from the selected VCI” button ( Item 1).
Fig. 14.64

MAN-cats.

The success message “Save information from the selected VCI” ( Fig. 14.64) opens.
Fig. 14.65

The “Success message” dialogue box closes and the “Save information from the selected VCI”
process is thus complete.

14.4.17.2 Saving information from all available VCIs
Fig. 14.66
► Click on the “Save information from all available VCIs” button ( Item 1).
Fig. 14.67

MAN-cats.


The success message “Save information from the selected VCI” ( Fig. 14.67) opens.
Fig. 14.68

The “Confirmation message” dialogue box will close and the “Save information from all availa-
ble VCIs” process will be complete.

14.4.18 Setting up a connection to the VCI WiFi access point on the PC
Introduction This chapter describes how to set up your service computer in order to establish a WiFi connection
to a WiFi access point of the selected VCI. Once it has been set up successfully, the service com-
puter will connect to the VCI automatically.
Instructions
Fig. 14.69
► Connect the USB cable to the VCI.
► Click on the “Set up on PC” button ( Item 1).

The “VCI WiFi access point” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.70) opens.
If the following “VCI WiFi access point” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.69) is displayed with the mes-
sage “No WiFi access point configured in VCI” in the selection window and a greyed out “OK”
button, then a cable interface is connected (no WiFi possible).
Fig. 14.70

The “VCI WiFi access point” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.69) closes.

Fig. 14.71
► Click on the “VCI WiFi access point” button ( Item 1) to open the selection list.
► Select the corresponding VCI WiFi access point.

The “VCI WiFi access point” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.70) closes. Set-up may take some time.
This is indicated by the animated mouse cursor symbol. Set-up is complete when the following
success message ( Fig. 14.71) is displayed.
Fig. 14.72

The “Confirmation message” dialogue box will close.

14.4.19 Updating the VCI firmware
Introduction This chapter explains how to update the VCI firmware.
Instructions
Fig. 14.73
► Click on the “Open firmware updater” button ( Item 1).

The different options for carrying out a VCI firmware update are described in
( Chapter “VCI firmware update (manual)”).

14.5 Starting the configuration wizard
The configuration wizard serves as a tool for initial communication between the VCI and MAN-cats. Introduction
The desired connection type of the interface to be connected is selected and the network configu-
ration of the VCI is adapted to the service computer.
All the settings must be carried out manually for installation of a local workshop network. Knowl-
edge of the network is required for this kind of set-up.
Instructions
Fig. 14.74
► Click on the “Start the configuration wizard” button ( Item 1).

The configuration wizard ( Fig. 14.76) starts.
Fig. 14.75

VCI application and online help connection wizard
Additional information on the types of connections and the connection wizard.
Fig. 14.76
► Click on the “VCI application” button ( Taskbar).

Fig. 14.77
To set up the VCI using the VCI application, proceed as described below in
( Chapter “VCI firmware update (manual)”).

14.6 Starting the VCI application
The VCI application is selected for initial start-up or for managing or setting up Vehicle Communi- Introduction
cation Interfaces (VCIs).
Instructions
Fig. 14.78
( Fig. 14.8).

The VCI selection ( Fig. 14.78) opens.
Fig. 14.79

► Click on the “VCI application” button ( Item 1;  Fig. 14.78).

The VCI application (VCI Manager) ( Fig. 14.81) starts.
If the service computer has a newer VCI firmware version for the T400, you will receive an auto-
matic update request.
Fig. 14.80
Observe information in the dialogue box. The VCI Manager can be unlocked by clicking on the
“Unlock VCI Manager” button ( Item 1).
Fig. 14.81

Fig. 14.82
All T400 series VCIs available under MAN-cats are displayed in the VCI overview.
Each table entry ( Item 2) shows current information about the respective T400 series VCI. For
example, the current “USB” connection type ( Item 3) between the T400 series VCI and the ser-
vice computer.

14.7 Checking for and installing VCI firmware updates
Introduction This document describes the different options for performing a VCI firmware update.
The following variants are available:
VCI firmware update (automatic)

VCI firmware update (manual)
Instructions
Fig. 14.83
( Fig. 14.82).

The VCI selection for the VCI firmware update (automatic) ( Fig. 14.83)
or
the VCI selection for the VCI firmware update (manual) ( Fig. 14.88) opens.

14.7.1 VCI firmware update (automatic)
As part of the VCI firmware update, a software version comparison is carried out between the Ve-
hicle Communication Interface (VCI) and MAN-cats. If the versions differ, the system will request
you to perform an update. If a problem occurs during the VCI firmware update, the system will start
a troubleshooting routine.
To update the firmware, start the VCI Manager in the MAN-cats login screen.
No plug connections may be disconnected during the VCI firmware update process. This applies
to the power supply, the magnetic plug connection on the VCI and the USB plug connection on
the service computer. Interrupting the connection during configuration may result in damage to
the VCI.
Fig. 14.84
► If required, connect the T400 series VCI to the diagnostic socket or an external power supply
and wait until the VCI’s status LEDs remain continuously illuminated.
► Check that the USB connection between the VCI and the service computer is functioning cor-
rectly.
► Click on the “VCI” button ( Item 1).

The “VCI/PDU-API version conflict” dialogue box ( Fig. 14.84) opens.

Fig. 14.85
► Observe information in the dialogue box. Click on the “OK” button ( Item 1).
The VCI firmware update will start.
The VCI firmware update process guides you through the individual steps ( Fig. 14.85) and ends
with the success message ( Fig. 14.86).
Fig. 14.86
The current status ( Item 2) of the VCI firmware update can be tracked in the dialogue box.
The VCI firmware update process runs through three steps. Information about the individual steps
of the VCI firmware update process can be accessed in the dialogue box by clicking on the “Infor-
mation” button ( Item 1).

Fig. 14.87
► Confirm the success message with the “OK” button ( Item 1).

The “Confirmation message” dialogue box will close.
Possible error message
Fig. 14.88
If the VCI firmware update process is cancelled, corresponding malfunction messages with a diag-
nostic memory entry ( Item 1) are displayed.
Clicking on the “Help” button ( Item 3) opens an additional dialogue box with information on the
cause and remedy.
► Use the “Help” button ( Item 3) to find information about the diagnostic memory entry.
► Rectify the cause of the diagnostic memory entry and repeat the VCI firmware update process
if required.

If the cause of the diagnostic memory entry cannot be rectified, contact your diagnostic support
team. Information about support channels is available in the After Sales Portal in the “Diagnos-
tics” area or in ( Chapter “Requirements”).
If the VCI firmware update process freezes in status 5, the Vehicle Communication Interface
(VCI) may not have automatically connected to the service computer after the restart (reboot).
You should therefore connect the VCI to the service computer manually via the Windows network
control panel ( Chapter “WiFi connection between VCI and service computer”)

14.7.2 VCI firmware update (manual)
Fig. 14.89
► Click on the “VCI application” button ( Item 1).

The VCI application (VCI Manager) ( Fig. 14.90) starts.
Fig. 14.90
It is recommended not to unlock the VCI Manager while the MVCI application ( Fig. 14.89) is
running.

Fig. 14.91
► Check VCI ( Item 2) for a VCI firmware update ( Item 3).
Firmware update
Description Instruction
status
---- (Empty) No VCI firmware update avail- No VCI firmware update required.
able or no version requirement
specified.
The VCI firmware update in- No VCI firmware update required.

stalled on the VCI is up-to-date.
Up-to-date
Recovery The VCI firmware installed on ► Update VCI firmware.
the VCI is a recovery version. A
VCI firmware update is re-
quired.
Update the VCI firmware with ► Update VCI firmware.
the required version.
Update
A VCI firmware update is required.
► Click the VCI row ( Item 2).


Fig. 14.92
► Click on the “Open firmware updater” button ( Item 1).

The firmware update window ( Fig. 14.92) opens.
Fig. 14.93
The upper area ( Item 1) contains all the information about the selected VCI.
The lower area ( Item 2) shows an overview of the VCI firmware update currently installed on the
VCI and the required (latest) VCI firmware update version on the service computer.

Information text Description
Required VCI firmware up- The VCI firmware update version installed on the VCI is the cur-
date version present in VCI. rently required version.
VCI firmware update version This VCI firmware update version is currently installed on the VCI,
present in VCI. but not the required VCI firmware update version.
Update to this VCI firmware An update to this VCI firmware update version is required.
update version is required.
------ (no information) Valid for all other VCI firmware update versions.
No plug connections may be disconnected during the VCI firmware update process. This applies
to the power supply, the magnetic plug connection on the VCI and the USB plug connection on
the service computer. Interrupting the connection during configuration may result in damage to
the VCI.
Fig. 14.94
The “Apply update” button is only active when a firmware version has been selected in the “Se-
lect available firmware and apply update” area.
► Check that the USB connection between the VCI and the service computer is functioning cor-
rectly.
► Select the required VCI firmware update version ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Apply update” button ( Item 2).

The installation of the VCI firmware update ( Fig. 14.94) starts.

Fig. 14.95
The current status ( Item 2) of the firmware update can be tracked in the dialogue box.
The firmware update process runs through three steps. Information about the individual steps of
the firmware update process can be accessed in the dialogue box by clicking on the “Question
mark” button ( Item 1).
Once the firmware update process is complete, the dialogue box “Success message for firmware
update” ( Fig. 14.95) is displayed.
Fig. 14.96
► Confirm the success message with the “OK” button ( Item 1).

The “Success message” dialogue box closes and the firmware update window ( Fig. 14.97)
opens.

Possible error message
Fig. 14.97
If the firmware update process is cancelled, corresponding malfunction messages with a diagnos-
tic memory entry ( Item 1) are displayed.
Clicking on the “Help” button ( Item 3) opens an additional dialogue box with information on the
cause and remedy.
► Use the “Help” button ( Item 3) to find information about the diagnostic memory entry.
The “Service assistant” dialogue box will open.
► Rectify the cause of the error and carry out the firmware update again if necessary.
If the cause of the error cannot be rectified, contact your diagnostic support team. Information
about support channels is available in the After Sales Portal in the “Diagnostics” area or in
( Chapter “Requirements”).
Fig. 14.98

Fig. 14.99

The VCI overview ( Fig. 14.99) opens.
Fig. 14.100
► Click on the “Close” button ( Item 1).

The “VCI Manager” application closes.

14.8 WiFi connection between VCI and service computer
Introduction Without the configuration wizard, the Windows network control panel must be used to establish
a wireless connection or change the connection between the Vehicle Communication Interface
(VCI) and the MAN-cats service computer. The pairing key of the VCI to be connected is required
for this. The following work steps show the procedure for establishing or changing a connection.
14.8.1 Establishing a WiFi connection between VCI and service

computer
For the following work steps, the corresponding Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) must be
connected to a power supply.
First, open the Windows network control panel. The symbol (bars for signal strength) for opening
the network control panel is located in the info area of the Windows task bar.
The connection between the VCI and service computer via WiFi is established by means of the
Windows Connection Manager. In the case of manual configuration, this requires the network
security key of the VCI that is being connected. Default network security key: “T420_12345”.
Instructions ► Disconnect the USB cable from the VCI.
► Click on the WiFi symbol in the information area of the Windows taskbar.
The “Networks” overview window ( Fig. 14.100) opens.
Fig. 14.101
Part of the VCI network designation is documented on the VCI under “SN” (in the example, the
8-digit letter and number combination in the middle) or was assigned individually in the configu-
ration settings for the access point. ( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”)

► Click on the button ( Item 1) of the VCI that is being commissioned.
► Click on the “Connect” button ( Item 2) to start connection setup.
Fig. 14.102
To increase security, the standard network security key must be replaced by a network security
key that is valid for your workshop ( Chapter “WiFi access point configuration”).
► Enter the standard network security key “T420_12345” in the input field ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Next” button ( Item 2) to confirm the input and observe the following notes.
Fig. 14.103
► Observe information in the dialogue box. Click on the “Yes” button ( Item 1).
The WiFi connection to the VCI will be established.

Fig. 14.104
It may take some time to establish the connection. It is complete when the “Disconnect” button
( Item 1) is displayed. The status display for the WiFi connection setup remains unchanged.
Fig. 14.105


Fig. 14.106
Fig. 14.107

The selected T400 series VCI is fully configured for operation under MAN-cats.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to confirm the T400 series-type VCI.
Your MAN-cats testing and diagnostic system has been configured to the WiFi (WLAN) stand-
ard 802.11abgn as part of the initial start-up to reduce external interference and to achieve high
transmission rates and ranges.
This also allows for use of the 5 GHz frequency band. With the exception of the USA, this fre-
quency band is approved worldwide for internal use in enclosed spaces only.
must be changed, ( Chapter “WiFi configuration area”).

14.9 WiFi standard restrictions 802.11a/b/g/n
Country-specific restrictions when using WiFi standard 802.11a/b/g/n
Radio frequencies used by WiFi devices of types 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n are
not standardised in all countries. For this reason, 802.a/b/g/n products are designed for use
only in certain countries and may not be operated in any countries other than these. As a user
of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that they are used only in the countries for
which they are designed and that they are configured with the correct range of channels and fre-
quencies for the country in which they are operated. Any deviation from the power and frequency
settings permitted in the country of operation is in violation of national law and can be prosecuted
as such.
14.9.1 European Union regulatory

The usage of the RF modules in a vehicular environment cannot be considered as "indoor”
usage. The channels of the bands U-NII 1 and U-NII 2 are therefore only applicable when the
vehicle and the WDI-2 are inside a building (e.g.: garage, factory).
Wireless LAN with 5.18–5.32 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only in all European
Union member states, EFTA (Iceland, Norway, Liechtenstein), and most other European countries
(e.g., Switzerland, Turkey, Republic of Serbia).
Channel Channel Indoor use Outdoor use

Band
number frequency [MHz] allowed allowed
ISM 1 – 11 2 412 – 2462 Yes Yes

U-NII 1 36 – 48 5180 – 5240 Yes No
U-NII 2 52 – 64 5260 – 5320 Yes No
U-NII 2e 100 – 140 5500 – 5700 Yes No
U-NII 3 149 - 165 5750 - 5825 Yes Yes
Frequency and power for Europe:
Frequency: 2400 MHz - 2483,5 MHz, Power max.: 18 dBm

Frequency: 5150 MHz - 5350 MHz, 5470 MHz - 5725 MHz, Power max.: 16 dBm
14.9.2 France
For Mainland France
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Channels 1-13) authorized for indoor use.

2.400 -2.454 GHz (Channels 1-7) authorized for outdoor use.
Dans tous les départements métropolitains :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1-13) utilisation autorisée en usage intérieur.

2,400 -2,454 GHz (Canaux 1-7) utilisation autorisée en usage extérieur.

14.9.3 USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful inter-ference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter gener-
ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference.
Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the inter-
ference.
Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning:
To assure continued compliance, use only shielded interface cables when connecting to a comput-
er or periph-eral. Also, any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Antenna Warnings:
To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended that the device is
installed or handled in a way that the antennas are in a distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) to all
persons.
It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm
(8 inches).
The antenna is located below LED1.
This wireless adapter is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 and 5.470
to 5.75GHz frequency ranges.

14.9.4 Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the follow-ing two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Cet appareil se conforme aux normes Canada d'Industrie de RSS permis-exempt. L'utilisation est
assujetti aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) cet appareil ne peut pas causer d'interférences, et
(2) cet appareil doit accepter des interférences , y compris des interférences qui peuvent causer
desopérations non désirées de l'appareil.
Caution:
When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its opera-
tion in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used
indoors for the frequency range of 5.15GHz to 5.25GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interfer-
ence to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of
the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference
with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is
6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25- to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85GHz frequency
range in point-to-point operation. To comply with RF exposure requirements all antennas should
be located at a minimum distance of 20cm, or the minimum separation distance allowed by the
module approval, from the body of all persons.
Attention:
l'utilisation d'un réseau sans fil IEEE802.11a est restreinte à une utilisation en intérieur à cause du
fonctionne-ment dans la bande de fréquence 5.15-5.25 GHz. Industry Canada requiert que ce pro-
duit soit utilisé à l'intéri-eur des bâtiments pour la bande de fréquence 5.15-5.25 GHz afin de réduire
les possibilités d'interférences nuisibles aux canaux co-existants des systèmes de transmission
satellites. Les radars de puissances ont fait l'objet d'une allocation primaire de fréquences dans
les bandes 5.25-5.35 GHz et 5.65-5.85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent créer des interférences
avec ce produit et/ou lui être nuisible. Le gain d'antenne maximum permissible pour une utilisation
avec ce produit est de 6 dBi afin d'être conforme aux limites de puissance isotropique rayonnée
équivalente (P.I.R.E.) applicable dans les bandes 5.25-5.35 GHz et 5.725-5.85 GHz en fonction-
nement point-à-point.
Pour se conformer aux conditions d'exposition de RF toutes les antennes devraient être localisées
à une dis-tance minimum de 20 cm, ou la distance de séparation minimum permise par l'approba-
tion du module, du corps de toutes les personnes.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of
a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce
potential radio interfer-ence to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that
the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful
communication.
Selon les règlements de Canada d'Industrie, cet émetteur de radio peut seule-
ment fonctionner en utilisant une antenne du type et de gain maximum (ou
moindre) que le gain approuvé pour l'émetteur par Canada d'Indus-trie.
Pour réduire lesinterférences radio potentielles avec les autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son
gain devraient être choisis de façon à ce que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente(P.I.R.E.)
ne soit pas supérieure à celle qui est nécessaire pour une communication réussie.

14.9.5 Australia an New Zealand
his equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation
distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and
New Zealand Standards.
14.9.6 Brazil
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar
interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
14.9.7 Japan
The product complies with:
Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment
Chapter I, General Provisions

Chapter II, Transmitting Equipment
Chapter III, Receiving Equipment
Chapter IV, Article 49.20
14.9.8 Korea
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없음.해당 무선
설비는 5150-5250MHz 대역에서 실내에서만 사용할 수 있음.
14.9.9 Mexico
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este
equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
14.9.10 Morocco
The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following
cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant
and Taza.
The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 et 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized
in the following cities: Aéroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Béni Hafida,
Cabo Negro, Casa-blanca, Fès, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammédia, Rabat, Salé, Tan-
ger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag.

14.9.11 Taiwan
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大
功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，
並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射
頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
在5.25-5.35 秭赫頻帶內操作之無線資訊傳輸設備限於室內使用。
WDI-2不允許在台灣作為5250-5725 MHz頻率範圍內的主設備。
Statement translation:
Without permission granted by the NCC, any company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to
change fre-quency, enhance transmitting power or alter original characteristic as well as perfor-
mance to a approved low power radio-frequency devices.
The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal
communica-tions; If found, the user shall cease operating immediately until no interference is
achieved. The said legal communications means radio communications is operated in compli-
ance with the Telecommunications Act. The low power radio-frequency devices must be sus-
ceptible with the interference from legal communica-tions or ISM radio wave radiated devices.
The wireless information transmission equipment operating in the band 5.25-5.35 GHz is limited
to indoor use.
WDI-2 is not allowed to operate in Taiwan as a master device in the frequency range 5250–5725
MHz.
14.9.12 Singapore
Turn off any WLAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard
aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular
network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to
the offender, or legal action, or both.
Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and
where blasting operations are in progress.
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation
of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to
come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment.
This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio
waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all
people, regardless of health and age.

14.10 Selecting a VCI for vehicle diagnostics
Introduction For applications that require communication with the vehicle, the VCI selection window will open
automatically. The desired Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) can then be selected. There are
certain differences between selecting a connected VCI and an unconnected one.
14.10.1 Connected VCI

If the service computer is connected to the desired VCI (shown with a green background), the se-
lection only needs to be confirmed.
Instructions
Fig. 14.108
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to adopt the VCI selection.

14.10.2 VCI not connected
If the service computer is not connected to a Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) (greyed out),
a selection with all available VCIs is displayed ( Fig. 14.108).
In the case of a WiFi connection, only the Vehicle Communication Interfaces (VCIs) that have
already been programmed is displayed. Further information on the VCI connection is provided in
( Chapter “Application and configuration area”).
Fig. 14.109
The VCI ( Item 1) is selected.

Fig. 14.110
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to adopt the VCI selection.


14.11 Changing the Vehicle Communication Interface type
With the introduction of the T400 series Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI), it may be neces- Introduction
sary to change the VCI type (manufacturer) in MAN-cats.
Cases where a change may be needed:
When a T200 series is replaced by a T400 series VCI in a repair case.

Mixed operation of T200 and T400 series VCIs in a workshop.
Instructions
Fig. 14.111

The configuration of the T200 series VCI serves as an example.
Fig. 14.112

► Click in the grey area ( Item 1) to select the type T400 series VCI.
Fig. 14.113
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to adopt the type T400 VCI.
The dialogue box for changing the VCI type ( Fig. 14.113) opens.
Fig. 14.114
► Observe information in the dialogue box. Confirm VCI type with the “OK” button ( Item 1).
The dialogue box “Close application” or restart MAN-cats ( Fig. 14.114) opens.

Fig. 14.115
► Observe information in the dialogue box. Confirm the restart of MAN-cats with the “Yes” button
( Item 1).
MAN-cats must be restarted for the change to take effect. The restart will take place automatical-
ly. The restart is complete when the MAN-cats login screen is displayed ( Fig. 14.115).
Fig. 14.116
After the VCI type has been changed, start-up

( Chapter “Start-up of T400 Vehicle Communication Interface”) or configuration
( Chapter “Application and configuration area”) of the VCI can be carried out.

14.12 VCI recording
Introduction VCI recording will only become available after logging in and selecting a vehicle model.
The MAN-cats internal data logger can record the diagnostic bus communication for CAN and
K-Line. The log files can be uploaded to the MAN server together with a request ID.
Fig. 14.117
The “Internal data logger/Start VCI recording” button ( Item 1) should only be clicked on after
consultation with the support team.

14.13 User preferences and system settings
You can use the system settings to view and check version information of the VCI software and Introduction
the configuration of MAN-cats based on user specifications. Using the system settings, you can
change settings to reflect the user preferences and requirements of the MAN-cats diagnostic sys-
tem.
14.13.1 Opening user preferences and system settings

Instructions
Fig. 14.118
► Click on the “User preferences” button ( Item 1).

The “User preferences” dialogue box ( Chapter “Requirements”) opens.

14.13.2 T400 series VCI version information
Information on the Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) software version can be found in the
System area in the system settings.
Overview of system settings:
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Diagnosis settings Colour settings

Number plate
Personal settings
Information User Rights package

SmartCard
Workshop
User password
System
T420/425/430 installer x.xx
Control file versions
Logging settings
My general settings User survey

User settings
Diagnostic session properties
Additional ODX projects
Network connection
Network connections
Program settings Substitute language 1

Substitute language 2
Language
Language for MAN-cats I
Support language
System test

14.14 Uninstalling the T400 series VCI
This chapter is only valid if the service computer is to be cleaned up for a complete reinstallation
of MAN-cats.
MAN-cats and its associated software packages are uninstalled automatically except for deletion Introduction
of the file storage directories. If the MAN-cats installation is damaged, it may be necessary to un-
install the individual software packages manually.
The following chapter describes how to uninstall the T400 series VCI. Instructions
MAN-cats and its associated programs are uninstalled in the Windows control panel under “Pro-
grams and Features” ( Fig. 14.118).
A detailed description can be found in the user manual for the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic
system ( Chapter “Status LED “Vehicle communication””).
► Open the following section to uninstall programs under Windows 10:

Windows logo (taskbar) > Windows System > Control Panel > Programs and Features
14.14.1 Uninstalling the T400 series VCI software
If the T400 series Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) software was not automatically unin-
stalled with MAN-cats, then it must be removed from the service computer manually.
In case of a malfunction of the VCI, do not delete this software as a repair measure. Doing so will
lead to a malfunction in MAN-cats.
Fig. 14.119
► Select and mark the corresponding T42x/43x software ( Item 2).

► Click on the “Uninstall” button ( Item 1).
The uninstall process ( Fig. 14.119) starts.
The following figure is an example and may differ from the current display in Windows.
Fig. 14.120
► Click on the “Yes” button ( Item 1) to confirm uninstallation.

The software package will be uninstalled ( Fig. 14.120).
Fig. 14.121
Fig. 14.122
► Observe information in the dialogue box. Click on the “Finish” button ( Item 1).
The uninstallation is complete.

14.15 Error messages
► Information about any errors can be accessed via the “Help” button in the corresponding dia-
logue box.

14.16 Technical data of T400 series VCI
Version/technology
Display 2 x 3 status LEDs

Processor RISC CPU
Storage 256 MB DRAM
4 GB flash memory. A 32-GB version is available for data-log-
ging applications.
Operating system Linux
Application software Protocol driver for different control units, customer-specific assem-
bly, e.g.
KW1281 on TP1.6 and K-line
KWP2000 on CAN-ISO-TP / TP 1.6 / TP 2.0 and K-line
UDS on CAN-ISO-TP
SAE J1939
OBD on CAN and K-line
Interfaces
Diagnostic interface 4 x high speed CAN

4 x K-lines, one of which can also be configured as an L-line
16 V programming voltage, load capacity 1 mA
DoIP incl. activation line
Ignition detection + measurement of the voltage level of all
OBD pins
Wireless host communi- Optional: WiFi 802.11 a/b/g/n
cation Optional: WiFi 802.11 b/g/n
Optional: Without WiFi, cable only
Cabled host communica- USB 2.0 High Speed for configuration (galvanically isolated).
tion Ethernet (100 Mbit/s) (galvanically isolated) plugs have mag-
netic couplings to prevent them from being pulled out.
General data
Dimensions (W x H x D) 98 mm x 46 mm x 20 mm
Housing Impact-resistant plastic housing with integrated OBD connector
OBD head In accordance with ISO 15031 / SAE J1962
Weight Approx. 85 g
Power supply 9–32 V DC (via diagnostic plug)
5 V via USB (max. 500 mA)
Power consumption 3 W maximum
Operating temperature -20°C to +55°C
Storage temperature -20°C to +85°C
Operating humidity 10% to 90% (without condensation)
Storage humidity 10% to 90% (without condensation)

14.17 Maintenance
The maintenance work must be carried out weekly. Introduction
14.17.1 Cleaning the VCI and the magnetic socket

In order to be able detect possible damage more easily or to rule out malfunctions for reasons of
soiling, the VCI and the magnetic socket must be cleaned.
Instructions
Do not use solvents to clean the VCI.
► Clean the VCI with a cloth that is clean and dry or slightly damp.
Fig. 14.123
Very small traces of fibreglass fall away when working with a fibreglass pen.
It is imperative that you comply with company safety instructions regarding personal protective
equipment!
The magnetic socket must only be cleaned mechanically and not chemically. Dirt must be actively
expelled from the contact cavities.
To do this, use a fibreglass cleaning pen ( Item 1). Other mechanical aids, such as brushes, have
proven not to be sufficiently effective.

Fig. 14.124
► Clean all contact cavities ( Item 1) with the fibreglass pen ( Item 2) using circular motions.
The degree of soiling of the contact cavities can best be assessed with a magnifying glass.
Example of contaminated contact cavity ( Item 1)

Example of cleaned contact cavity ( Item 2)

Fig. 14.125
► Use a vacuum cleaner to remove the remaining fibreglass chips.

14.17.2 Visual inspection
Fig. 14.126
The two centre pins in the top row of the OBD plug connector are slightly longer and protrude.
► Check OBD plug connector ( Item 1) for damage, especially for bent pins.
► Check the housing ( Item 2) for damage.
► Check the VCI’s magnetic socket ( Item 3) for damage and contamination of contacts and
magnets.
► Check the magnetic plug on the USB cable ( Item 4) for damage, contamination of the con-
tacts and the magnets.
► Check the USB cable ( Item 5) and USB connection for damage.
If damaged, repair or replace the affected component (VCI, USB cable or vehicle diagnostic
connection).
Warranties and repairs to the VCI must be processed using the following path:
MAN After Sales Portal > Diagnostics > MAN-cats

14.17.3 Checking the connections
Fig. 14.127
► Connect the magnetic plug of the USB cable ( Item 3) to the magnetic socket of the VCI
( Item 2).
There should not be any gaps and there should be a perceptible magnetic resistance when
disconnected.
► Connect the VCI ( Item 1) to the vehicle’s diagnostic connection.

It should connect easily and there should not be an excessive gap.
If damaged, repair or replace the affected component (VCI, USB cable or vehicle diagnostic
connection).
Warranties and repairs to the VCI must be processed using the following path:
MAN After Sales Portal > Diagnostics > MAN-cats

15 l Working with MAN-cats
Contents
15.1 Launching the MAN-cats program........................................234
15.2 Logging into MAN-cats.........................................................235
15.3 Vehicle identification............................................................238
15.4 Vehicle information page......................................................244
15.5 Vehicle-specific information portal........................................247
15.6 System navigation...............................................................249
15.7 Diagnostic session options..................................................250
HMC600_0 Working with MAN-cats 233

15.1 Launching the MAN-cats program
Introduction The MAN-cats Installer performs the starting procedure for MAN-cats. In addition, the MAN-cats
Installer checks whether any new software packages are available every time that MAN-cats is
started and then performs an automatic download if required.
Further information on the tasks and functions of the MAN-cats Installer can be found in
 Chapter “Functions/settings of the MAN-cats Installer”.
► Double-click on the TRATON icon on the Windows desktop to start the MAN-cats diagnostic
program.
The start program opens with the selection window for the corresponding diagnostic tester brand.
Fig. 15.1
► Select the desired diagnostic tester brand by clicking on the corresponding tile ( Item 1) or
( Item 2).
If a diagnostic tester brand is not selected, the Installer will automatically start the diagnostic tester
brand selected last after expiry of a defined waiting time (approx. 10 seconds).
The MAN-cats Installer checks whether new software packages are available. The MAN-cats diag-
nostic program starts after checking and, if required, installing software packages.
Depending on the settings made during installation, MAN-cats may be launched automatically
when the service computer is started.
Start-up has been completed as soon as the login screen ( Fig. 15.2) of MAN-cats is displayed.
234 Working with MAN-cats HMC600_0

15.2 Logging into MAN-cats
The MAN-cats login process depends on user and runtime rights Introduction
( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights”). The functional scope in the working area depends on
the login type.
15.2.1 Access by means of technician SmartCard

Access by means of technician SmartCard requires a contact-based SmartCard read/write device,
an activated technician SmartCard and your personal PIN.
When logging into MAN-cats for the first time, it is necessary to update the technician Smart-
Card. The technician SmartCard update is carried out automatically when you log in. An Internet
connection is required for this.
Instructions
Fig. 15.2
► Insert the technician SmartCard into the SmartCard read/write device provided.
The visibility of the PIN can be set using the “User preferences” button in the system settings
(User preferences > Information > PIN).
► Enter the SmartCard PIN in the input field ( Item 1).
► Select the “Confirm” button to log in ( Fig. 15.5).

15.2.2 Access via “Online Basic” runtime rights (licence file)
Introduction Online Basic runtime rights (licence file) are required for access without MAN-cats SmartCard.
These rights can be purchased on the MAN After Sales Portal. The computer ID of the service
computer and an Internet connection are required to purchase the “Online Basic” runtime rights
(licence file). ( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights”).
The licence file (“Online Basic” runtime rights) must be selected each time you log into MAN-cats
using the “Login with rights file” button, as described above.
Instructions
Fig. 15.3
► Click on the “Login with rights file” button ( Item 1).

MAN-cats opens the Windows Explorer window ( Fig. 15.4).

Fig. 15.4
► Select the licence file in the corresponding storage location ( Item 1) and confirm with the
“Open” button ( Item 2).
The dialogue box ( Fig. 15.4) closes and login will be performed ( Fig. 15.5).

15.3 Vehicle identification
Introduction There are two options for starting or resuming a diagnostic session/application on the vehicle
identification screen.
Start a new diagnostic session/application ( Chapter “Starting a new diagnostic session”)

Continue an existing diagnostic session/application
( Chapter “Continuing a diagnostic session”)
Overview
Fig. 15.5
1 Architecture The vehicle architecture and model selection are necessary in order to cor-
rectly assign the maximum installed control unit variants to the correspond-
ing vehicle in a subsequent diagnostic session/application. The control units
may not be detected correctly if an incorrect selection is made.
2 Applica- Cancel selection The selection can be cancelled by clicking on the but-
tion-specific ton.
toolbar
Purging data Clicking on the button transfers/purges diag-
nostic session data to different MAN servers
( Chapter “Purging data”) and updates control files
( Chapter “Updating MAN-cats control files”).
VCI Manager The VCI selection

( Chapter “Selecting a VCI for vehicle diagnostics”)
opens.
Stored diagnostic Click on the button to access the overview of all
sessions diagnostic sessions that have not yet been completed
( Chapter “Vehicle identification”).
Confirm selection Adopt the selection by clicking on the button and switch
to the next view.

Architecture Models
TG3 TGX/TGS/TGM/TGL/Diesel of the new generation.

TG1/TG2 TGX/TGS/TGA/TGM/TGL of the old generation.
TGA
Bus (electric, hybrid, chassis, diesel, gas)
No CAN F/M/L2000/90
Bus chassis, diesel and gas
CLA
Engines for Engines for installation, marine engines, control units, WWH-OBD, Generix
installation ODX tester and vehicle data file management
and marine
engines
15.3.1 Starting a new diagnostic session

Vehicle or component identification is required when starting a new diagnostic session/application.
Information about the vehicle architecture and model of the current vehicle is required for this.
Some MAN-cats I applications are hidden behind the vehicle architecture selection “No CAN
architecture” with its vehicle models “F/M/L 2000/90”, “Bus/Chassis” and “CLA”. These diagnostic
applications require the MAN Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) T400 in order to communi-
cate with the vehicle.
Instructions
Fig. 15.6
► Click on the button for the required architecture ( Item 1).

The model selection ( Fig. 15.7) opens.

Fig. 15.7
► Click on the button for the required model ( Item 1).

The “Confirm vehicle identification” area ( Fig. 15.8) opens.
Fig. 15.8
► Select the “Confirm” button to complete vehicle identification.

The diagnostic session is started.

15.3.2 Continuing a diagnostic session
In addition to starting MAN-cats, you also have the option of continuing a diagnostic session that Introduction
was previously interrupted. You then have access to a wide range of information from the previous
diagnostic sessions.
A short list of the interrupted sessions can be found in the table "Current diagnostic sessions" in
the bottom application area of the vehicle identification screen ( Item 1).
Instructions
Fig. 15.9
► Click on the “Saved diagnostic sessions” button ( Item 1).

The overview with saved diagnostic sessions ( Fig. 15.8) opens.

Fig. 15.10
1 Overview of diagnostic List of diagnostic sessions that have not yet been completed.
sessions
2 Filter data recording Filter diagnostic sessions to find the desired diagnostic session.
3 Application-specific Synchronise overview of diagnostic sessions with
toolbar a server.
Close all open diagnostic sessions.
Close overview of diagnostic sessions.
Confirm the selected diagnostic session and contin-

ue with it.
Filtering data recording:
► Enter filter criteria (letters and/or numbers) in the input field ( Item 2).

Fig. 15.11
► Mark the desired diagnostic session ( Item 1)and confirm with the “Continue the selected
diagnostic log” button.
The vehicle information page ( Fig. 15.12) opens.

15.4 Vehicle information page
Introduction After each vehicle model or application selection and system initialisation, you reach the vehicle
information page ( Fig. 15.12). Information and applications for the respective vehicle model or
application selection are available here.
The information provided varies and depends on factors such as: a new diagnostic session has
been started, an interrupted diagnostic session has been resumed, the vehicle configuration has
been read out or workflows are available.
Instructions
Fig. 15.12
1 Vehicle overview Information about:

Vehicle architecture
Vehicle model
Application as well as installed control units, etc.
( Chapter “Vehicle overview”).
2 Executed diagnostic Provides an overview of the started and complet-
application ed applications/work steps in a diagnostic session
( Chapter “Executed diagnostic application”).

3 Application-specific Click on the button to open the ve-

toolbar hicle-specific information portal
( Chapter “Vehicle-specific information portal”).
Click on the button to call up technical support. This func-

tion allows a detailed data package with the necessary
MAN-cats system data and the corresponding workshop
and user information to be forwarded to Support.
Technical support should only be used when you are in-
structed to do so by MAN-cats Support.
Filter function
Overview of all available workflows
End active workflow prematurely.
The complete displayed overview can be printed out with

the “Print” button.
Click on the button to adopt the vehicle information and

continue with the diagnostic session.
4 Active workflows Shows any available workflows for the selected vehicle configura-
tion ( Chapter “Active workflows”).

15.4.1 Vehicle overview
The vehicle architecture and model designations corresponding to the vehicle selection are dis-
played in the “Vehicle overview” area ( Item 1;  Fig. 15.12). After the vehicle configuration has
been read out, further information on the components installed in the vehicle is also shown.
15.4.2 Executed diagnostic application

The started/executed diagnostic applications of the current vehicle selection are displayed in the
“Executed diagnostic application” area ( Item 2;  Fig. 15.12). The displayed diagnostic applica-
tions can be filtered according to date and time.
The entered diagnostic applications are shown together with the menu structure of MAN-cats and
the date of execution.
Filter diagnostic applications
► Click on the “Filter result by date” button to start the filter function. The button is replaced by the
following button when clicked.
► Click on the “Remove filter” button to cancel the filter function. The button is replaced by the
previous button when clicked.
15.4.3 Active workflows

Workflows ( Item 4;  Fig. 15.12) are procedures that consist of individual predefined work steps
and activities and relate, for example, to technical or organisational processes.
► Click on the “Workflow overview” button to open the overview of all available workflows.
► Click on the “Complete workflow prematurely” button to terminate an active workflow prema-
turely.

15.5 Vehicle-specific information portal
The vehicle-specific information portal provides you with detailed information on the current or con- Introduction
tinued diagnostic session collected in a central location. Any screenshots you have made, entered
comments or automatically generated reports of the read-out diagnostic memories and control unit
information as well as various logs on maintenance, parametrisation or engine test routines are
available here.
The vehicle-specific information portal offers the possibility of saving and/or printing relevant in-
formation before ending a diagnostic session. In the case of a resumed diagnostic session, the
information portal offers you or other employees an overview of the activities already performed at
a later point in time.
Instructions
Fig. 15.13
1 Navigation area/tree
2 Display area The display area shows all content that corresponds to the nav-
igation tree selection.
The handling actions for the displayed content (scrolling, mag-
nification, rotating etc.) are performed on the graphic interface
using the mouse cursor.

3 Application-specific Go to next page of the displayed document.
toolbar
Go to previous page of the displayed document.
Cancel loading of the selected document.
Reload selected document.
Open the storage location using Windows Explorer.
Close selected document.
Synchronise overview of diagnostic sessions with a

server.
Navigation tree overview
Category Contents
Screenshot Storage location for screenshots captured during the diagnos-

tic session
Datalogger Data logger recordings, current gearbox
Print diagnostic report Reports with information about the diagnostic session,
performed test sequences and information about the vehicle
configuration
Diagnostic memory Diagnostic memory logs
Identification files All control unit identifications read out within a diagnostic
session
Monitoring Recording of monitoring signals
OBD system identification Logs from on-board diagnosis
OBDU diagnostic memory log OBDU diagnostic memory logs
Logs All logs created during the diagnostic session, for example
from maintenance, customer-specific parametrisation, etc.
Circuit diagram Storage location for circuit diagrams “printed” in the circuit
diagram search engine (PDF)

15.6 System navigation
The system navigation ( Fig. 15.14) acts as a selection menu for the individual areas and the re-
lated applications in MAN-cats. Here, the menu structure is displayed on the left side of the screen
in the form of a navigation tree ( Item 3). On the right-hand side ( Item 2), the corresponding
content (sub-menus) is shown in the form of buttons, e.g. for tablet operation.
Fig. 15.14
1 Orders/actions with/ Vehicle-specific application overview (diagnostic memory, pro-

without vehicle gramming, maintenance, etc.)
2 Display area Possible actions of the selected menu item
3 Navigation tree
4 Systems/control units System-related application overview (central computer, drive
systems, etc.)
Functions Function-related application overview (fuel tank, cooling sys-
tem, etc.) - optional
Tools Additional tools (DLS coil tester, etc.)
Click on one of the displayed levels to open and display the navigation tree and all sub-items of
the selected level.
► Click on the desired menu Item in the navigation tree ( Item 3) or the corresponding button in
the display area ( Item 2) to open the individual sub-menus.
► The application is opened and started by double-clicking on the desired menu Item in the nav-
igation tree ( Item 3) or clicking on the corresponding button in the display area ( Item 2).

15.7 Diagnostic session options
When a current diagnostic session is ended, it is necessary to choose a session option ( Fig. 15.15).
The status of the current diagnostic session can be managed by selecting a session option. A dis-
tinction is made here between continuing, interrupting or ending a diagnostic session.
Ending a diagnostic session
► Click on the “Exit” button to end the current diagnostic session and go to the session option
selection.
Fig. 15.15
Button Action Explanation
Continue diagnostic Selecting this option continues the current diagnos-

session tic session. For this, the navigation menu of MAN-cats
opens again. There is no transmission (purging) of any
session data.
Interrupt/pause diag- This option offers the possibility of saving the current di-
nostic session agnostic session with all the activities already performed
as well as the collected information so that the interrupt-
ed diagnostic session can be continued for this vehicle
at a later time. There is no transmission (purging) of any
session data.
End diagnostic ses- The diagnostic session is finally completed with

sion this option. If relevant data for transmission to an
MAN server was generated and collected during the
diagnostic session, the Item “Upload of the remaining
session logs” ( Item 1) will be displayed. The
session data should always be transmitted (purged)
to guarantee the consistency of the vehicle data with
regard to MAN Corporate Center. An Internet connection
to the MAN server is required for this.
All interrupted diagnostic sessions are stored in the vehicle identification area under “Current
diagnostic sessions”. Further information on opening an interrupted diagnostic session can be
found in ( Chapter “Continuing a diagnostic session”).
All completed diagnostic sessions are deleted from the overview of current diagnostic sessions.
If the diagnostic session contains data for transmission (purging), the session will not be deleted
until the available data has been successfully transmitted (purged).

16 l Information portal
Contents
16.1 Information portal.................................................................252
16.2 Display area.........................................................................252
HMC600_0 Information portal 251

16.1 Information portal
Introduction The information portal contains further information on MAN-cats as well as notifications relating to
the diagnostic system.
Instructions
Fig. 16.1
► Click on the “Information portal” button ( Item 1) to open the information portal.
The information portal ( Fig. 16.2) opens.
16.2 Display area
Overview
Fig. 16.2
252 Information portal HMC600_0

1 Navigation area/tree Overview of the selectable menus. Click on the desired menu
to open it.
2 Display area The display area shows all content that corresponds to the nav-
igation tree selection.
The handling actions for the displayed content (scrolling, mag-
nification, rotating etc.) are performed on the graphic interface
using the mouse cursor.
3 Application-specific Go to next page of the displayed document.
toolbar
Go to previous page of the displayed document.
Cancel loading of the selected document.
Reload selected document.
Close selected document.
Open the storage location using Windows Explor-

er.
Print current document view.
Further information on using the information portal is provided on the help page of the portal.
HMC600_0 Information portal 253

Fig. 16.3
► The desired information is displayed by clicking on the individual buttons in the navigation area/
tree ( Item 1).
Category Contents
News Release notes with information on changes, improvements and new features
for the MAN-cats updates
Info point Various information, quick guides, any supplements to the RSS feeds and
bulletins regarding the MAN-cats diagnostic system
MAN-cats User manuals (testing and diagnostic systems, VCI T400 series and
documentation monitoring analysis)
254 Information portal HMC600_0

17 l MAN Diagnostic Assistant
Contents
17.1 Introduction..........................................................................256
17.2 MAN Diagnostic Assistant....................................................257
17.3 MAN Diagnostic Assistant user interface.............................260
17.4 Application example for SPN (diagnostic code) category.....262
17.5 Application example for “Components” category..................263
17.6 Application example for “Circuit diagram” category..............264
17.7 Multi-core cables.................................................................282
17.8 Print circuit diagram.............................................................285
17.9 Multiplex information (MUX).................................................289
17.10 Application example for “Cable numbers” category..............291
17.11 Change in vehicle resolution in MAN-cats............................292
HMC600_0 MAN Diagnostic Assistant 255

17.1 Introduction
The MAN Diagnostic Assistant is a tool for providing vehicle-specific information and data.
It functions like a search engine: a database is searched for diagnostic codes, components, circuit
diagrams or simply for keywords.
The MAN Diagnostic Assistant is a tool for obtaining series-specific information.
The most important information consists of:
Description of components
Installation locations
Technical data (pin assignments with measurement values)
Test instructions
Descriptions of diagnostic memory entries
Circuit diagrams
If MAN-cats is connected to a vehicle and the vehicle architecture and vehicle model are selected,
only the information and technical data for the specific vehicle are displayed. A search is naturally
also possible without selecting the vehicle architecture and vehicle model. The filter function can
also be used to restrict the scope of results.
The “Circuit diagram” category in the MAN Diagnostic Assistant is currently only available for the
latest vehicle generations such as TGS/TGX New Generation, Lion4City (from model year 2020)
and Lion’s City E. More will follow.
Added value for workshop and customer:

Systematic provision of all relevant information and data saves time and enables the MAN service
outlet to work efficiently.
Simple search for diagnostic codes (SPN) or components

Direct and fast retrieval of information in a tool used by the workshop
No other tool needed, and no training needed in another system
Displayed data matches the components in the vehicle
Only relevant information is displayed
Clear, structured and uniform presentation of information

256 Introduction to the MAN Diagnostic Assistant HMC600_0

17.2 MAN Diagnostic Assistant
The MAN Diagnostic Assistant is a tool for obtaining series-specific information that assists in Introduction
troubleshooting.
The provision of information and its scope depends on when you enter the MAN Diagnostic Assis-
tant.
If the MAN Diagnostic Assistant is started without vehicle resolution, i.e. without selecting a vehicle
architecture, a vehicle model or a loaded vehicle data file, the search is performed in all currently
available information/data.
The MAN Diagnostic Assistant has filter functions to restrict this.
When starting via the vehicle architecture, a vehicle model or loading a vehicle data file, the infor-
mation/data offered is output in line with the vehicle resolution. When the vehicle is resolved using
the vehicle data file, only information/data for the corresponding vehicle is usually displayed.
The MAN Diagnostic Assistant remains open if it was started without vehicle resolution, and if a
vehicle architecture etc. is then selected as part of the further work, the user will receive a mes-
sage in the MAN Diagnostic Assistant about updating of the information/data.
Vehicle resolution Resolution level
Without vehicle resolution Provision of the information available in the MAN Diagnostic
Assistant without vehicle reference
With vehicle resolution, 1st level Vehicle architecture, vehicle model
With vehicle resolution, 2nd level Vehicle architecture, vehicle model/vehicle identification

17.2.1 Starting the MAN Diagnostic Assistant with vehicle
architecture
Selection of a vehicle series and launching of the MAN Diagnostic Assistant are described below.
Instructions
Fig. 17.3
► Select the “Vehicle architecture” button ( Item 1).

The “Vehicle model selection” ( Fig. 17.4) opens.
Fig. 17.4
► Select the required model ( Item 1).
258 MAN Diagnostic Assistant HMC600_0

Fig. 17.1
► Check selection of vehicle architecture and model ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Document search” button ( Item 2).

The MAN Diagnostic Assistant ( Fig. 17.2) opens in a separate browser window.
Fig. 17.2

17.3 MAN Diagnostic Assistant user interface
Overview
Fig. 17.5
Item Area Explanation
1 Input field for Enter search terms or parts of a search term. During the search, the sys-
the search tem compares all content with the search term and then displays this in the
function results table. Matches with the search term are displayed in bold format in
the results table.
2 Categories Selection of SPN (diagnostic codes), components, circuit diagrams and
cable numbers. Separate tabs open when individual components are se-
lected in the individual categories. This enables various information to be
compiled. The “Circuit diagram” category becomes active only with vehicle
resolution, vehicle architecture, vehicle model/vehicle identification. The
“Circuit diagram” category is currently available only for the latest vehicle
generations such as TGS/TGX New Generation, Lion’s City and Lion’s City
E. More will follow. It is recommended not to open too many categories in
order to ensure ease of use.
3 Column The column headings are adapted to the respective category. The column
headings headings have a sorting function (sorting up and down).
4 Filter The display depends on the selected category. Search results can be sort-
ed by designations.
5 Display and Display of results per page (5-100).
page number Display of number of pages with the “Scroll forwards/backwards” button.

After entering the desired search term, click on the individual categories to obtain further informa-
tion/data.
Example: “Component” category: Search for control unit. Receipt of the component description.
Switch to the “Circuit diagram” category to obtain the corresponding circuit diagram.
The filter function can be used to find the required information more quickly if the results table
extends over several pages.

17.4 Application example for SPN (diagnostic code) category
Introduction The Suspect Parameter Number (SPN) is a diagnostic code that the electronic system stores in
the diagnostic memory if a malfunction occurs and which can be read out using MAN-cats. SPN
documents assist you in troubleshooting.
The following example is based on the vehicle resolution TG3 > TGX/TGS.
Instructions
Fig. 17.6
► Enter the required SPN in the input field ( Item 1) and confirm with the Enter key.
The results summary showing the selected vehicle architecture/vehicle model ( Item 2) and
the results table ( Item 4) are opened.
The results table ( Item 4) consists of the columns SPN No., control unit and description.
► Select the required SPN.

If required, the results table can be filtered by SPN and control unit using the filter function
( Item 3).
Using the filter function:
► Click on the “Filter” button ( Item 3).
► Select the required SPN and/or control unit from the selection window.
The results table is filtered according to the selected criterion.
► Select the required SPN and click on the button ( Item 5) for HTML display variant.
► Select the required SPN and click on the button ( Item 5) for PDF display variant.
The selected display variant opens in a new window.

17.5 Application example for “Components” category
In the “Components” category, information on individual components can be called up. Such infor- Introduction
mation may include the installation location, pin assignment, setpoint values and test recommen-
dations.
Instructions
Fig. 17.7
► Enter the required component designation in the input field ( Item 1) and confirm by pressing
Enter.
The results table ( Item 4) consists of the component code, information and control unit col-
umns.
► Select the required component designation.

If required, the results table can be filtered by component code, information and control unit
using the filter function ( Item 3).
► Select the required component code and/or required information and/or required control unit
from the selection window.
► Select the required component and click on the button ( Item 5) for HTML display variant.
► Select the required component and click on the button ( Item 5) for PDF display variant.
The selected display variant opens in a new window.

17.6 Application example for “Circuit diagram” category
Instructions
Fig. 17.8
► Enter the required component designation in the input field ( Item 1) and confirm by pressing
Enter.
The results table ( Item 4) consists of the component code and component columns.
► Select the required component/circuit diagram ( Item 3).
► Click on the button for HTML display variant ( Item 5).

The interactive circuit diagram opens in a new window.

17.6.1 Interactive circuit diagram
Instructions
Fig. 17.9
In the main view, the selected component is highlighted in colour and the respective circuit diagram
( Item 1) is displayed.
► Click on the “Circuit diagram menu” button ( Item 2).

The settings and selection options ( Fig. 17.10) open.
Fig. 17.10

Item Area Explanation
1 Select view type Open the selection window and choose between the physical
view (preselected) and the logical view.
2 Activate page format Divides the circuit diagram display across several pages (print
option).
3 Mark multi-core cables Highlights multi-core cables.
4 Print circuit diagram Save circuit diagram as PDF file.

The PDF file is automatically
opened in the PDF program installed on the service computer,
saved in the directory User data > MAN-cats directory > Ve-
hicle brand > Vehicle identification number.
and stored in the vehicle information portal under Circuit dia-
gram.
5 Reset circuit diagram The representation of the circuit diagram is reset to the overall
view of the current circuit diagram, e.g. after zooming. The set
view type is retained.
6 Reduce view Only becomes active when a component has been marked in the
circuit diagram.
Reduces the view to the selected component.
7 Legend Table listing all components of the circuit diagram, with the ex-
ception of electrical cables. If a component is selected in the key,
the background is highlighted in blue and the selected compo-
nent is framed in bold in the circuit diagram ( Item 7).
8 Component Selected component in the key ( Item 6).

Change view type
The default view type is the physical view.
Fig. 17.11
► Click on the button next to “Select view type” ( Item 1) and select “Logical view”.
The circuit diagram display switches to the logical view ( Item 2).
To switch back to the physical view, repeat the instructions according to the physical view or click
on the “Reset circuit diagram” button ( Item 3).
Component search
Fig. 17.12
► Select and highlight the required component in the key ( Item 2).

The circuit diagram is centred on the marked component ( Item 1).

Enlarge area (zoom in)
Fig. 17.13
► Press and hold the left mouse button and drag a border ( Item 1) around the desired area from
top left to bottom right.
► Release the left mouse button.

The selected area ( Fig. 17.14) is enlarged (zoom in).
Fig. 17.14

Reduce area (zoom out)
Fig. 17.15
► Press and hold the left mouse button and drag a line ( Item 1) from bottom left to top right. The
area can be freely selected. Depending on the length of the drawn line, the factor increases in
0.5 steps from 0.5 to 4.0.

The selected range is always reduced by the selected factor (zoom out).
Components outside the display area
Fig. 17.16

► Select and highlight the required component in the key ( Item 2).
The circuit diagram display ( Item 1) switches to the required component; the zoom area re-
mains active.
Adjust to page (overall view of circuit diagram)
Fig. 17.17
► Press and hold the left mouse button and drag a line ( Item 1) from top right to bottom left.
The area can be freely selected.

The circuit diagram display ( Fig. 17.18) switches to the overall view.
Fig. 17.18

Additional information received from circuit diagram
A circuit diagram contains a main component. This main component is also the designation of the
circuit diagram and all function-related components. Detailed information on components such
as control units, electrical cables, contacts, electrical plug connectors or multiplex information is
provided in the circuit diagram.
It is possible to expand the circuit diagram or to open a new circuit diagram using a new main
component. By expanding the circuit diagram, components can be displayed that do not have a
function-related connection starting from the main component, but are connected to a component
in the circuit diagram.
Generate new circuit diagram representation from existing circuit diagram

In order to obtain further information about a component in the current circuit diagram, you can
switch from the current circuit diagram display to the display of the required component.
Fig. 17.19
► Double-click on the required component ( Item 1).

The circuit diagram of the required component ( Fig. 17.20) opens.

Fig. 17.20
► Click on the “Update” button of the browser used or click on the “F5” button.
The original circuit diagram ( Fig. 17.21) opens.

Expand circuit diagram
For clearer illustration, the electrical plug connector is reduced to the required level (collapsed).
These plug connectors can be expanded if required.
In the further documentation, the components described are marked in colour for better visual
perception. The coloured marking is not absolutely necessary in order to be able to carry out the
described steps.
Fig. 17.21
► Double-click on the button of the required electrical plug connector ( Item 1).

The circuit diagram ( Fig. 17.22) will be updated.

Fig. 17.22
► Click on the “Update” button of the browser used or click on the “F5” button.
or

Fig. 17.23
► Click on the “Reset circuit diagram” button ( Item 1).


Additional information on electrical cables
Fig. 17.24
► Enlarge the circuit diagram if required.
► Click on the required electrical cable ( Item 1).

The “Electrical cable properties” dialogue box ( Item 2) opens.
The information offered depends on various factors, such as cable type, etc. and is output with
different information scopes.
The following information may be included, for example:
Item number
Component description
Insulation colour(s)
Smallest permissible bending radius in mm
Cross-section in mm²
Designation of signal
Unique cable number
The header of the dialogue box can be grabbed and moved freely with the mouse. The dialogue
box closes automatically in the event of further actions or is closed via the “X” in the header.

Additional information on electrical plug connectors
Fig. 17.25
► Enlarge the circuit diagram if required.
► Click on the required electrical plug connector ( Item 2).

The “Electrical plug connector properties” dialogue box ( Item 1) opens.
The information offered depends on various factors, such as plug connector type, component, etc.
and is output with different information scopes.
The following information may be included, for example:
Item number
Component description
Housing colour
Use of the connected component
Usage description
The header of the dialogue box can be grabbed and moved freely with the mouse. The dialogue
box closes automatically in the event of further actions or is closed via the “X” in the header.
Additional information on assigned and unused contacts of the electrical plug connector
The designation “unused contact” refers to the currently selected circuit diagram.

Assigned contacts of an electrical plug connector
For the sake of clarity, the dialogue box ( Item 1) is used as “Contact properties” or “Compo-
nent properties” in this section, depending on the application.
Fig. 17.26
► Click on the required plug contact ( Item 2) and hold the mouse cursor on the plug contact.
The dialogue boxes “Contact” ( Item 3) and “Contact properties” ( Item 1) open.
The “Contact” dialogue box ( Item 3) contains the following information:
Contact number of the electrical plug connector

Cable number
Component number with information on the plug connector or plug contact of the target com-
ponent.
The information offered depends on various factors, such as plug connector type, component, etc.
and is output with different information scopes.
The “Contact properties” dialogue box ( Item 1) may contain the following information:
Terminal, Item number
Terminal, description
Terminal, contact surface.

Additional information on assigned contacts of an electrical plug connector
Fig. 17.27
► Double-click on the required contact number of the connected component ( Item 1).

The circuit diagram display switches to the overall view and the dialogue box “Contact proper-
ties” opens after a short delay.
► Double-click on the electrical cable number ( Item 2).

The circuit diagram display switches to the overall view.
► Click on the contact number ( Item 4).

The circuit diagram display switches to the overall view if the circuit diagram was enlarged
beforehand.
► Double-click on the “Contact frame” button ( Item 3).

The circuit diagram display switches to the overall view ( Fig. 17.28) and is supplemented
with the components that are also connected to the electrical plug connector (XA) of the com-
ponent (X3721).

Fig. 17.28
Unused contacts of an electrical plug connector
For the sake of clarity, the dialogue box ( Item 1) is used as “Contact properties” or “Compo-
nent properties” in this section, depending on the application.
Fig. 17.29
► Click on the “Expand (+)” button ( Item 3). After expanding, this is displayed as a “Collapse
(-)” button.
The electrical plug connector is expanded.
► Click on the required unused contact ( Item 4) and hold the mouse cursor on the plug contact.
The dialogue boxes “Contact” ( Item 2) and “Contact properties” ( Item 1) open.

The “Contact” dialogue box ( Item 2) may contain the following information:
Component number with contact number

The “Contact properties” dialogue box ( Item 1) may contain the following information:
Terminal, contact surface
The header of the dialogue box can be grabbed and moved freely with the mouse.
Fig. 17.30
► Click on the “Expand (+)” button ( Item 1). After expanding, this is displayed as a “Collapse
(-)” button.
The contact is expanded.
► Double-click on the required contact number ( Item 2) and/or ( Item 3).

The circuit diagram display switches to the overall view ( Fig. 17.31). The corresponding elec-
trical cable and components are supplemented.
► Double-click on the contact frame ( Item 4).

The circuit diagram display switches to the overall view ( Fig. 17.32) and is supplemented
with the components that are also connected to the electrical plug connector (XA) of the com-
ponent (X3721).

Fig. 17.31
Fig. 17.32

17.7 Multi-core cables
Introduction Multi-core cables consist of several individual signal lines that are protected against interference,
such as magnetic fields, by means of several sheaths.
The multi-core display is only available as a “physical view” view type.
Instructions
Fig. 17.33
► Check whether all required components are displayed in the circuit diagram.
► Activate the “Mark multi-core cables” check box ( Item 2).

The message window ( Item 1) opens with the message “The currently selected options do
not allow navigation through the circuit diagram”.
Multi-core cables are displayed in colour (red) in the circuit diagram.
The background colour of the circuit diagram changes.
If you change the view type or click on the “Reset circuit diagram” button, the display option
“Mark multi-core cables” is deactivated and navigation through the circuit diagram is available
again.

Fig. 17.34
► Click on the required multi-core cable ( Item 1).

The required multi-core cable ( Item 1) is logged and the individual electrical cables
( Item 2) of the multi-core cables are shown in colour.
Fig. 17.35
► Click on individual electrical cables ( Item 1).

The entire line or signal path ( Item 2) within the circuit diagram is shown in colour.
After a short delay, the dialogue box “Electrical cable properties” ( Item 3) also opens.

Fig. 17.36
The dialogue boxes for cable, contact and electrical plug connector properties are still available
in the multi-core cable display. Individual electrical cables in the multi-core cable display can be
made visible by selection.
► Move the mouse cursor ( Item 2) over the required component, contact or multi-core cable
and click on it as necessary.
The “Cable properties” ( Item 3),"Contact" and “Electrical plug connector properties” ( Item 1)
dialogue boxes open.

17.8 Print circuit diagram
This chapter describes the different settings options for displaying a circuit diagram for the printout. Introduction
This includes splitting the circuit diagram and displaying information on components and multi-core
cables.
Instructions
Fig. 17.37

Depending on the size of the circuit diagram, it may be useful to divide the circuit diagram across
several pages in order to ensure readability or create space for your own notes.
Fig. 17.38
Optional settings:
► Open the selection window ( Item 1) and select the desired view type.
If the view type is changed, the circuit diagram display changes to the desired view type.

Depending on the size of the circuit diagram, it may be useful to divide the circuit diagram across
several pages in order to ensure readability or create space for your own notes.
► Activate the “Activate page division” check box ( Item 2).

The message window opens with the message “The currently selected options do not permit
navigation through the circuit diagram”.
The background colour of the circuit diagram changes.
Show multi-core cables:
► Activate the “Mark multi-core cables” check box ( Item 3).

Multi-core cables are shown in colour in the circuit diagram ( Fig. 17.39).
The multi-core display is only available as a “physical view” view type.
Fig. 17.39
► To scroll through the circuit diagram, click on the “Next and Back” buttons ( Item 1).

Fig. 17.40
Select additional information:
► Click on the “Expand (+)” button of the required electrical plug connector. After expanding, this
is displayed as a “Collapse (-)” button.
The electrical plug connector is expanded.
► Activate the required contact.

The “Contact properties” dialogue box ( Item 1) opens.
The sequence should be adhered to accordingly, otherwise the “Contact properties” dialogue box
closes again. The contact properties are present once per page and remain unchanged when
scrolling forwards and backwards.
Fig. 17.41

► Click on the “Print circuit diagram” button ( Item 1).
The “Print format” dialogue box ( Fig. 17.42) opens.
Fig. 17.42
► To print the circuit diagram, follow the settings of the PDF program and installed printer.
Fig. 17.43
► Click on the “Print format” selection window ( Item 1) and select the print format.
Currently, only the print format “A3 landscape format” is available.
► Click on the “Print” button ( Item 2).

The circuit diagram is automatically saved as a PDF file
opened in the PDF program installed on the service computer,

on the drive C:/ > User data > MAN-cats > Vehicle brand > Vehicle identification number of the
service computer
and on the vehicle information page, Vehicle-specific information portal under Circuit diagram.

17.9 Multiplex information (MUX)
Instructions
Multiplex information is available only for the ZBRO32 control unit.
Fig. 17.44
► Move the mouse cursor over the required contact or electrical cable and select if required.
The “Cable properties” and “Contact properties” dialogue boxes ( Item 1) open.
The information offered depends on various factors, such as plug contact, control unit input (In) or
control unit output (Out) etc., and is output with different scopes of information.
1 Contact properties The General tab contains general information about the contact
(example).
Terminal tab number
Terminal, contact surface
2 Contact properties The MUX information tab contains multiplex information on the
contact (examples).
Node name
Plug
Symbol
Signal name
Long name
Signal DID (Diagnostic Identifier)
Diagnostic capability
Diagnostic signal
Diagnostics DID
Emergency operation

3 Contact Information on:

Cable number
Component number with contact number of the connected
components
4 Physical contact num- Consecutive physical contact number, independent of multiplex in-
ber formation.
5 Contact designation Indicator for the presence of multiplex information.
with multiplex informa-
Information on signal type, e.g.:
tion
Output (OUT)
Input (IN)
Pulse width modulation (PWM)
LowSide (LS) ground potential
HighSide (HS) voltage potential

17.10 Application example for “Cable numbers” category
The search is carried out using cable number or terms. Introduction
The “Cable number” tab is currently always active, regardless of the selected vehicle architecture
or vehicle model.
The information provided applies only to the vehicle architectures TG1 and TG2
Instructions
Fig. 17.45
► Enter the cable number or term you are looking for in the input field ( Item 1) and confirm by
pressing Enter.
The results summary showing the selected model ( Item 2) and the results table ( Item 4)
are opened.
Not valid for TG3 architecture.
The results table ( Item 4) consists of the cable number and description columns.
► Select the required “cable number” and refer to the stored information in the “Description” col-
umn.
If required, the results table can be filtered by component code, information and control unit
using the filter function ( Item 3).
► Select the required cable number from the selection window.


17.11 Change in vehicle resolution in MAN-cats
Introduction If the vehicle resolution is changed while an MAN Diagnostic Assistant application is open, the
search result must be updated in order to obtain correct information/data. For this reason, the fol-
lowing message is displayed in the existing browser window: The vehicle resolution ( Fig. 17.46)
has changed. Refresh search.
Instructions
Fig. 17.46
► Click on the “Update search” button ( Item 1).

The display is updated as per the vehicle resolution.

18 l Control unit selection
Contents
18.1 Diagnostic memory..............................................................298
18.2 Identification........................................................................299
18.3 Flashing...............................................................................300
18.4 Repeat detection of control unit selection............................304
HMC600_0 Control unit selection 293

Introduction After selecting the architecture, it is possible to select control units (ECUs) directly in MAN-cats.
The “ECU” application allows control units that are not detected or are faulty to be manually se-
lected, diagnosed and/or flashed. If a control unit is not detected, information on the control unit
designation is required for selection of the desired control unit.
The “ECU” application is selected in the vehicle identification.
Instructions
Fig. 18.1
► Click on the button for the required vehicle architecture ( Item 1).

The selected vehicle architecture ( Fig. 18.2) opens.
Fig. 18.2
► Click on the “ECU” button ( Item 1).

The selection summary ( Fig. 18.3) opens.
294 Control unit selection HMC600_0

Fig. 18.3
► Confirm your selection with the “Confirm” button ( Item 2).

The “System navigation” application ( Fig. 18.4) starts.
Fig. 18.4
Navigation and selection of the corresponding control unit group, e.g. management computer, are
performed by selecting the corresponding menu items.

► Click on the menu Item for the required control unit ( Item 1).
The VCI selection opens.
► Confirm VCI selection.

Control units are determined and you are returned to the system navigation ( Fig. 18.6).
If the required control unit is not detected automatically, it is also possible to select the control
unit manually ( Fig. 18.5). The designation of the required control unit (e.g. CVM, PTM or FFR)
is needed for this.
Fig. 18.5
► Click on the corresponding entry ( Item 1) to mark the control unit type.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to continue.

Automatic detection of the control units is performed after selection of the required control unit
group. If a control unit is detected successfully, the system navigation opens again ( Fig. 18.6).
The available functions are now displayed below the selected control unit type.

Fig. 18.6
Various functions are available for the selected control unit. The type and number of available
functions depend on the selected control unit.
Possible functions:
Diagnostic memory ( Chapter “Diagnostic memory”)

Identification ( Chapter “Identification”)
Flash ( Chapter “Flashing”)
Repeat detection ( Chapter “Repeat detection of control unit selection”)
► The desired function is started by double-clicking on the corresponding menu Item ( Item 1).

18.1 Diagnostic memory
Introduction This function allows the diagnostic memory of the selected control unit to be read out. After the
read-out operation has been completed, a list is displayed with all diagnostic memory entries (if
present). This list includes the following information, for example: SPN code, designation, status
or priority of the diagnostic memory entries.
Instructions
Fig. 18.7
Detailed information on the diagnostic memory and descriptions of the individual buttons can be
found in  Chapter “Reading out diagnostic memory”.
► Click on the “Exit” button ( Item 1).

The “Diagnostic memory” application closes. This takes you back to the system navigation.

18.2 Identification
The “Control unit identification” function can be used to access detailed information on the select- Introduction
ed control unit. This includes the following information, for example: system designation, MAN
Item numbers, time stamps of parametrisation, manufacturer's software and version numbers, etc.
This information is sometimes used for subsequent work steps, e. g. flashing or parametrising the
control unit etc.
Instructions
Fig. 18.8
The scope of the available information depends on the control unit type and may vary corre-
spondingly.
► Click on the “Generates PDF report” button ( Item 1).

The displayed information is opened as a report (PDF file) and saved on the service computer.
The report can be accessed again via the vehicle-specific information portal
( Chapter “Vehicle-specific information portal”).

The control unit identification is terminated. This takes you back to the system navigation.

18.3 Flashing
Introduction The "Flashing" function can be used to change/modify the control unit software for the selected
control unit. The corresponding control unit software is selected via the control unit Item numbers
displayed in the list. Using the filter function, it is possible to restrict the displayed list to control unit
software versions (Item numbers) that match the vehicle. The vehicle data file of the corresponding
vehicle must be made available in order to use the filter function.
Instructions
Fig. 18.9
If the control unit Item number ( Item 1) cannot be read out by MAN-cats, it must be entered
manually.
The activated check box ( Item 2) allows a control unit to be restored after cancellation of the
flashing procedure by overwriting the control unit software (e.g. on-board computer for bus/
coach – ZBRO32).
The filter function ( Item 3) can be used to reduce the displayed list to control unit software
versions (Item numbers) that match the vehicle.
Colour scheme for control unit Item numbers (xx.xxxxx-7xxx) ( Item 4):
Colour coding Filter status Meaning
Green marking (dark) No filter Matching control unit Item number for the selected
control unit.
Green marking (light) With filter Matching control unit Item number for the selected
vehicle (via vehicle data file).
Blue marking With and without Selected control unit Item number.

filter

Colour coding Filter status Meaning
Red marking With filter Non-matching control unit Item number.
The required control unit Item number is selected by clicking in the corresponding row. The row
colour then changes from green or red to blue.
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 5) to discard the changes made. This takes you back to
the system navigation.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 6).

Flashing is started.

18.3.1 Filtering control unit software versions
Introduction In order to filter control unit software versions (Item numbers), a current vehicle data file must be
provided for the corresponding vehicle. The vehicle data file is provided by downloading it from the
server of MAN Truck & Bus SE. Information on the corresponding vehicle (vehicle type, 7-charac-
ter VIN) and an Internet connection are required in order to download the vehicle data file.
Instructions
Fig. 18.10
► The filter function can be activated with the “Filter” button ( Item 1).
After activation, the “Filter” button changes to the “Cancel filter” button.
► The function can be deactivated with the “Cancel filter” button ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Download vehicle data file” button ( Item 2) to start downloading the vehicle data
file.

Select vehicle type
Fig. 18.11
► If necessary, use the drop-down menu ( Item 1) to select the vehicle type.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to adopt the selection.
Enter vehicle identification number
Fig. 18.12
► Enter the 7-digit vehicle production number or engine number in the input field provided
( Item 1).

The selection is confirmed and the vehicle data file is downloaded.

18.4 Repeat detection of control unit selection
Introduction Automatic control unit detection can be repeated with the “Repeat detection” function. If no control
unit is detected again by the control unit detection function, the desired control unit can be selected
from the displayed list. Information about the target control unit is needed for this.
Selection of the wrong control unit type can lead to incorrect display or selection of a control unit
software version (Item numbers).
Instructions With the control unit detection function, MAN-cats automatically identifies the installed control unit
in the previously selected control unit group.
Fig. 18.13
If no control unit is detected by MAN-cats with the automatic control unit detection function, the
desired control unit type can be selected manually from the displayed list.
Fig. 18.14
► Click on the corresponding entry ( Item 1) to mark the control unit type.

Control unit detection ( Fig. 18.15) is continued.

Fig. 18.15
After control unit detection ( Item 1), the display changes to the system navigation ( Fig. 18.6).

19 l Vehicle-related diagnostics
Contents
19.1 Control unit detection...........................................................308
19.2 Input of vehicle number plate...............................................315
19.3 Repeating control unit detection..........................................316
19.4 Diagnostic memory of complete vehicle...............................318
19.5 Ordering a conversion data file (UDF)..................................325
19.6 Action/orders without vehicle...............................................326
19.7 Action/order with vehicle......................................................378
19.8 Programming.......................................................................408
19.9 Maintenance........................................................................446
19.10 Workshop routine.................................................................486
19.11 WWH OBD and OBD...........................................................500
19.12 Bus/coach body container....................................................516
HMC600_1 Vehicle-related diagnostics 307

19.1 Control unit detection
Introduction Control unit detection is performed in a large number of diagnostic applications. This function at-
tempts to establish a connection to all installed or affected control units in the vehicle. Automatic
control unit detection is performed by MAN-cats after the corresponding menu Item is called up. In
the event of a malfunction in control unit detection, this can be repeated either in dependence on
the application or manually.
Instructions The dialogue box for control unit detection is automatically closed at the end of the operation.
Example: Control unit detection for complete vehicle ( Fig. 19.1).
Fig. 19.1
► Click on the “Screenshot” button ( Item 1)to take a screenshot.
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 3)to abort control unit detection.
► The “Help” button ( Item 2) in the dialogue box for control unit detection is inoperative.
► The “Confirm” button ( Item 4) in the dialogue box for control unit detection is inoperative.
The function for repeating control unit detection can be found in

 Chapter “Repeating control unit detection” or in the system-related diagnosis within the navi-
gation menu of the corresponding control unit type.
308 Vehicle-related diagnostics HMC600_1

The system navigation of the TG1/TG2 and TG3 vehicle architectures is structured in different Introduction
ways, but the content is essentially the same. The TG3 system navigation has been optimised with
regard to actions with or without a vehicle. The two system navigations are shown below and the
content is listed in a table. Operation of both system navigations is the same due to the underlying
principle.
Fig. 19.2
Menu items of the vehicle-related diagnosis in the vehicle architecture TG1/TG2 are:
Diagnostic memory
Order without vehicle
Order with vehicle
Programming
Vehicle data administration
Trend data
Maintenance
Workshop routines
OBD
Circuit diagram (optional for buses/coaches – Lion4City and Lion’s City E)

Fig. 19.3
Menu items of the vehicle-related diagnosis in the vehicle architecture TG3 are:

Order with vehicle
The following entry-point graphics of the individual chapters have been taken from the
vehicle architecture of the TG3 vehicles. Here, it is recommended to use the following
 Chapter “System navigation for vehicle architecture TG1/TG2” as orientation in order to find
the desired menu Item in the system navigation.

System navigation for vehicle architecture TG1/TG2
Menu item Sub-menu item Section
Diagnostic memory
Read out  Chapter “Reading out diagnostic memory of complete
vehicle”
Delete  Chapter “Deleting diagnostic memory of complete vehicle”

Order, conversion data file  Chapter “Ordering conversion data file without vehicle”
Portable authorisation for key/  Chapter “Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser”

immobiliser
Order with vehicle
Order, conversion data file  Chapter “Ordering conversion data file with vehicle”
Checking the vehicle for conver-  Chapter “Checking the vehicle for outstanding conversion”
sions due
Portable authorisation for key/  Chapter “Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser”
immobiliser
Repeating detection  Chapter “Repeating control unit detection”
Programming
sions due
Vehicle conversion  Chapter “Vehicle conversion”
Delete key  Chapter “Deleting vehicle keys”
Control unit replacement with  Chapter “Control unit replacement”

vehicle data file from hard drive/
service memory
Program key  Chapter “Programming vehicle keys”
Status of immobiliser  Chapter “Status of immobiliser”
Customer-specific parameters  Chapter “Customer-specific parameters”
Version display  Chapter “Version display”
Contents of vehicle data file  Chapter “Contents of vehicle data file”
Vehicle data administration

Content, special approval  Chapter “Contents of special approval”
Conversion data file contents  Chapter “Contents of conversion data file”
Cancelling a conversion  Chapter “Cancelling a conversion”
Downloading conversion  Chapter “Downloading a conversion”
Download vehicle data file  Chapter “Download vehicle data file”
Importing vehicle data file  Chapter “Importing a vehicle data file”
Purging data  Chapter “Purging data”

Trend data
Vehicle trend data  Chapter “Vehicle trend data”
IUPR data  Chapter “Reading out IUPR data”
Parameter data, engine  Chapter “Parameter data for electronic systems”
Parameter data, management computer

Maintenance data memory log  Chapter “Maintenance data memory log”
Maintenance
Display current appointments  Chapter “Displaying current maintenance
appointments”
Confirming scheduled maintenance ap-  Chapter “Confirming maintenance appointments”
pointments
Configuration Adapting first registration  Chapter “Adapting the first registration”

date
Statutory inspections  Chapter “Entering statutory inspections”
Activate/deactivate com-  Chapter “Adapting the first registration”

ponents
Deactivating the mainte-  Chapter “Deactivating the maintenance system”
nance system
Activating the mainte-  Chapter “Activating the maintenance system”
nance system
Overview  Chapter “Overview”
Body container  Chapter “Bus/coach body container”
Workshop routines
Roller test Activate roller dynamome-  Chapter “Activating roller test bench mode”
bench mode ter mode
Deactivate roller dy-  Chapter “Deactivating roller test bench mode”
namometer mode
Request for units (5458SM)  Chapter “Request for units (5458SM)”
DPF information  Chapter “DPF information”
OBD Diagnostic memory  Chapter “Diagnostic memory”
Control unit identification  Chapter “Control unit identification”
System status  Chapter “System status”
System monitoring  Chapter “System monitoring”
Circuit diagram (optional for buses/  Chapter “Circuit diagram search engine”

coaches – Lion4City and Lion’s City E)

System navigation for vehicle architecture TG3
Action without vehicle

Conversion Purchase order  Chapter “Ordering conversion data file without vehicle”
data file
Download  Chapter “Downloading a conversion”
Cancel  Chapter “Cancelling a conversion”
Contents  Chapter “Contents of conversion data file”
Vehicle data Download  Chapter “Download vehicle data file”

file
Contents  Chapter “Contents of vehicle data file”
Import  Chapter “Importing a vehicle data file”
Content, special approval  Chapter “Contents of special approval”
Portable authorisation for key/im-  Chapter “Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser”

mobiliser
Circuit diagram search engine  Chapter “Circuit diagram search engine”
Purging data  Chapter “Purging data”
Action with vehicle

Diagnostic Read  Chapter “Reading out diagnostic memory of complete
memory vehicle”
Delete  Chapter “Deleting diagnostic memory of complete vehicle”
Purchase Order, conversion  Chapter “Control unit identification”

orders data file
Checking the vehi-  Chapter “Checking the vehicle for outstanding conversion”
cle for conversions
due
Portable authorisa-  Chapter “Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser”
tion for key/immobi-
liser
Downloading con-  Chapter “Downloading a conversion”
version
Programming
Vehicle conversion  Chapter “Vehicle conversion”
sions due
Control unit Data from hard drive  Chapter “Control unit replacement”
replacement
Download vehicle  Chapter “Download vehicle data file”
data file
Customer-specific parameters  Chapter “Customer-specific parameters”

Immobiliser Program key  Chapter “Programming vehicle keys”
Delete key  Chapter “Deleting vehicle keys”
Status  Chapter “Status of immobiliser”
Program remote  Chapter “Programming remote control keys”

control key
Maintenance
Display current appointments  Chapter “Displaying current maintenance appointments”
Confirming scheduled maintenance  Chapter “Confirming maintenance appointments”

appointments
Configure Adapting first regis-  Chapter “Adapting the first registration”

maintenance tration date
Statutory inspection  Chapter “Entering statutory inspections”
Activate/deactivate  Chapter “Adapting the first registration”

components
Deactivating the  Chapter “Deactivating the maintenance system”
maintenance system
Activating the main-  Chapter “Activating the maintenance system”
tenance system
Overview  Chapter “Overview”
Trend data
All control units in the vehicle  Chapter “Vehicle trend data”
Workshop routines
Roller test Activate roller test  Chapter “Activating roller test bench mode”
bench bench
Deactivate roller test  Chapter “Deactivating roller test bench mode”
bench
Request for units (5458SM)  Chapter “Request for units (5458SM)”
WWH OBD
Diagnostic memory  Chapter “Diagnostic memory”
Circuit diagram search engine  Chapter “Circuit diagram search engine”

19.2 Input of vehicle number plate
The vehicle number plate number is requested when a vehicle identification number is recognised Introduction
for the first time during a diagnostic session. The number plate is not requested again when con-
tinuing a paused diagnostic session. MAN-cats permanently assigns the number plate that was
entered to a vehicle identification number. MAN-cats only saves the entered vehicle number plate
on the service computer. It is not synchronised with the MAN server or another service computer.
Instructions
Fig. 19.4
► Enter the number plate in the input field ( Item 1) and continue with the “Confirm” button
( Item 3).
or
► Cancel number plate input with the “Skip” button ( Item 2).

19.3 Repeating control unit detection
Introduction If automatic control unit detection fails in the first work step for unknown reasons, it is possible
to repeat automatic detection of all control units in the vehicle by double-clicking on the menu
Item “Repeat detection”.
Instructions The control unit detection function can be found under the sub-menu Item “Various applications/
functions” in the system navigation.
Fig. 19.5
Figure ( Fig. 19.5) serves as an example.
► Double-click on the “Repeat detection” menu Item ( Item 1).
The application ( Fig. 19.6) starts.
The “Control unit detection” function was started and read-out of the control units is being pre-
pared.

Fig. 19.6
The information of all available control units is read out again as part of control unit detection.
Fig. 19.7
► If necessary, click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 1).

The “Repeat detection” application is cancelled. This takes you back to the system navigation.

19.4 Diagnostic memory of complete vehicle
Introduction This application is used to automatically read out or delete the diagnostic memories of all diagnos-
able control units that are installed in the vehicle as part of a routine.
Instructions This application/function can be found as follows:
Vehicle architecture System navigation Menu item
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Diagnostic memory
TG3 Action with vehicle Diagnostic memory ( Fig. 19.8)
Fig. 19.8
► Click on the “Action with vehicle” menu item.

In the next work step, all control units installed in the vehicle are detected automatically ( Fig. 19.9).
In most cases, control unit detection is based on the corresponding vehicle architecture and model
selection.
Fig. 19.9

Following control unit detection, the menu Item “Diagnostic memory” is displayed.
Fig. 19.10
► Click on the “Diagnostic memory” menu Item ( Item 1).

The “Diagnostic memory” menu Item is expanded ( Fig. 19.11).
Fig. 19.11
► Double-click on the desired menu Item “Read out” or “Delete” ( Item 1) to open the corre-
sponding function.

19.4.1 Reading out diagnostic memory of complete vehicle
Introduction After all diagnostic memories have been read out, the current status is shown for all detected con-
trol units. Any undetected control units are shown as inactive (dark grey). All detected control units
are marked in colour according to their respective status.
Overview
Fig. 19.12
Colour scheme of the control unit overview:
Colour coding Meaning
Green marking (light) Control unit detection not yet carried out.
Grey marking (dark) Control unit not detected.
Green marking Control unit detected, no diagnostic memory entries present.
Yellow highlighting Control unit detected, passive diagnostic memory entries present.
Red marking Control unit detected, active diagnostic memory entries present.
Blue marking Unknown control unit variant.
White background (no Control unit not present for current vehicle selection.
coloured marking)
By clicking on one of the colour-highlighted control unit tiles, you can either display the diagnos-
tic memory of the corresponding control unit or switch to the navigation menu of the correspond-
ing control unit directory. The button provided for this purpose ( Item 1) for switching between
the two options is located in the application-specific toolbar. The currently activated option (but-
ton) is always shown here.

Button Designation Explanation
Read out com- Read out the diagnostic memory again (without first deleting the
plete diagnostic diagnostic memory).
memory
Delete complete All existing diagnostic memory entries are deleted and the de-
diagnostic mem- tected control units are read out again.
ory and read it
out again
Start subse- Detection of all control units is performed again and the diagnos-
quent identifi- tic memories are then read out again.
cation of uni-
dentified control
units and read
out diagnostic
memory
Switches to Switches the diagnostic memory view to table form
the “Diagnostic ( Chapter “Reading out diagnostic memory of complete
memory of com- vehicle”).
plete vehicle”
view
Change display Switches the display of the control unit overview from compact
to detailed. Option for displaying additional information such as
Item numbers or the number of existing diagnostic memory en-
tries for the detected control units.
Generates PDF Generates a PDF report and displays it in the document viewer.
report Report for calibration, maintenance, diagnostic memory of com-
plete vehicle.
The diagnostic memory log generated via the “Generates PDF report” button is automatically
saved on the service computer and can be accessed at any time in the vehicle-specific informa-
tion portal ( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”) or at the following storage location:
Drive C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats) > MAN-cats > Brand (e.g. MAN) > VIN (e.g.
WMA06xxxxxxxxxxxxx) > DiagnosticMemory
Call up naviga- Display for “Call up control unit directory in navigation tree” after
tion tree/control clicking on a “control unit tile”. Changes to the “Call up diagnos-
unit tic memory/control unit” button.
Call up diagnos- Display for “Call up control unit diagnostic memory” after clicking
tic memory/con- on a “control unit tile”. Changes to the “Call up navigation tree/
trol unit control unit” button.
Read out the Read out OBDU diagnostic memory.

OBDU diagnos- (Button available only for vehicles with OBDU diagnostic mem-
tic memory ory)

The diagnostic memory log generated via the “Read out OBDU diagnostic memory” button is au-
tomatically saved on the service computer and can be accessed at any time in the vehicle-spe-
cific information portal ( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”) or at the following storage
location:
Button Designation Explanation
Stop End the read-out operation of the diagnostic memories premature-

ly.
Output The “Diagnostic memory” application is ended.

19.4.2 Detailed view of diagnostic memory of complete vehicle
All diagnostic memory entries are listed in a table in the detailed view (table form) of the diagnostic Introduction
memory of complete vehicle. Information is displayed here on the status of the individual diagnos-
tic memory entries.
Overview
Fig. 19.13
Item Description
1 Control unit designation

2 SPN code
3 Designation of the diagnostic memory entry
4 Status of the diagnostic memory entry
5 Indicates the availability of further documentation
6 Frequency of occurrence in the diagnostic memory
7 Occurrence at mileage
8 1st timestamp
Clicking on one of the displayed diagnostic memory entries marks this entry, highlights it in col-
our and makes it available for further actions (optional).
► If necessary, click on the “Additional documentation” button ( Item 9) to call up the available
detailed information and instructions for the marked diagnostic memory entry.

19.4.3 Deleting diagnostic memory of complete vehicle
Introduction The function “Delete diagnostic memory” allows all diagnostic memories of the diagnosable control
units installed in the vehicle to be deleted in one operation.
Vehicle architecture System navigation Menu item Sub-menu item
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Diagnostic memory Delete
TG3 Action with vehicle Diagnostic memory Delete ( Fig. 19.14)
Fig. 19.14
► Double-click on the “Delete” menu item.

The “Ignition cycle” dialogue box only opens in the TG1/TG2 vehicle architecture.
► Follow the instructions in the “Ignition cycle” dialogue box.

When the function is called up, all diagnostic memories in the vehicle are automatically deleted,
the diagnostic memories checked and a diagnostic memory log (PDF document) produced.
The diagnostic memory log is automatically saved on the service computer and can be accessed
at any time on the vehicle-specific information portal ( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”)
or at the following storage location:

19.5 Ordering a conversion data file (UDF)
A so-called conversion data file (UDF) must be requested as part of a conversion in addition to Introduction
the replacement of any required components. As part of this process, all parameters required for
conversion are checked in the current vehicle data file (FDF) and adapted if necessary.
The MAN-cats diagnostic software allows you to order the required conversion data file from within
a diagnostic session. After the ordering process has been completed, the new conversion data file
can be loaded onto the MAN-cats service computer and the conversion can be performed.
Conversion data files can be ordered in two different ways:
Orders without vehicle ( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”)

Orders with vehicle ( Chapter “Action/order with vehicle”)
Information on the subject of vehicle parametrisation and MAN Genuine Software is also avail-
able on the MAN After Sales Portal in the section “Information > MAN Genuine Software and
vehicle parametrisation”.
The two options for ordering a conversion data file differ with respect to the data provision meth-
od for the vehicle data file and vehicle identification. More detailed information can be found in
( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”) and ( Chapter “Action/order with vehicle”).
The following conditions must be met before you can order a conversion data file:
A current vehicle data file has been provided (from the vehicle or MAN server).
An update of the control files on the service computer has been performed
( Chapter “Updating MAN-cats control files”).
A MAN-cats technician SmartCard with valid runtime rights package is available
( Chapter “Control unit detection”).
The technician SmartCard must not be removed from the SmartCard read/write device during
the entire process.
There is a connection between the MAN-cats service computer and the server of MAN Truck &
Bus SE.
There must be no outstanding conversion for the selected vehicle on the server.

19.6 Action/orders without vehicle
Introduction The application “Actions/Orders without vehicle” allows a data file (conversion and vehicle data
file) and/or an authorisation to be ordered without connection to the vehicle. Since it is not possible
to read out the required vehicle data file from the management computer when the conversion data
file is ordered without a connection to the vehicle, the data must be provided via download from
the MAN server. For this, you require the vehicle production number (7-digit) of the desired vehicle
for vehicle identification.
In the event of a malfunction during ordering, you will be provided with corresponding information
with possible fault causes and/or instructions.
19.6.1 Ordering conversion data file without vehicle

TG1/TG2 Order without vehicle Order, conversion data file
TG3 Action without vehicle Conversion data file ( Fig. 19.15)
Fig. 19.15
► Double-click on the “Order” menu Item ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.16
► Enter the corresponding vehicle production number (7-digit) in the input field provided
( Item 1).

The vehicle data download ( Fig. 19.17) starts.
► The operation can be cancelled with the “Cancel” button ( Item 2).

Next, the current vehicle data file is provided in the form of a download from the MAN server. It is
also checked whether there is an outstanding conversion on the MAN server.
Fig. 19.17

A connection to the server of MAN Truck & Bus SE is required in order to download the vehicle
data file.
After the vehicle data file has been provided successfully, an overview of all available options of
the conversion data file order is displayed ( Fig. 19.18).
Fig. 19.18
► Select the corresponding row ( Item 1) with the desired option.

Multiple selection of the offered options is possible.

In the case of multiple selection, the selected options are executed in succession.

This takes you back to the system navigation.
Overview of the individual options of a conversion data file order:
Action Description
Control unit replacement Replacement of control units that do not have an identical
Item number.
Order MAN Genuine Software Adding or removing additional software packages (MAN Gen-
uine Software).
Special actions Ordering of possible special campaigns within the scope of
MAN guidelines.
Vehicle parameter update Update the vehicle data file.
All the individual work steps of the ordering process for a conversion data file are described be-
low. The number of work steps depends on the selection made.

Request control unit replacement
It is possible to request replacement of control units that do not have identical Item numbers with Overview
the “Control unit replacement” option. An example representation of the user interface is provided
below.
Fig. 19.19
Item Designation Explanation
1 Navigation menu All control unit groups for the current vehicle configuration
(vehicle data file) are listed in the navigation menu.
2 Selection menu The Item number of the installed control unit (source control
unit) and the Item numbers of the possible replacement con-
trol units (target control units) are displayed in the selection
menu. A possible flash compatibility of the replacement con-
trol units is also shown.
3 Change display A list of all changes adopted from the selection menu is dis-
played in the overview. Information such as control unit group
and the Item numbers of the replacement control units (target
control units) is also shown.
4 Display of flash Indicates the flash compatibility of a replacement control unit
compatibility (target control unit). This indication means that the replace-
ment control unit (target control unit) will be produced on the
basis of the existing installed hardware (source control unit)
as part of a subsequent flash process.

Instructions
Fig. 19.20
► Mark the desired control unit group by selection in the “ECU” navigation menu Item ( Item 1).
► Mark the desired replacement control unit (target control unit) by selecting the corresponding
Item number ( Item 2).
► If necessary, click on the “Flash” button ( Item 3).

The “Overview of available flash sources” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.21) opens.
In the overview of the available flash sources, the Item numbers of the possible replace-
ment control units (target control units) are displayed on the left side of the screen ( Item 1;
 Fig. 19.21).
All Item numbers of the source control units that are flash-compatible with the desired replace-
ment control unit (target control unit) are displayed on the right-hand side of the screen ( Item 2;
 Fig. 19.21).
This means that the desired target control unit (left side of the screen) can be produced as part of
a flash process from the control unit Item numbers (hardware) listed on the right side of the screen.

Fig. 19.21

The dialogue box “Overview of available flash sources” is closed, the settings for the ordering
procedure “Control unit replacement” are adopted and the next work step for the conversion
data file order ( Fig. 19.22) is carried out.
Fig. 19.22
► Click on the “Adopts the marked signals” button ( Item 1).

The desired replacement control unit is transferred to the “Selected ECU” area ( Item 2).
► If necessary, mark the replacement control unit to be deleted ( Item 2) and click on the “Delete
selection” button ( Item 3).
The relevant replacement control unit is removed.

► If necessary, click on the “Reset order” button ( Item 4).
All changes made are discarded and you are taken to the overview of order options for a con-
version data file.

The “Ordering a conversion data file” process is cancelled. You are returned to the “Vehicle”
navigation menu.

The settings for the “Control unit replacement” ordering procedure are adopted and you are
taken to the next work step in  Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file”.

Order MAN Genuine Software
Software packages for the different vehicle systems can be ordered by means of the “Order MAN Introduction
Genuine Software” option. An example representation of the user interface is provided below.
Overview
Fig. 19.23
1 Navigation menu The navigation menu shows an overview of all available MAN Genu-
ine Software packages. The possible software packages for this ve-
hicle configuration are shown in the respective sub-items.
2 Selection menu The software package used in the vehicle and the software packages
available for ordering are displayed in the selection menu. In addition,
the possible options that can be performed for the currently used
software package are displayed, e.g. replace software package or
remove software package.
3 Selected soft- A list of all changes adopted from the selection menu is displayed in
ware packages the change display area.
Information such as package designation, Item number, selected op-
tion and price information, if available, is also provided.

Instructions ► Mark the desired MAN Genuine software package by selecting the corresponding designation
in the navigation menu ( Item 1).
► Depending on the MAN Genuine software package, mark in the selection menu ( Item 2) by
selecting the designations of the current software package (current status) and the new option
(selection).
► Click on the “Transfers the marked signals to the selection window” button ( Item 5).
The desired MAN Genuine software is transferred to the “Selected software packages” area
( Item 3).
► Click on the “Search” button ( Item 4).

The “Search for software packages by Item number” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.24) opens. Using
an available Item number, the dialogue box provides the option of determining the designation
of the MAN Genuine software package and the associated storage location in the navigation
menu.
Fig. 19.24
► Enter the Item number of the MAN Genuine software package in the input field ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Search” button ( Item 2) to start the search.

You will then be provided with details on the Item number, such as storage location (e.g. PTO),
article designation and information on the MAN Genuine Software package, etc.

The “Search for software packages by Item number” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.25) is closed.

Fig. 19.25
► If necessary, mark the MAN Genuine software package to be deleted ( Item 1) and click on
the “Delete selection” button ( Item 2).
The MAN Genuine software package in question will be removed.

version data file.

navigation menu.

The settings for the “MAN Software” ordering process are applied and the next work step
 Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file” is opened.

Order MAN special actions
Introduction Online ordering for special actions (Technical Information sheet, TI) can be performed under the
option “Special actions”. Before the start of the actual ordering process, it is necessary to confirm
a liability disclaimer.
Instructions
Fig. 19.26
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to confirm the message.

The availability of special actions depends on the current vehicle configuration. An example rep-
resentation of the user interface is provided below.
Fig. 19.27

1 Navigation menu The different information types for special actions are listed in
the navigation menu (e.g. If required, In the case of repair, etc.).
The available special actions are contained in the corresponding
sub-items.
2 Selection menu A description and where applicable information on the selected
special action are displayed in the selection menu.
3 Selected special A list of all changes adopted from the selection menu is displayed
action in the change display area (e.g. TI number, Item number)
► Mark the desired special action by selecting the corresponding designation in the navigation
menu ( Item 1).
The desired special action is transferred to the “Selected special action” area ( Item 3).
► If necessary, mark the special action to be deleted ( Item 2) and click on the “Delete selection”
button ( Item 4).
The desired special action is removed.

version data file.

navigation menu.

The settings for the ordering procedure for special actions are applied and the next work step
 Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file” is opened.

Ordering vehicle parameter update
Introduction It is possible to order an update of the vehicle data file with the “Vehicle parameter update” option.
The date of the last update is also displayed. The vehicle parameters are updated to the current
status with this application. An example representation of the user interface is provided below.
Instructions
Fig. 19.28
A vehicle parameter update is performed automatically when a conversion data file is ordered for
a control unit replacement, special action or MAN Genuine software. In this case, a correspond-
ing message is displayed and this work step is skipped.
► Click on the desired action ( Item 1) and mark it.

version data file.

navigation menu.

The settings for the ordering procedure for a vehicle parameter update are applied and the next
work step  Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file” is opened.

Ordering a conversion data file
An order overview is displayed after confirmation of all adopted changes. Information is displayed Introduction
here such as article designation, Item numbers, price information and the order date.
Instructions
Fig. 19.29
► If necessary, mark the conversion data file to be deleted ( Item 1) and click on the “Delete

version data file.

The “Order conversion data file” process is cancelled. You are returned to the “Vehicle” navi-
gation menu.

The order overview “Order conversion data file” is confirmed and the order placed.

The order for the conversion data file is sent to the MAN server in the next work step.
Fig. 19.30
The sent order is then checked and processed.
Fig. 19.31
No user interaction is necessary during checking and generation of the conversion data file. The
process can take some time.
During generation of the conversion, it is possible to exit the ordering procedure at this point and
to continue working with MAN-cats if required. The conversion is generated automatically on the
MAN server and can be downloaded at a later time.

The “Order conversion data file” process ( Fig. 19.33) is cancelled.
If applicable, observe the following on-screen instructions with the offered options in order to finally
end the ordering procedure.
After the ordering process has been completed, a message about the ordered conversion
( Fig. 19.33) is displayed. This may contain the following information:
Price information
Generation time of the ordered conversion
Information on invoicing or the purchase transaction
Fig. 19.32

Cancelling conversion data file
Fig. 19.33
The ordering procedure is now completed. At this point, it is possible to immediately download or
cancel the ordered conversion.
► Mark the desired option ( Item 1) by selecting it.
► Select the “Confirm” button ( Item 3) to confirm the desired option.
Each ordered conversion can only be downloaded once. The conversion can only be performed
with the MAN-cats service computer on which the ordered conversion was downloaded and
saved.

gation menu.
Ordered but not downloaded conversions are automatically cancelled and removed from the
MAN server after 24 hours.
This time window does not apply to conversions provided by the MAN Corporate Center, i.e. via
MANTED.
As soon as the conversion data file is available on the service computer, the actual vehicle conver-
sion can be carried out ( Chapter “Action/order with vehicle”).

19.6.2 Downloading a conversion
The “Download conversion” application is needed to download a previously ordered conversion Introduction
located on the MAN server to the service computer. Certain requirements must be met for this.
Preconditions for downloading conversions:
Order process Conversion status Framework conditions
The conversion was Ordered and generated The workshop identification (WID)
ordered using MAN-cats same as for order; conversion has not
and is automatically gen- been downloaded
erated on the MAN server
in a background process.
Conversion was ordered Ordered, generated, pur- The conversion was not downloaded.
using MAN-cats and the chase completed on ASP
order paid for on the After and conversion released
Sales Portal (ASP).
The conversion was Ordered and generated The conversion was not downloaded.
ordered by request for
vehicle parametrisation.
Conversions may be downloaded only by authorised personnel.
For safety reasons, downloaded conversions must not be transferred between different
MAN-cats systems.
A connection is required between the MAN-cats service computer and MAN server in order to
download a conversion.
Conversions that are not downloaded are automatically cancelled after 24 hours. Automatic can-
cellation refers exclusively to conversions ordered via MAN-cats service computers and does not
apply to conversions ordered via MAN Corporate Center, i.e. via MANTED.
A connection is required between the MAN-cats service computer and the MAN server in order to
check for available conversions and for downloading.
This application/function can be found as follows: Instructions
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data ad- Downloading conversion

ministration
TG3 Action without vehicle Conversion data Download ( Fig. 19.34)
file

Fig. 19.34
► Double-click on the “Download” menu Item ( Item 1).

Vehicle identification takes place in the next step. Input of the vehicle production number is neces-
sary for the purpose of vehicle identification.
Fig. 19.35
( Item 1).

A check is then performed for available conversions on the MAN server ( Fig. 19.36).

The “Download conversion” application is cancelled. This takes you back to the system navi-
gation.
After completion of the check you will be provided with information on whether a conversion is
available on the MAN server.
Fig. 19.36
► Select the corresponding row ( Item 1) to change the default setting to “Load conversion from
server” if required.
The selection is marked by a colour background (blue).

The “Load conversion from server” process ( Fig. 19.37) starts or the conversion is cancelled
if required.

The application is shutting down. This takes you back to the system navigation.
In the next work step, detailed information on the available conversion is displayed.
For each download, a price check for the ordered conversion takes place on the MAN server.

Fig. 19.37
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to finally download the conversion.


Fig. 19.38
Corresponding information is then displayed with respect to successful provision of the conversion.
Fig. 19.39
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to end the application.

19.6.3 Cancelling a conversion
Introduction The “Cancel conversion” application allows you to cancel a conversion data file that was ordered
with MAN-cats.
A conversion ordered via MAN Corporate Center, i.e. via MANTED, cannot be cancelled via
MAN-cats. Such an order is cancelled in the same way via MAN Corporate Center, i.e. via MAN-
TED.
The following must be observed for cancellation with MAN-cats:

Cancellation of a conversion of own workshop:
The conversion was ordered but has not yet been downloaded. Cancellation is possible via all
service computers in the workshop.
The conversion has already been downloaded onto a service computer in your workshop and
not yet been performed. The conversion can only be cancelled with the service computer on
which the conversion has been saved.
The employee has the same workshop identification (WID), see SmartCard, which was also
used to order the conversion.
Cancellation of a conversion of a third-party workshop:
The affected vehicle is in your workshop and you have access to it.
A connection can be set up to the vehicle and in parallel to the MAN server using MAN-cats.
The conversion in question has not yet been performed and is still on the MAN server.
Cancellation of a conversion can lead to cancellation of the complete order.
The individual instructions and work steps differ depending on whether the conversion data file is
on the service computer or the MAN server.
In all cases, observe any notification windows, user interactions and instructions.
The “Cancel conversion” application will be described here by way of example for the application
case: conversion data file on the service computer.
check for available conversions and/or to cancel conversions.

TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data Cancelling a conversion

administration
TG3 Action without vehicle Conversion data Cancel ( Fig. 19.40)
file
Fig. 19.40
► Double-click on the “Cancel” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.41

( Item 1).

A check is then performed for available conversions on the service computer and the MAN
server ( Fig. 19.42).

After completion of the check you will be provided with information on whether and where (service
computer or MAN server) conversions are available.
Fig. 19.42
► Select the corresponding row ( Item 1) to change the default setting for “Cancel conversion”
if required.

The cancellation process ( Fig. 19.43) or the selected option starts.

After this, you will be informed that in the next step the conversion data file will be irrevocably de-
leted on both the service computer and on the MAN server. If the order was placed using a credit
card, the corresponding purchase transaction will also be cancelled.

Fig. 19.43
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to finally cancel the conversion.

You will receive corresponding status messages when the conversion is cancelled.
Fig. 19.44

When the cancellation is complete, corresponding feedback is displayed. It is also possible to or-
der a new conversion data file for your vehicle.
Fig. 19.45
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to open the application for ordering a conversion data
file.
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 1).


19.6.4 Contents of conversion data file
The “Contents of conversion data file” application allows the information contained in the conver- Introduction
sion data file to be displayed.
In order to display all the content of the conversion data file, this should be available on the service
computer. If this is not yet the case, it is possible to download the conversion data file as part of this
application. The download process is user-prompted. It may be necessary to restart the “Contents
of conversion data file” application afterwards.
A further option is to provide the conversion data file via the “Download conversion” application
( Chapter “Downloading a conversion”).
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data administration Conversion data

file contents
TG3 Action without vehicle Special approval contents -
( Fig. 19.46)
Fig. 19.46
► Double-click on the menu Item “Contents of conversion data file” ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.47
( Item 1).

A check is run to determine whether the conversion data file being searched for already exists
on the service computer ( Fig. 19.48). If this is not the case, it is possible to download the
conversion data file ( Chapter “Ordering conversion data file without vehicle”). The applica-
tion ( Chapter “Contents of conversion data file”) must then be restarted.
A connection to the MAN server is required to download the conversion data file.

The “Contents of conversion data file” application is closed. This takes you back to the system
navigation.

If the conversion data file is available on the service computer, the contents of the conversion data
file are shown.
Fig. 19.48
Navigation within the conversion data file application is performed by selecting the node (  Item 1)
of the desired menu Item or double-clicking on the corresponding menu Item ( Item 2).
Information from the vehicle data file is displayed in the lowest level ( Item 3) of the open menu
item.
► If necessary, click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 4) to cancel the vehicle conversion.
► Click on the "Conversion” button ( Item 5) to perform the vehicle conversion.
► If necessary, click on the “Download vehicle data” button ( Item 6) to download the vehicle
data file again or to obtain a current version.
► Select the corresponding row with the desired option.



19.6.5 Download vehicle data file
Introduction The “Download vehicle data file” application allows the current vehicle data file for the correspond-
ing vehicle to be downloaded from the MAN server.
The vehicle data file is needed in the following cases, for example:
In the event of a control unit replacement with vehicle data file from the hard drive.
If the vehicle data file can no longer be read out of the service memory of the vehicle manage-
ment computer with MAN-cats.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data ad- Download vehicle data file

ministration
TG3 Action without vehicle Vehicle data file Download
( Fig. 19.49)
Fig. 19.49
► Double-click on the “Download vehicle data file” menu Item ( Item 1).

download the vehicle data file.

Fig. 19.50
( Item 1).

A check is then performed for available conversions on the service computer and the MAN
server ( Fig. 19.51).

Corresponding status messages will be shown during the download of the vehicle data file from
the MAN server.

Fig. 19.51
Corresponding information is then displayed with respect to successful provision of the vehicle
data file.
Fig. 19.52

The application is shutting down.
If a malfunction should occur during downloading of the vehicle data file, this may be due to the
fact that the vehicle data file has not been archived on the MAN server. Contact your national
company/importer.

19.6.6 Contents of vehicle data file
The “Contents of vehicle data file” application allows the vehicle data file to be read out of the ser- Introduction
vice memory of the vehicle management computer in order to then view the information contained
in the file.
Contents of vehicle data file: Overview
Category Contents
Vehicle information Vehicle identification number, vehicle type, planning period, engine type,
vehicle data file version, last conversion, etc.
Circuit diagrams List of all electrical circuit diagrams with Item number and designation
(German only) for the current vehicle (delivery status)
Control units All control units installed in the vehicle, including additional information
Functions All parametrised functions in the vehicle with Item number and designation
(German only)
Software packages All parametrised MAN Genuine software in the vehicle with Item number
and designation (German only)
Special actions per- Contains a list of all special actions already performed on this vehicle.
formed
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data adminis- Contents of vehicle

tration data file
TG3 Action without vehicle Vehicle data file Contents
( Fig. 19.53)
An online connection to the MAN server is required for provision of the vehicle data file.
Fig. 19.53

► Double-click on the “Contents of vehicle data file” menu Item ( Item 1).
Fig. 19.54
( Item 1).

The vehicle production number is used to check whether the relevant vehicle data file is already
present on the service computer ( Fig. 19.55). The vehicle data file may possibly have been
made available as part of another application within the current diagnostic session.

The “Contents of vehicle data file” application closes. This takes you back to the system navi-
gation.

Fig. 19.55
Navigation within the vehicle data file application is performed by selecting the node (  Item 1)
of the desired menu Item or by double-clicking on the corresponding menu Item ( Item 2).
item.
► Extract the corresponding information.

gation.

19.6.7 Importing a vehicle data file
Introduction The “Import vehicle data file” application allows vehicle data files which cannot be provided via the
MAN server to be imported onto the MAN-cats service computer. In this specific case, the vehicle
data files are provided by means of an external data medium such as a USB data storage device.
This application is intended and visible for specific user groups with corresponding rights.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data adminis- Importing vehicle data

tration file
TG3 Action without vehicle Vehicle data file Import ( Fig. 19.56)
The application can also be opened in vehicle identification

( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”) via the architecture/model/application selection “VDF/
UDF”.
Fig. 19.56
► Double-click on the “Import vehicle data file” menu Item ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.57
( Item 1).
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 3) to confirm the input.

The “Selection of the vehicle data file to be imported” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.58) opens.


Fig. 19.58
► Select the provided and encrypted vehicle data file (*.ENC) in the corresponding storage loca-
tion ( Item 1).

The vehicle data file is imported ( Fig. 19.59).
Feedback on successful import of the vehicle data file.
Fig. 19.59

The vehicle data file is now available in all relevant applications.

19.6.8 Contents of special approval
This application makes data files available for specific applications. The data files are provided for Introduction
specific purposes and in consultation with the technical support of MAN Truck & Bus SE.
If no data files are available, general information is displayed when the application is opened.
In all other cases, observe any notification windows, user interactions and instructions.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data administration Content, special

approval
TG3 Action without vehicle Special approval contents -
( Fig. 19.60)
Fig. 19.60
► Double-click on the “Contents of special approval” menu Item ( Item 1).


There is no specific data file for vehicle parametrisation available.
Fig. 19.61
► If vehicle data files are available, click on the “Download vehicle data file” button ( Item 1)
( Chapter “Download vehicle data file”).


19.6.9 Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser
When performing vehicle repairs, there are applications, e.g. activation of anti-theft protection (im- Introduction
mobiliser - WSP) or programming vehicle keys, which require a special authorisation (certificate)
and an existing connection to the MAN server when they are performed.
Since these tasks may also have to be performed when there is no Internet connection, a function
is provided in MAN-cats which allows a “portable” authorisation.
The authorisation (certificate) must be downloaded during an existing Internet connection to the
MAN server.
The validity of this authorisation is limited in time.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Order without vehicle Portable authorisation

for key/immobiliser
TG3 Action without ve- Portable authorisa- -
hicle tion for key/immobiliser
( Fig. 19.62)
Fig. 19.62
Application cases for using portable authorisation:
Replacement of the vehicle management computer

Replacement of the engine control unit
Activation of anti-theft protection on vehicles with immobiliser (WSP) after replacement of the
vehicle management computer and/or engine control unit
MAN-cats has no Internet connection to the MAN server (offline mode).

A connection to the MAN server is required in order to download the authorisation (certificate).
► Double-click on the “Key/immobiliser portable authorisation” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.63
► Enter the corresponding vehicle production number (7-digit) in the input field provided ( Item 1).

Password activation ( Fig. 19.64) is requested.


Fig. 19.64
Fig. 19.65
Finally, the authorisation (password activation) is downloaded from the MAN server for the corre-
sponding vehicle and stored on the service computer.
The period of validity is currently 3 days.


19.6.10 Circuit diagram search engine
Introduction The circuit diagram search engine enables access to circuit diagrams of specific components in-
stalled in a vehicle. It is possible to select up to two components simultaneously and display them
together as a circuit diagram, provided there is a technical connection.
Access to vehicle circuit diagrams using MAN-cats is available for vehicles from vehicle architec-
ture TG3 and for buses/coaches Lion4City (from model year 2020) and Lion’s City E. More will
follow.
TG1/TG2 - -
TG3 Action without vehicle Circuit diagram search engine ( Fig. 19.66)
Fig. 19.66
► Double-click on the “Circuit diagram search engine” menu Item ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.67
► Enter the vehicle production number (7-digit) in the input field ( Item 1).

The vehicle data file ( Fig. 19.68) will be downloaded.
Fig. 19.68

The circuit diagram selection ( Fig. 19.69) opens.

Fig. 19.69
1 Available component Short designation of the corresponding components.

2 Description Designation of components.
3 Component search Opens the search field in the footer of the left half of the
window for a component search.
4 Selected components Short designation of the selected components.
5 Description Designation of the selected components.
► Mark the required component(s) (maximum of two components simultaneously ( Item 6).
► Click on the “Transfers the marked signals to the selection window” button (  Item 7).
The required components are transferred to the “Selected components” area ( Item 1;
 Fig. 19.70).

Fig. 19.70
Removing a component:
► Mark the corresponding component ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Removes all marked signals from the selection window” button ( Item 2).
The selected component ( Item 1) is removed.
Removing all components:
► Click on the “Removes all signals from the selection window” button ( Item 3).
All components ( Item 1) are removed.
► Click on the “Circuit diagram” button ( Item 3).

The circuit diagram ( Fig. 19.71) for the selected components opens.

Fig. 19.71
Operation of the circuit diagram function is described in  Chapter “Interactive circuit diagram”
► Click on the “Back” button.

The circuit diagram is closed.
► Click on the “Exit” button ( Item 4;  Fig. 19.70).


19.6.11 Purging data
When working with MAN-cats, a large quantity of service data (e.g. diagnostic memory entries, Introduction
vehicle configuration and invoicing data, etc.) is produced which has to be transmitted to various
MAN servers at the end of a diagnostic session (purged).
This data purging normally takes place directly at the end of a diagnostic session. If this is not pos-
sible for certain reasons, e.g. if the MAN-cats system is required immediately for the next session
or if the system is used in the field at the customer’s premises etc., this service data is temporarily
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Vehicle data adminis- Purging data

tration
TG3 Action without vehicle Vehicle data file Purging data
( Fig. 19.72)
The “Purge data” application is provided so that this stored service data can be transmitted
(purged) as quickly and easily as possible.
A connection to the MAN server is required for transmission (purging) of service data.
Fig. 19.72
► Double-click on the “Purge data” menu Item ( Item 1).


An overview with all service data that will be transferred to the MAN server is provided below.
Fig. 19.73
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to start transmission of the service data ( Fig. 19.74).

A connection is then established to the MAN server and the service data is transmitted.
Fig. 19.74

An overview with corresponding status information will be displayed when all service data has
been transmitted to the MAN server.
Fig. 19.75
Designation Description
Status Status information data:

Data available for purging.
Data is being purged.
Data successfully purged.
► The “Generate PDF report” button ( Item 1) creates a log (PDF document) in which all trans-
mitted service data is listed in detail.

A further option for transmitting (purging) the temporarily stored service data can be found in the
vehicle identification area ( Chapter “Purging data”).

19.7 Action/order with vehicle
Introduction Among other things, the “Action/Order with vehicle” application allows a conversion data file to be
ordered and provides further functions in conjunction with a vehicle. The vehicle data file is provid-
ed by reading out the vehicle management computer. A connection between the MAN-cats service
computer and vehicle to be converted is therefore required. In addition, reading out of the vehicle
management computer must be guaranteed.
In the event of a malfunction during conversion, you will be provided with corresponding informa-
tion with possible fault causes and/or instructions.
19.7.1 Ordering conversion data file with vehicle

TG1/TG2 Vehicle Order with vehicle
TG3 Action with vehicle Orders ( Fig. 19.76)
Fig. 19.76
► Click on the “Order(s) with vehicle” button ( Item 1).

The sub-menu ( Fig. 19.77) opens.

Fig. 19.77
► Double-click on the menu Item “Order conversion data file” ( Item 1).

Vehicle identification by reading out the vehicle management computer takes place in the next work
step. For this, a message window with the necessary conditions for the order must be confirmed.
A connection to the MAN server is necessary for checking the read-out vehicle data with respect
to possible existing conversions.
Fig. 19.78

The read-out operation ( Fig. 19.8) starts.

The read-out of the vehicle management computer takes place without any user interaction.
Fig. 19.79
If reading out the vehicle management computer is not possible, the order process must be cancelled
and a conversion data file without vehicle must be ordered ( Chapter “Action/orders without vehicle”).
After the vehicle data file has been provided successfully, an overview of all available options of
the conversion data file order is displayed.

Fig. 19.80
► Select the corresponding row ( Item 1) with the desired option.

Multiple selection of the offered options is possible.

In the case of multiple selection, the selected options are executed in succession.

Overview of the individual options of a conversion data file order:
Action Description
Control unit replacement Replacement of control units that do not have an identical
Item number.
Order MAN Genuine Software Adding or removing additional software packages (MAN Genu-
ine Software).
Special actions Ordering of possible special campaigns within the scope of MAN
guidelines.
Vehicle parameter update Update the vehicle data file.
All the individual work steps of the ordering process for a conversion data file are described be-
low. The number of work steps depends on the selection made.

Request control unit replacement
Introduction It is possible to request replacement of control units that do not have identical Item numbers with
the “Control unit replacement” option. An example representation of the user interface is provided
below.
Overview
Fig. 19.81
Image overview:
Item Designation Explanation
1 Navigation menu All control unit groups for the current vehicle configuration
(vehicle data file) are listed in the navigation menu.
2 Selection menu The Item number of the installed control unit (source control
unit) and the Item numbers of the possible replacement con-
trol units (target control units) are displayed in the selection
menu. A possible flash compatibility of the replacement con-
trol units is also shown.
3 Change display A list of all changes adopted from the selection menu is dis-
played in the overview. Information such as control unit group
and the Item numbers of the replacement control units (target
control units) is also shown.
4 Display of flash Indicates the flash compatibility of a replacement control unit
compatibility (target control unit). This indication means that the replace-
ment control unit (target control unit) will be produced on the
basis of the existing installed hardware (source control unit)
as part of a subsequent flash process.

Instructions
Fig. 19.82
► Mark the desired control unit group by selection in the “ECU” navigation menu
Item ( Item 1).
► Mark the desired replacement control unit (target control unit) by selecting the corresponding
Item number ( Item 2).
► If necessary, click on the “Flash” button ( Item 3).

The “Overview of available flash sources” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.83) opens.
In the overview of the available flash sources, the Item numbers of the possible replace-
ment control units (target control units) are displayed on the left side of the screen ( Item 1;
 Fig. 19.83).
All Item numbers of the source control units that are flash-compatible with the desired replace-
ment control unit (target control unit) are displayed on the right-hand side of the screen ( Item 2;
 Fig. 19.83).
This means that the desired target control unit (left side of the screen) can be produced as part of
a flash process from the control unit Item numbers (hardware) listed on the right side of the screen.

Fig. 19.83

The dialogue box “Overview of available flash sources” is closed, the settings for the ordering
procedure “Control unit replacement” are adopted and the next work step for the conversion
data file order is opened.
Fig. 19.84
The desired replacement control unit is transferred to the “Selected ECU” area ( Item 2).
► If necessary, mark the replacement control unit to be deleted ( Item 2) and click on the “Delete
The relevant replacement control unit is removed.

version data file.

navigation menu.

The settings for the “Control unit replacement” ordering procedure are adopted and the next
work step ( Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file”) is opened.

Order MAN Genuine Software
Introduction Software packages for the different vehicle systems can be ordered by means of the “Order MAN
Genuine Software” option. An example representation of the user interface is provided below.
Overview
Fig. 19.85
1 Navigation menu The navigation menu shows an overview of all available MAN
Genuine Software packages. The possible software packages
for this vehicle configuration are shown in the respective sub-
items.
2 Selection menu The software package used in the vehicle and the software
packages available for ordering are displayed in the selection
menu. In addition, the possible options that can be performed
for the currently used software package are displayed, e.g. re-
place software package or remove software package.
3 Selected software pack- A list of all changes adopted from the selection menu is dis-
ages played in the change display area.
Information such as package designation, Item number, select-
ed option and price information, if available, is also provided.

► Mark the desired MAN Genuine software package by selecting the corresponding designation Instructions
in the navigation menu ( Item 1).
► Depending on the MAN Genuine software package, mark in the selection menu ( Item 2) by
selecting the designations of the current software package (current status) and the new option
(selection).
The desired MAN Genuine software is transferred to the “Selected software packages” area
( Item 3).
► Click on the “Search” button ( Item 4).

The “Search for software packages by Item number” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.86) opens. Using
an available Item number, the dialogue box provides the option of determining the designation
of the MAN Genuine software package and the associated storage location in the navigation
menu.
Fig. 19.86
► Enter the Item number of the MAN Genuine software package in the input field ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Search” button ( Item 2) to start the search.

You will then be provided with details on the Item number, such as storage location (e.g. PTO),
article designation and information on the MAN Genuine Software package, etc.

The “Search for software packages by Item number” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.86) is closed.

Fig. 19.87
► If necessary, mark the MAN Genuine software package to be deleted ( Item 1) and click on
the “Delete selection” button ( Item 2).

version data file.

navigation menu.

( Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file”) is opened.

Ordering special actions
Online ordering for special actions (Technical Information sheet, TI) can be performed under the Introduction
option “Special actions”. Before the start of the actual ordering process, it is necessary to confirm
a liability disclaimer.
Instructions
Fig. 19.88
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to confirm the message.

The availability of special actions depends on the current vehicle configuration. An example rep-
resentation of the user interface is provided below.
Fig. 19.89

1 Navigation menu The different information types for special actions are listed in the
navigation menu (e.g. If required, In the case of repair, etc.). The
available special actions are contained in the corresponding sub-
items.
2 Selection menu A description and where applicable information on the selected spe-
cial action are displayed in the selection menu.
3 Selected special A list of all changes adopted from the selection menu is displayed in
action the change display area (e.g. TI number, Item number)
► Mark the desired special action by selecting the corresponding designation in the navigation
menu ( Item 1).
The desired special action is transferred to the “Selected special action” area ( Item 3).
► If necessary, mark the special action to be deleted ( Item 2) and click on the “Delete selection”
button ( Item 4).
The desired special action is removed.

version data file.

navigation menu.

( Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file”) is opened.

Ordering vehicle parameter update
It is possible to order an update of the vehicle data file with the “Vehicle parameter update” option. Introduction
The date of the last update is also displayed. The vehicle parameters are updated to the current
status with this application. An example representation of the user interface is provided below.
Instructions
Fig. 19.90
A vehicle parameter update is performed automatically when a conversion data file is ordered for
a control unit replacement, special action or MAN Genuine software. In this case, a correspond-
ing message is displayed and this work step is skipped.
► Click on the desired action ( Item 1) and mark it.

version data file.

navigation menu.

The settings for the “Vehicle parameter update” ordering process are applied and the next work
step ( Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file”) is opened.

Ordering a conversion data file
Introduction An order overview is displayed after confirmation of all adopted changes. Information is displayed
here such as article designation, Item numbers, price information and the order date.
Instructions
Fig. 19.91
► If necessary, mark the conversion data file to be deleted ( Item 1) and click on the “Delete

version data file.

gation menu.

The order overview “Order conversion data file” is confirmed and the order placed.

The order for the conversion data file is sent to the MAN server in the next work step.
Fig. 19.92
The sent order is then checked and processed.
Fig. 19.93
No user interaction is necessary during checking and generation of the conversion data file. The
process can take some time.
During generation of the conversion, it is possible to exit the ordering procedure at this point and
to continue working with MAN-cats if required. The conversion is generated automatically on the
MAN server and can be downloaded at a later time.

The “Order conversion data file” process is cancelled.
If applicable, observe the following on-screen instructions with the offered options in order to finally
end the ordering procedure.
After the ordering process has been completed, a message about the ordered conversion
( Fig. 19.94) is displayed. This may contain the following information:
Price information
Generation time of the ordered conversion
Information on invoicing or the purchase transaction

Cancelling conversion data file
Fig. 19.94
The ordering procedure is now completed. At this point, it is possible to immediately download or
cancel the ordered conversion.
Each ordered conversion can only be downloaded once. The conversion can only be performed
with the MAN-cats service computer on which the ordered conversion was downloaded and
saved.

gation menu.
Ordered but not downloaded conversions are automatically cancelled and removed from the
MAN server after 24 hours. This time window does not apply to conversions provided by the
MAN Corporate Center, i.e. via MANTED.
As soon as the conversion data file is available on the service computer, the actual vehicle conver-
sion can be carried out ( Chapter “Vehicle conversion”).

19.7.2 Checking the vehicle for outstanding conversion
Introduction This application allows a check to be made to verify whether any conversions are outstanding for
the affected vehicle. The options include third-party confirmations of vehicle conversions, checking
or cancellation of outstanding conversions for own workshop as well as the possibility of cancelling
an outstanding conversion of a third-party workshop.
This makes it possible to avoid a situation where conversions that have been performed but not yet
confirmed or outstanding conversions block further work on the vehicle.
Third-party confirmations:
Every workshop can confirm a conversion that has been performed on a vehicle by another work-
shop but that has not yet reported back to the MAN server.
The following conditions must be met for a third-party confirmation:
Outstanding conversions of own workshop:

Employees in your workshop can check whether there is a conversion already ordered by your
workshop outstanding for the affected vehicle. If necessary, this conversion can be cancelled or
executed independently of service computers or with the service computer onto which the conver-
sion was downloaded.
The following conditions must be met for cancellation:
The conversion was ordered but has not yet been downloaded. Cancellation is possible via all
service computers in the workshop.
The conversion has already been downloaded onto a service computer in your workshop and
not yet been performed. The conversion can only be cancelled with the service computer on
which the conversion has been saved.
The employee has the same workshop identification (WID), see SmartCard, which was also
used to order the conversion.
If it is no longer possible to access an already downloaded conversion, e.g. due to a service

computer fault, the conversion must be cancelled by means of a request for vehicle parametrisa-
tion. Detailed information on this subject is available on the MAN After Sales Portal. Diagnostics
> MAN Genuine software and vehicle parametrisation.
The required conversion can/must then be ordered again.
Outstanding conversions of a third-party workshop:

Every workshop can cancel a conversion that has been ordered by another workshop using
MAN-cats if this conversion has not yet been performed.
Prerequisites for this are as follows:

Release of conversions ordered via MAN Corporate Center:
A conversion ordered via MAN Corporate Center cannot be cancelled via MAN-cats. This is only
possible by means of a request for vehicle parametrisation.
However, it is possible to “release” a conversion ordered via the MAN Corporate Center using
MAN-cats. In this case, MAN-cats “deletes” the conversion and reports a cancellation to the MAN
server. The desired conversion is then released on the MAN server and can be downloaded by
you.
Prerequisites for this are as follows:
The affected vehicle is in your workshop.

If a conversion ordered via the MAN Corporate Center is to be permanently deleted, this must
take place via a request for vehicle parametrisation. Detailed information on this subject is avail-
able on the MAN After Sales Portal. Diagnostics > MAN Genuine software and vehicle parametri-
sation.
Checking and cancelling an outstanding conversion on the MAN server Instructions
This application/function can be found as follows:
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Order with vehicle
TG3 Action with vehicle Orders ( Fig. 19.95)
This application is also available for TG1/TG2 and TG3 under the menu Item “Programming”.
Fig. 19.95

► Double-click on the menu Item “Check vehicle for outstanding conversion” ( Item 1).
► Observe and confirm the following information window on the required boundary conditions.
This is followed by the check to verify whether there is an outstanding conversion for the affected
vehicle.
Fig. 19.96
Fig. 19.97
If there is no conversion available for the affected vehicle, you are offered the possibility of ending
the application or changing to the ordering procedure for a conversion data file.

Fig. 19.98
If there is a conversion available for the affected vehicle, it is possible, depending on whether it is
located locally on the service computer or on the MAN server, to download this conversion from
the server, cancel it, start the conversion or exit the application.
Fig. 19.99
If the “Cancel conversion” option ( Item 1) has been selected, a notification window with the pos-
sible next work steps is displayed. Confirm this message in order to perform final cancellation and
deletion of the conversion.
The “Back” option ( Item 1) takes you to the previous work step.

Fig. 19.100
After the desired conversion has been cancelled, you are offered the option of changing to the
ordering procedure for a new conversion data file or exiting the applications.

The “Check vehicle for outstanding conversion” process is cancelled. You are returned to the
“Vehicle” navigation menu.

19.7.3 Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser
When performing vehicle repairs, there are applications, e.g. activation of anti-theft protection Introduction
(immobiliser - WSP) or programming vehicle keys, that require a special authorisation (certificate)
and an existing connection to the MAN server when they are performed.
Since these tasks may also have to be performed when there is no Internet connection, a function
is provided in MAN-cats which allows a “portable” authorisation.
The authorisation (certificate) must be downloaded during an existing Internet connection to the
MAN server.
The validity of this authorisation is limited in time.
Instructions
Fig. 19.101
Application cases for using portable authorisation:
Replacement of the vehicle management computer

Replacement of the engine control unit
Activation of anti-theft protection on vehicles with immobiliser (WSP) after replacement of the
vehicle management computer and/or engine control unit
MAN-cats has no Internet connection to the MAN server (offline mode)
Replacement of the gearbox unit (optional, depending on the vehicle architecture and/or vehicle
equipment)
Replacement of one or more drive motors (electric buses/coaches)
A connection to the vehicle and simultaneously to the MAN server is required in order to down-
load the authorisation (certificate).
► The MAN-cats service computer can be used to establish a connection to the vehicle and si-
multaneously to the MAN server.

► Double-click on the “Key/immobiliser portable authorisation” menu Item ( Item 1).
Automatic vehicle identification then takes place. The authorisation (password activation) is pro-
vided for the corresponding vehicle and stored on the service computer.
The period of validity is currently 3 days.
Fig. 19.102
► Click on the “Start” button ( Item 1) to repeat password activation.
► Click on the “Exit” button ( Item 2) to end the application.

19.7.4 Downloading a conversion
The “Download conversion” application is needed to download a previously ordered conversion Introduction
located on the MAN server to the service computer. Certain requirements must be met for this.
Preconditions for downloading conversions:
Order process Conversion status Framework conditions
The conversion was Ordered and generated The workshop identification (WID)
ordered using MAN-cats same as for order; conversion has not
and is automatically gen- been downloaded
erated on the MAN server
in a background process.
Conversion was ordered Ordered, generated, pur- The conversion was not downloaded.
using MAN-cats and the chase completed on ASP
order paid for on the After and conversion released
Sales Portal (ASP).
The conversion was Ordered and generated The conversion was not downloaded.
ordered by request for
vehicle parametrisation.
Conversions may be downloaded only by authorised personnel.
For safety reasons, downloaded conversions must not be transferred between different
MAN-cats systems.
A connection is required between the MAN-cats service computer and MAN server in order to
download a conversion.
Conversions that are not downloaded are automatically cancelled after 24 hours. Automatic can-
cellation refers exclusively to conversions ordered via MAN-cats service computers and does not
apply to conversions ordered via MAN Corporate Center, i.e. via MANTED.
check for available conversions and for downloading.
TG1/TG2 - - -
TG3 Action with vehicle Purchase orders Downloading a conver-

sion
( Fig. 19.103)

Fig. 19.103
► Double-click on the “Download conversion” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.104

A check is then performed for available conversions on the MAN server ( Fig. 19.105).

► If necessary, click on the “Cancel” button ( Item ).
The “Download conversion” application is cancelled. This takes you back to the system navi-
gation.
After completion of the check you will be provided with information on whether a conversion is
available on the MAN server.
Fig. 19.105
► Select the corresponding row ( Item 1) to change the default setting to “Load conversion from
server” if required.

The “Load conversion from server” process ( Fig. 19.106) starts or the conversion is can-
celled if required.

In the next work step, detailed information on the available conversion is displayed.
For each download, a price check for the ordered conversion takes place on the MAN server.

Fig. 19.106
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to finally download the conversion ( Fig. 19.107).

Fig. 19.107

Corresponding information is then displayed with respect to successful provision of the conversion.
Fig. 19.108

19.8 Programming
Introduction As part of a vehicle conversion or a control unit replacement, it is necessary to perform vehicle
parametrisation for the control unit network. The parameter settings of the complete vehicle are
checked and adapted where necessary.
Vehicle-specific data files containing all the required parameters for programming a vehicle are
required for vehicle parametrisation. There are two types of data file with different uses. The files
are referred to in this context as vehicle data file and conversion data file respectively.
Overview Overview of data files:
Designation Description Use
Vehicle data file Data file with all parameters of Programming/parametrisation of individ-
the current vehicle configuration ual control units
Conversion data file Data file with all required param- Programming/parametrisation of all re-
eters for changing the vehicle quired control units as part of a conver-
configuration sion
Specific applications for vehicle parametrisation are available in the “Programming” area. Among
other things, individual parameters or parameter sets can be customised within the scope of de-
fined limit ranges with the “Customer-specific parameters” application.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming ( Fig. 19.109)
Fig. 19.109
► Select the “Programming” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

Automatic control unit detection is performed by clicking on the menu item.

19.8.1 Vehicle conversion
With vehicle conversion, a change is made to the current vehicle configuration. A pre- Introduction
viously ordered conversion data file is needed to perform a vehicle conversion
( Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file (UDF)”). The conversion data file differs from the
current vehicle data file in at least one item. The changes to the vehicle configuration may result
from the following measures:
Replacement of a control unit (change in Item number)

Implementation of special actions
Installation of MAN Genuine Software
Implementation of a vehicle parameter update
In order to perform a vehicle conversion, it may be necessary to download the ordered conver-
sion data file. Further information on provision of the required conversion data file can be found
in  Chapter “Downloading a conversion”.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Vehicle conversion
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming Vehicle conversion

( Fig. 19.110)
Fig. 19.110
► Double-click on the “Vehicle conversion” menu Item ( Item 1).

The “Vehicle conversion” application ( Fig. 19.111) starts.

Fig. 19.111

The “Vehicle conversion” process is cancelled. You are returned to the “Vehicle” navigation
menu.

The “Vehicle conversion” process ( Fig. 19.112) starts.
Fig. 19.112

Colour marking Description
Grey (light) Control units not available
Grey (dark) Control units available in the vehicle data file
Blue Control unit marked for replacement
When carrying out the ordered conversion, it is also possible to replace individual control units
(hardware replacement). The control units to be replaced must be marked in the control unit
overview in this case. The selected control units are highlighted in colour (blue).
An authorisation (certificate) must be available when replacing the vehicle management computer,
engine control unit or, if applicable, the gearbox control unit. This is loaded automatically if there
is an existing Internet connection and corresponding rights, or can be requested and downloaded
manually beforehand ( Chapter “Portable authorisation for key/immobiliser”).

The vehicle conversion ( Fig. 19.113) is started.
► The application is ended with the “Exit” button ( Item 1). This takes you back to the system
navigation.

Fig. 19.113
Once the “Vehicle conversion” application has been started, you can follow the individual phases
and work steps of vehicle conversion using the overall progress display ( Item 1), the progress
displays of the control units ( Item 2) and the detailed information on the current work step
( Item 3). The vehicle conversion processes and work steps vary depending on the content and
scope of the ordered vehicle conversion. You should therefore pay attention to possible notification
windows, user interactions and instructions during vehicle conversion.
► If required, instructions ( Item 3) must be confirmed with the “Confirm” button ( Item 4).

Overview of the individual phases (variable) of a vehicle conversion:
Symbol Description
RESCUE Save data from the control unit on the service computer
Control units available in the vehicle data file
CHECK Component check
Control unit flashing
PARA Vehicle parametrisation
REWRITE Write saved data back from the service computer to the control units
Program vehicle keys
Control unit pairing
Write to the service memory
Fig. 19.114
At the end of the vehicle conversion, a corresponding status message is displayed indicating that
the conversion has been carried out ( Item 1).


19.8.2 Control unit replacement
Introduction Control unit replacement with vehicle data file is only possible if a control unit with an identical
Item number is installed. When a control unit is replaced, it is necessary to program/parametrise
the new control unit using the vehicle data file in order to integrate it into the vehicle network.
For control units with non-identical Item numbers (predecessor Item number), MAN-cats

checks the flash compatibility of the new control unit. If flash compatibility exists, the required
Item number is generated by flashing. If the control unit is not flash-compatible, it is necessary
to request and perform a conversion ( Chapter “Ordering a conversion data file (UDF)”) and
( Chapter “Vehicle conversion”).
Provision of the vehicle data file can take place in two different ways.
Data provision:
Provision method Requirements
Read out vehicle data file from Read-out of the vehicle management computer possible
the vehicle management com-
puter
Obtain vehicle data file from Download of vehicle data file
MAN server ( Chapter “Download vehicle data file”)
In the case of a control unit replacement, the vehicle data file should preferably be read out of the
vehicle management computer.
If read-out from the vehicle management computer is not possible, the vehicle data file must be
obtained from the MAN server. A connection is required between the MAN-cats service computer
and the MAN server for this.
When the application is launched, it is necessary to pay attention to the desired data provision
method.
Vehicle architecture TG1/TG2:
Control unit replacement with vehicle data file from hard drive
Control unit replacement with vehicle data file from service memory
Vehicle architecture TG3:
Data from hard drive

Download vehicle data file
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Control unit replacement …
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming Control unit replacement

( Fig. 19.115)

Fig. 19.115
► Double-click on the “Control unit replacement ...” menu Item ( Item 1).

If the “Control unit replacement with vehicle data file from service memory” application is se-
lected, the read-out operation in the vehicle architecture TG1/TG2 must be started manually
( Fig. 19.116).
Fig. 19.116
► Click on the “Start” button ( Item 1).

Read-out of the control units starts.

Valid for vehicle architecture TG1/TG2
When the “Control unit replacement with vehicle data file from hard drive” application is
launched, MAN-cats checks whether the required vehicle data file is on the hard drive of the
service computer. If no vehicle data file is present, the vehicle data file must be downloaded from
the MAN server ( Chapter “Download vehicle data file”).
When the “Control unit replacement with vehicle data file from service memory” application is
launched, the vehicle data file is read out of the vehicle management computer by MAN-cats. If
read-out from the vehicle management computer is not possible, the control unit replacement
must be performed using the vehicle data file from the hard drive.
After the vehicle data has been provided, an overview with all programmable control units of the
vehicle is displayed ( Fig. 19.117). The status of the individual control units is indicated by colour
marking.
Colour scheme of the control unit overview:
Colour marking Meaning
Grey (light) Control units not available

Grey (dark) Control units available in the vehicle data file
Blue Control unit marked for replacement
Fig. 19.117
► Mark the control unit to be replaced by selecting the corresponding control unit button ( Item 1).
It is not possible to select several control units simultaneously. Control unit replacement must be
performed and completed individually for each control unit.

Control unit replacement ( Fig. 19.118) for the selected control unit is started.
Fig. 19.118
Once the “Control unit replacement ...” application has been started, you can follow the individual
phases and work steps of vehicle conversion using the overall progress display ( Item 3), the
progress display of the control unit ( Item 1) and the detailed information or instructions for the
current work step  (Item 2).
Overview of the individual phases (variable) of control unit replacement:
Symbol Description
RESCUE Save data from the control unit on the service computer
Control units available in the vehicle data file
CHECK Component check
Control unit flashing
PARA Vehicle parametrisation
REWRITE Write saved data back from the service computer to the control units
Program vehicle keys
Control unit pairing
Write to the service memory

If a malfunction occurs during control unit replacement, on-screen instructions will be displayed
with information on possible fault causes and/or instructions.

The control unit replacement process ( Fig. 19.119) is started or repeated.
Fig. 19.119
navigation.
If the replacement of another control unit is needed, the application must be ended and then
restarted.

19.8.3 Customer-specific parameters
The “Customer-specific parameters” application permits individual parameters or parameter sets, Introduction
e.g. maximum speed limitations and intermediate speed values, to be set within defined limits and
with defined increments or value sets using MAN-cats. If cancellation takes place during one of the
required work steps, the operation cannot be completed and must be repeated. Possible notifica-
tions, user interactions and instructions must be observed.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Customer-specific parameters
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming Customer-specific parameters

( Fig. 19.120)
Fig. 19.120
► Double-click on the “Customer-specific parameters” menu Item ( Item 1).

In the following automated work steps, vehicle identification takes place by reading out the vehicle
data from the vehicle management computer (service memory), detecting the control units and
reading in the control files required for customer-specific parametrisation.

Fig. 19.121
After these steps have been completed, an overview with all available functional systems of the
current vehicle is then displayed.
Fig. 19.122
► Select the desired system group ( Item 1).
The description of the “Customer-specific parameters” application provided below by way of ex-
ample is based on the customer-specific parameters of an intermediate speed (System group
Interface > Intermediate speed > Intermediate speed S).

► Click on the “Next menu level” button ( Item 2).
The selected system group opens ( Fig. 19.123).

The “Customer-specific parameters” process is cancelled. You are returned to the “Vehicle”
navigation menu.
It is generally the case that buttons are active only if operation of the buttons is possible.
The available functions of the selected system group are then displayed.
Fig. 19.123
► Select the corresponding row ( Item 1) with the desired function.
► Click on the “Next menu level” button ( Item 2).

The selection is confirmed.
► If necessary, click on the “Back menu level” button ( Item 3).

You are returned to the previous level.
Read out parameters. All parameters of the affected control units are read out.

Fig. 19.124
The following information on the individual parameters is available:
Parameter designation
Read-out value in the control unit (representation in numeric values or in text form)
Target value (representation in numeric values or in text form)
Unit of displayed values (only for numeric values)
Fig. 19.125
Symbols (coloured arrows) in the “Target value” column ( Item 1) indicate which of the listed input
methods is available for changing the desired parameter value.

Different input methods are available for changing the parameter values:
Symbol Description
Black arrow Changes via keyboard input

Changes by means of buttons in the application-specific toolbar
Blue arrow Change by means of drop-down selection menu
No symbol Values cannot be changed


The “Customer-specific parameters” process is cancelled. You are returned to the “Vehicle”
navigation menu.
Changing in numeric values (black arrow) by means of button input.
Fig. 19.126
► Mark the desired parameter value ( Item 1) by selecting the corresponding row.
► Set the desired value with the buttons ( Item 2)


► The target value is set to a predefined maximum value with the “Maximum value” button.
► The “Increase” button increases the target value by a predefined increment each time the but-
ton is clicked on.
► The target value is set to a predefined factory setting/default setting with the “Factory settings”
button.
► The “Reduce” button reduces the target value by a predefined increment each time the button
is clicked on.
► The target value is set to a predefined minimum value with the “Minimum value” button.
► The modified data is saved in the corresponding control unit with the “Parametrisation” button.

The “Customer-specific parameters” application is ended without any changes. You are re-
turned to the “Vehicle” navigation menu.
► A log (PDF format) is generated with the “Report current parameters” button.

Changing in numeric values (black arrow) by means of button input.
Fig. 19.127
► Mark the row of the target value ( Item 1) to be changed.
► Use the buttons ( Item 2) to enter the desired numeric value.
► Click on the “Parametrisation” button ( Item 3).

The changes made are saved in the corresponding control units ( Fig. 19.130).
The maximum value or minimum value is entered automatically if a value is entered that is too
large or too small.

Changing numeric values (black arrow) by means of keyboard inputs.
Fig. 19.128
► Double-click in the “Target value” row ( Item 1).
► Enter the desired numeric value using the keyboard.
► Confirm the input with the “Enter” key or by clicking outside the cell with the mouse.
The “Parametrisation” button ( Item 2) is activated.

The maximum value or minimum value is entered automatically if a value is entered that is too
large or too small.

Changing text values (blue arrow) using a drop-down selection menu.
Fig. 19.129
► Double-click in the “Target value” row ( Item 1).
► Select the text row with the desired parameter value
► Confirm the input by clicking outside the cell with the mouse cursor.
The “Parametrisation” button ( Item 2) is activated.


Please note that the preset but not yet programmed values will be lost.

The “Customer-specific parameters” application is ended without any changes. You are re-
turned to the “Vehicle” navigation menu.

Fig. 19.130
► Click on the “Complete parametrisation” button ( Item 1).

The parametrisation ( Fig. 19.131) is completed.
Fig. 19.131
► The “Generate PDF report” button ( Item 1) creates a log (PDF document) in which all changed
parameters are listed in detail.


19.8.4 Immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents anyone starting up a vehicle without authorisation. It is activated auto- Introduction
matically when the ignition is switched off. It is deactivated again when the engine is started if there
is a vehicle key in the ignition lock that belongs to the vehicle and has been programmed.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming -
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming Immobiliser ( Fig. 19.132)
Fig. 19.132
► Double-click on the “Immobiliser” menu Item ( Item 1).

The sub-menu ( Item 2) opens.

19.8.4.1 Programming vehicle keys
Introduction The “Program key” application allows all vehicle keys that belong to the vehicle to be entered (pro-
grammed) in the vehicle management computer. Only vehicle keys that are entered here permit
release of the immobiliser (anti-theft protection). It is possible to add an individual vehicle key to
the system or to enter (program) all vehicle keys belonging to the vehicle after replacement of the
If it was necessary to replace the vehicle management computer, you should have all vehi-
cle keys ready and program all vehicle keys during the programming sequence. Also take into
account any vehicle keys held by a branch (freight forwarder, leasing company). This is the only
way to ensure that all vehicle keys belonging to the vehicle function when needed.
Vehicle ar- System naviga-

Menu item Sub-menu item 2. Sub-menu item
chitecture tion
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Program key -
TG3 Action with ve- Programming Immobiliser Program key

hicle ( Fig. 19.133)
Fig. 19.133
► Double-click on the “Program key” menu Item ( Item 1).

The control units are read out. Programming of the vehicle keys is prepared. Observe possible
messages, user interactions and instructions.

Fig. 19.134
In the course of the program various dialogue boxes are displayed, which you must follow, confirm
or exit.
Example dialogue box:
Fig. 19.135
After all the necessary vehicle keys have been programmed, corresponding status information
with respect to execution is displayed.

Fig. 19.136

The dialogue box is confirmed and the application is continued.
navigation.

19.8.4.2 Deleting vehicle keys
The “Delete key” application allows all vehicle keys entered (programmed) in the vehicle man- Introduction
agement computer to be deleted. This may be necessary, for example, if a vehicle key cannot be
found, is faulty or if the maximum number of entered vehicle keys has been reached.
A connection to the vehicle and simultaneously to the MAN server is required in order to delete
the vehicle keys in the vehicle management computer.

chitecture tion
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Delete key -
TG3 Action with vehi- Programming Immobiliser Delete key ( Fig. 19.137)

cle
Fig. 19.137
► Double-click on the “Delete key” menu Item ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.138
Reading out the vehicle management computer takes place automatically. Please observe any
possible messages ( Item 1), user interactions and instructions.
Vehicle keys cannot be deleted individually. All entered and programmed vehicle keys are always
deleted by this application.
In the course of the application various dialogue boxes are displayed, which you must follow, con-
firm or exit.
Once all vehicle keys have been deleted and the vehicle key in the ignition lock has automatically
been programmed again, you have the option of programming additional vehicle keys or exiting
the application. You have the option of adding further vehicle keys at a later point in time using the
“Program vehicle key” application ( Chapter “Programming vehicle keys”).

Example dialogue box:
Fig. 19.139

The dialogue box is confirmed and the application is continued.

The “Delete key” process is cancelled. You are returned to the “Vehicle” navigation menu.

19.8.4.3 Status of immobiliser
Introduction The “Status of immobiliser” application provides you with various status information on the immobi-
liser, the corresponding vehicle keys, as well as pairing of the vehicle management computer and
engine control or other control units.

chitecture tion
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Immobiliser -

status
TG3 Action with vehi- Programming Immobiliser Status ( Fig. 19.140)
cle
Fig. 19.140
► Double-click on the “Status of immobiliser” button ( Item 1).

A connection is then set up to the vehicle management computer and the service memory and the
status information on the immobiliser are read out.

Fig. 19.141

The output of the status information is repeated.
► The application is ended with the “Exit” button ( Item 2).

The "Immobiliser" status information is output in a separate dialogue box ( Fig. 19.142).
Fig. 19.142

The “Immobiliser” dialogue box closes.

19.8.4.4 Programming remote control keys
System naviga-
Vehicle architecture Menu item Sub-menu item 2. Sub-menu item
tion
TG1/TG2 - - - -
TG3 Action with ve- Program- Immobiliser Program remote

hicle ming control key
( Fig. 19.143)
Fig. 19.143
► Double-click on the “Program remote control key” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.144

► Read through the user information.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to start programming the remote control keys.
► Follow the further user instructions until remote control key 1 is registered ( Fig. 19.145).
Fig. 19.145
Remote control key 1 is registered.

If another remote control key needs to be programmed, proceed as follows:
► Press a button on each remote control key to be programmed in order to register all remote
control keys.

Remote control keys are registered and programmed ( Fig. 19.146).

Fig. 19.146
The remote control keys have been programmed.

The “Program remote control key” dialogue box closes.
Fig. 19.147
► The application is ended with the “Exit” button ( Item 1).


19.8.5 Version display
With the “Version display” application, it is possible to display all relevant information on versioning Introduction
between the vehicle data file stored in the service memory, the customer-specific data file and the
This information may be needed for support requests, in the event of problems when ordering
conversions or if conversions are cancelled.
The read-out information can be transferred to the MAN server or saved as a log (PDF document).
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Version display
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming Version display ( Fig. 19.148)
Fig. 19.148
► Double-click on the “Version display” menu Item ( Item 1).

After reading out the vehicle management computer, you are provided with an overview with infor-
mation on the vehicle data file stored in the vehicle management computer and the customer-spe-
cific data file.

Fig. 19.149
► Click on the “Purge data” button ( Item 2).

The data of the customer-specific data file is transferred to the MAN server.


19.8.6 Contents of vehicle data file
The “Contents of vehicle data file” application allows the vehicle data file to be read out of the ser- Introduction
vice memory of the vehicle management computer in order to then view the information contained
in the file.
Contents of vehicle data file: Overview
Category Contents
Vehicle information Vehicle identification number, vehicle type, planning period, engine type,
vehicle data file version, last conversion, etc.
Circuit diagrams List of all electrical circuit diagrams with Item number and designation
(German only) for the current vehicle (delivery status)
Control units All control units installed in the vehicle, including additional information
Functions All parametrised functions in the vehicle with Item number and designation
(German only)
Software packages All parametrised MAN Genuine software in the vehicle with Item number
and designation (German only)
Special actions per- Contains a list of all special actions already performed on this vehicle.
formed
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Contents of vehicle data file
TG3 Action with vehicle Programming Contents of vehicle data file

( Fig. 19.150)
Fig. 19.150
► Double-click on the “Contents of vehicle data file” menu Item ( Item 1).


Read out vehicle data from the service memory of the vehicle management computer.
Fig. 19.151

Read-out of the vehicle data is started and then listed ( Fig. 19.152).

gation.

Fig. 19.152
Navigation within the vehicle data file application is performed by selecting the node (  Item 1) of
the desired menu Item or by double-clicking on the corresponding menu Item ( Item 2).
item.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 4) to execute the selected option.

gation.

19.9 Maintenance
Introduction The “Maintenance” area contains various applications for updating and adapting the maintenance
system in the vehicle. For example, these applications offer the possibility of displaying mainte-
nance appointments and confirming that the corresponding maintenance has been carried out.
In addition, it is possible to edit the date of first registration and the dates of the statutory vehicle
inspections. Individual components and the maintenance system can also be activated or deacti-
vated.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Maintenance -
TG3 Action with vehicle Maintenance -

( Fig. 19.153)
Fig. 19.153
► Click on the “Maintenance” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

Control unit detection is performed automatically when the menu Item is selected.
Not applicable for TG3 as the control unit detection is carried out here using the “Actions with
vehicle” menu item.

19.9.1 Displaying current maintenance appointments
The “Display current appointments” application allows the maintenance appointments currently Introduction
stored in the vehicle to be read out and displayed in the form of a table.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Maintenance Display current appointments
TG3 Action with vehicle Maintenance Display current appointments

( Fig. 19.154)
Fig. 19.154
► Double-click on the menu Item “Display current maintenance appointments” ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.155

After this has been completed, an overview is then displayed with all components configured in the
maintenance system and their due maintenance dates, for example.
Fig. 19.156
1 Component Designation of the component or statutory inspection date (GUx)

2 Due Normally contains the date when maintenance is due for the correspond-
ing component or when a statutory inspection is due, for example.
3 Status Status information on maintenance appointments
4 Service prod- Specification/designation of the filled service product.
ucts


19.9.2 Confirming maintenance appointments
The performance of individual maintenance work procedures can be confirmed and saved in the Introduction
maintenance system with the “Confirm maintenance appointments” application.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Maintenance Confirming scheduled maintenance

appointments
TG3 Action with vehicle Maintenance Confirm maintenance appointments
( Fig. 19.157)
Fig. 19.157
► Double-click on the menu Item “Confirm maintenance appointments” ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.158

After this has been completed, an overview is then displayed with all components configured in the
maintenance system as well as additional information.
Fig. 19.159
1 Component Designation of the component or statutory inspection date (GUx)

2 Due Normally contains the date when maintenance is due for the corre-
sponding component or when a statutory inspection is due, for exam-
ple.
3 Status Status information on maintenance appointments
4 Service product Specification/designation of the filled service product.
5 Confirmation Display field for confirmation of maintenance work carried out.
► Select the required maintenance component by clicking in the corresponding row (highlighted
in blue).
► Click on the “Change configuration” button ( Item 6).

The “Service products table” dialogue box opens for editing the marked maintenance compo-
nents.
Depending on the maintenance component, additional information for the confirmation of per-
formance must then be selected. Examples of the different confirmation forms are shown below
( Fig. 19.160, , Fig. 19.161,  Fig. 19.162 and  Fig. 19.163.

Maintenance components with service products
Fig. 19.160
► Mark the service product specification/designation used ( Item 1) by selecting the corre-
sponding row. The background colour changes to green.
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to adopt the entries made.

You are returned to the “Maintenance appointments” overview ( Fig. 19.164) with information
about the confirmations made.
Maintenance components without service products
Fig. 19.161

Maintenance work must be confirmed individually each time it is carried out. Only maintenance
work that has already been carried out may be confirmed.

Customer-specific inspections
Fig. 19.162
► If necessary, change the “Next appointment” button ( Item 1) from “Exact day” to “Exact
month”.
► Enter the new date by means of the keyboard directly in the input field provided ( Item 2) or
by means of the mouse and calendar selection ( Item 2).


Statutory inspections
Fig. 19.163
► If necessary, change the “Next appointment” button ( Item 1) from “Exact day” to “Exact
month”.
► Enter the new date by means of the keyboard directly in the input field provided ( Item 2) or
by means of the mouse and calendar selection ( Item 2).

Fig. 19.164

► The changes made are reversed with the “Delete diagnostic memory and read out again” button
( Item 1). To reset the changes, the corresponding row must be selected by clicking on it.
► Click on the “Writes data to the control unit” button ( Item 2).

After completion of all maintenance work and updating of the maintenance appointments, the
changes are transferred to the maintenance system ( Fig. 19.165).

The “Confirm maintenance appointments” application is closed without any changes to the
maintenance system. This takes you back to the system navigation.
Maintenance system updated
Fig. 19.165
► The “Generate PDF report” button ( Item 1) creates a log (PDF document) in which all chang-
es are listed in detail.
► Click on the “Deletes diagnostic memory of complete vehicle” button ( Item 1).

Closes the entry, then deletes the diagnostic memory and reads it out again. The application is
shutting down. This takes you back to the system navigation.

The application is shutting down. This takes you back to the system navigation. The diagnostic
memory of the vehicle is read out when the next action is performed in the system navigation.

19.9.3 Maintenance data memory log
The “Maintenance data memory log” application offers the possibility of reading out the data of Introduction
the last maintenance services (maximum 50) collectively and storing this data as a log (PDF doc-
ument).
Among other things, this data contains the time of maintenance and mileage at the time of the
maintenance, the selected oil specification as well as the operating hours and the fuel consump-
tion since the last maintenance.
System naviga-
Vehicle architecture Menu item Sub-menu item
tion
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Maintenance Maintenance data memory log
TG3 Action with ve- Maintenance Maintenance data memory log

hicle ( Fig. 19.166)
Fig. 19.166
► Double-click on the “Maintenance data memory log” menu Item ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.167
► Read and observe the user instructions for reading out the maintenance data memory.

► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 2) to start reading out the maintenance data.
The corresponding maintenance data is then read out without any user interaction and a log (PDF
document) is produced.

Fig. 19.168
► The “Generate PDF report” button ( Item 1) creates a log (PDF document) in which all trans-
mitted maintenance data is listed in detail.

The log (PDF document) can be accessed again during the current diagnostic session via the
vehicle information page ( Item 2) or at a later time via the “Open file” button ( Item 3) and the
vehicle identification number (VIN).

19.9.4 Configuration of the maintenance system
Introduction The “Configuration” area contains all applications necessary for setting up the maintenance sys-
tem.
This includes, for example, entering and adjusting the date of first registration, entering appoint-
ments for statutory inspections, as well as activating or deactivating maintenance components or
the maintenance system.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Maintenance Configuration
TG3 Action with vehicle Maintenance Configure maintenance appoint-

ments ( Fig. 19.169)
Fig. 19.169
► Click on the “Configuration” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

19.9.4.1 Adapting the first registration
The “Adapt first registration” application allows the date of first registration of the vehicle currently Introduction
connected with MAN-cats to be adapted.
Instructions
Fig. 19.170
► Double-click on the “Adapt first registration” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.171
► Click on the row with the current date of first registration ( Item 1).

The “Adapt first registration date” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.172) opens.

Fig. 19.172
► Click on the “Calendar” button ( Item 1).

The interactive calendar ( Item 2) opens.
► Enter the new date using the interactive calendar ( Item 2).

The date of first registration is adopted ( Fig. 19.173).
Fig. 19.173

The date of first registration is transferred to the maintenance system and the maintenance
appointments are recalculated. The “Information” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.174) opens.
Adapt the date of first registration.
Fig. 19.174
► Read through information.

The required data is prepared and the “Ignition cycle” dialogue box is then opened.
► Follow the instructions in the dialogue box.

The date of first registration is transferred to the maintenance system and the maintenance
appointments are recalculated.

Fig. 19.175
The diagnostic memory is invalid after the processing. Deletion of the vehicle diagnostic memory
is therefore recommended.
► If necessary, click on the “Deletes diagnostic memory of complete vehicle” button ( Item 2).
The vehicle diagnostic memory is read out and deleted, see
( Chapter “Deleting diagnostic memory of complete vehicle”).


19.9.4.2 Entering statutory inspections
With the “Statutory inspections” application, appointments for statutory inspections can be entered Introduction
or adapted. Information such as monitoring type, monitoring status or due date for the next ap-
pointment is also displayed. The designation for the statutory inspection can be freely chosen by
the user. The monitoring type, monitoring status and due date of the next appointment can also
be edited.
Instructions
Fig. 19.176
► Double-click on the “Statutory inspections” menu Item ( Item 1).

In the next work step, the currently entered statutory inspections are read out along with the dates.
Fig. 19.177

1 Component Statutory inspections 1 to 5 with the current designation in

brackets.
2 Monitoring Active: statutory inspection is monitored and is displayed on
the set date.
Not active: statutory inspection is not monitored; in this case,
the vehicle keeper must become active independently.
3 New designation New designation of the statutory inspection.
4 Next date Set date of the next statutory inspection.
5 Display Set precision of the statutory inspection message to the day or
to the month.
6 Status Display of whether the changes made have been applied.
► Select the desired row of the statutory inspection (selection highlighted in blue).

The “Adapt first registration date” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.178) opens.
Fig. 19.178
The number of characters for the designation is limited to 15 characters.
► If necessary, click on the “Monitoring” button ( Item 1) to activate or deactivate monitoring.

► If necessary, enter the new designation of the statutory inspection in the input field ( Item 2).
► If necessary, click on the “Next appointment” button ( Item 3) to switch between notifications
that are exact to the day or exact to the month.

The interactive calendar ( Item 5) opens.
► Enter the new date using the interactive calendar ( Item 5).

The statutory inspection is adopted ( Fig. 19.179).
Fig. 19.179
Overview of all statutory inspections with changes. Changed statutory inspections are marked with
a tick in the “Confirmation” column.
► Check adopted data.
► If necessary, select the corresponding row and click on the “Deletes input” button.
The entries are deleted and the input ( Fig. 19.177) can be repeated.

The “Ignition cycle” dialogue box opens.

Fig. 19.180


19.9.4.3 Activating/deactivating maintenance components
The monitoring functions for individual maintenance components can be activated or deactivated Introduction
with the "Activate/deactivate components" application. Information for calculation of the service
interval is required for activation of certain maintenance components.
Instructions
Fig. 19.181
► Double-click on the menu Item “Activate/deactivate maintenance components” ( Item 1).

After starting the application, all configurable maintenance components including status informa-
tion are read out and displayed.
Fig. 19.182

► Click on the row of the maintenance component that is to be changed ( Item 1) to mark it.

The “Activate/deactivate maintenance components” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.183) opens.
Fig. 19.183
► If necessary, click on the “Monitoring” button ( Item 1) to activate or deactivate monitoring.
► If necessary, click on the “At least one service carried out” button ( Item 2).

The interactive calendar opens.
► Select input of the date of the last service.
► Enter the mileage ( Item 4) of the last service.
► The row “Available qualities” ( Item 5) must have a green background in order for the “Con-
firm” button ( Item 6) to be activated.

The changes are applied ( Fig. 19.184).

Fig. 19.184
Overview of all maintenance components with changes. Changed maintenance components are
marked with a tick in the “Confirmation” column ( Item 1).
► If necessary, select the corresponding row and click on the “Deletes input” button ( Item 2).
The entry is deleted.


Fig. 19.185
The vehicle diagnostic memory is read out and deleted


19.9.4.4 Activate/deactivate maintenance system
In vehicles equipped with a maintenance system, the “Activate/deactivate maintenance system” Introduction
application can be used to activate or deactivate this. The work steps required for activation are
user-prompted.
Deactivating the maintenance system
All monitoring functions of the vehicle are deactivated. Required monitoring functions must be
reactivated separately ( Chapter “Activating the maintenance system”).
Instructions
Fig. 19.186
► Double-click on the menu Item “Deactivate maintenance system” ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.187

Feedback about the maintenance system status ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.188

The vehicle diagnostic memory is read out and deleted

Activating the maintenance system
The information required as part of the activation process should be kept available through the
corresponding maintenance documents or the previously completed form for resetting the main-
tenance system.
Instructions
Fig. 19.189
► Double-click on the menu Item “Activate maintenance system” ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.190
► Click on the row of the maintenance component that is to be changed ( Item 1) to mark it.

The “Activate maintenance system” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.191) opens.
Fig. 19.191
► Check first registration ( Item 1) and correct if required.
► Check the weekly operating data ( Item 2) and adjust if required.

► Click on the “Next” button ( Item 3) to activate further maintenance components.
or
► Click on the “Previous maintenance component” button ( Item 4).

The individual maintenance components ( Fig. 19.192) are scrolled through and can be acti-
vated.
Fig. 19.192
► Click on the “Monitoring” button ( Item 1) to activate monitoring.
► If necessary, click on the “At least one service carried out” button ( Item 2).

The interactive calendar opens.
► Select input of the date of the last service.
► Enter the mileage ( Item 4) of the last service.

You can enter the various items of information directly in the input field using the keyboard, by
means of the mouse and calendar selection, or by clicking on the corresponding option with the
mouse cursor.
► The row “Available qualities” ( Item 5) must have a green background in order for the “Con-
firm” button to be activated.

The changes are applied ( Fig. 19.193).

Fig. 19.193
Overview of all maintenance components with changes. Changed maintenance components are
marked with a tick in the “Confirmation” column ( Item 1).
► If necessary, select the corresponding row and click on the “Deletes input” button ( Item 2).
The entry is deleted.


Fig. 19.194


19.9.4.5 Overview
Introduction The “Overview” application provides a list of all maintenance components of the respective vehicle
with the option of creating a log for all maintenance components and their settings.
The “Overview” menu Item is available only for vehicles with a PTM or CVM vehicle management
computer.
Instructions
Fig. 19.195
► Double-click on the “Overview” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.196

Select the desired component ( Item 1) by clicking on it.
The corresponding component is highlighted in blue and the “Generate PDF report” button
( Item 2) is activated. In addition, the selected component is displayed as information under
( Item 3).
► Click on the “Generate PDF report” button ( Item 2).

A log (PDF document) is created and opened in the installed PDF program.
In addition, the generated PDF is saved in the directory:
Drive C:/ > User data > MAN-cats directory > Vehicle brand > Vehicle identification number >
Maintenance and stored in the vehicle information portal ( Fig. 19.197) under Logs/Mainte-
nance.

Fig. 19.197

19.9.5 Vehicle trend data
Introduction The “Vehicle trend data” application allows all trend data and/or component data available in the
vehicle to be read out from the different electronic systems in collected form.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Trend data -
TG3 Action with vehicle Trend data All control units in the vehicle
( Fig. 19.198)
Fig. 19.198
► Double-click on the menu Item “All control units in the vehicle” ( Item 1).

Automatic control unit detection is then carried out, and various information from the correspond-
ing control units is read out and shown in an overview.

Fig. 19.199
1 Control unit short Indicates the control unit (electronic system) from which the ve-
designation hicle data was read out
2 MAN Item number MAN Item number of the corresponding control unit.
3 Data type Additional information about the type of vehicle data read out,
e.g. trend data, catalytic converter data, etc.
4 Information Status information about the read-out vehicle data or informa-
tion about the activities of the application.
5 Status Status information on applications and trend data:
Trend data available for reading out.
A malfunction occurred when reading out the trend

data. Click in the corresponding row and then click
on the button to obtain further information.
The vehicle data was read out correctly and stored
temporarily on the service computer.
► If necessary, click on the “Additional documentation” button ( Item 6) to obtain further informa-
tion about the malfunction that occurred.
► If necessary, click on the button ( Item 7) to repeat control unit detection and trend data read-
out.

The “Vehicle trend data” application is closed. This takes you back to the system navigation.

► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 9) to start reading out the vehicle data.
Read-out of the trend data of the vehicle has been completed.
Fig. 19.200
The trend data has been successfully uploaded if the status ( Item 1) indicates “Step has been
carried out”.

The read-out trend data is transmitted automatically when the current diagnostic session is end-
ed if there is an existing connection to the MAN server.

19.9.6 Parameter data for electronic systems
The respective applications “Engine parameter data”, “Management computer parameter data” Introduction
and “Gearbox parameter data” etc. allow the available parameter data and/or component data to
be read out separately from the corresponding electronic system.
The number of offered trend data applications varies and depends on the vehicle series and/or
vehicle type. The procedure for the query “Engine/management computer parameter data” is the
same due to the underlying principle.
System naviga-
Vehicle architecture Menu item Sub-menu item
tion
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Trend data Engine parameter data

( Fig. 19.201)
TG3 - - -
The “Parameter data” applications are described below by way of example for the application case:
Engine parameter data.
Fig. 19.201
► Double-click on the “Engine parameter data” menu Item ( Item 1).

Automatic control unit detection is then carried out, and various information from the correspond-
ing control units is read out and shown in an overview.

Fig. 19.202
1 Control unit short desig- Indicates the control unit (electronic system) from which the ve-
nation hicle data was read out
2 MAN Item number MAN Item number of the corresponding control unit.
3 Data type Additional information about the type of vehicle data read out,
e.g. trend data, catalytic converter data, etc.
4 information Status information about the read-out vehicle data or informa-
tion about the activities of the application.
5 Status Status information on applications and trend data:
Trend data available for reading out.
A malfunction occurred when reading out the trend

data. Click in the corresponding row and then click
on the button to obtain further information.
The vehicle data was read out correctly and stored
temporarily on the service computer.
► If necessary, click on the “Additional documentation” button ( Item 6) to obtain further informa-
tion about the malfunction that occurred.
► If necessary, click on the button ( Item 7) to repeat control unit detection and parameter data
read-out.

The “Engine parameter data” application is closed. This takes you back to the system naviga-
tion.

► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 9) to start reading out the parameter data ( Fig. 19.203).
Fig. 19.203
The parameter data has been successfully uploaded if the status ( Item 1) indicates “Step has
been carried out”.

The read-out parameter data is transmitted automatically when the current diagnostic session is
ended if there is an existing connection to the MAN server.

19.10 Workshop routine
Introduction The “Workshop routines” area offers you applications containing instructions on how to perform
recurring tasks in compact form. This includes switching roller test bench mode on and off during
performance measurements, for example.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Workshop routines -
TG3 Action with vehicle Workshop routines -

(Fig. 19.204)
Fig. 19.204
► Select the “Workshop routine” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

19.10.1 Roller test bench mode
In order to check a vehicle on a roller test bench (e.g. performance measurement), it may first be Introduction
necessary to deactivate certain functions in individual control units. For this, MAN-cats offers the
option of activating or deactivating roller test bench mode through user-prompted routines.
After completion of the work on the roller test bench, the roller test bench mode of the vehicle
must be deactivated in MAN-cats.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Workshop routines Roller test bench mode
TG3 Action with vehicle Workshop routines Roller test bench mode
( Fig. 19.205)
Fig. 19.205
► Click on the “Roller test bench mode” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.
Automatic control unit detection is carried out.

19.10.1.1 Activating roller test bench mode
Definition Roller test bench mode is activated through the execution of a routine. The affected control units
are polled step-by-step and the required functions are activated or deactivated. The procedure is
supported by on-screen instructions.
Instructions
Fig. 19.206
► Double-click on the menu Item “Activate roller test bench mode” ( Item 1).

In the next work step, various status information is retrieved automatically in the background from
the individual control units.
Fig. 19.207
► Read and observe the user information ( Item 1).

Roller test bench mode ( Fig. 19.208) is activated.
Fig. 19.208
The number of affected control units and control unit functions depends on the respective vehicle
configuration.
► Read through test report( Item 1)


19.10.1.2 Deactivating roller test bench mode
Introduction Roller test bench mode is deactivated through the execution of a routine. The affected control units
are polled step-by-step and the required functions are activated or deactivated. The procedure is
supported by on-screen instructions.
Instructions
Fig. 19.209
► Double-click on the “Deactivate roller test bench mode” menu Item ( Item 1).

In the next work step, various status information is retrieved automatically in the background from
the individual control units.
The individual work steps are carried out without user interaction.
Fig. 19.210

The number of affected control units and control unit functions depends on the respective vehicle
configuration.
Test mode for engine test bench has been deactivated.


19.10.2 Request for units (5458SM)
Introduction Before replacing certain units, various information must be provided as part of the approval pro-
cess. For this purpose, MAN-cats offers the option of checking part of the required information
using user-prompted routines.
The workshop routine “Request for units (5458SM)” is relevant only for process steps as part of
unit replacement within MAN Truck & Bus SE.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Workshop routines Request for units (5458M)

( Fig. 19.199)
TG3 Action with vehicle Workshop routines Request for units (5458M)
in preparation
Fig. 19.211
► Click on the “Request for units (5458SM)” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

Fig. 19.212
► Double-click on the “Start test” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.213
► Enter the SSD number (Service Support Desk number) in the input field ( Item 1).
Contact: MAN After Sales Portal > Support > Technical requests.
► Mark the component to be tested ( Item 2) using the check box.

Components to be tested may include: engine, gearbox, transfer case and driven axles.

The test ( Fig. 19.214) is carried out.
Fig. 19.214
This figure is an example of the possible display variants of the test record.
1 Red traffic light The vehicle has failed the unit test.
2 Yellow traffic light The test result for the vehicle is unclear.
► Contact the responsible After Sales department for clarifi-

cation.
3 Green traffic light The vehicle has passed the unit test.
► Observe any message windows, user interactions and instructions.

19.10.3 DPF information
In the information regarding the diesel particulate filter (DPF), the current status of the DPF is Introduction
determined and a forecast of the remaining running time/mileage and the resulting workshop rec-
ommendation is displayed.
The information regarding the remaining running time/remaining mileage comprises forecast
values that may change due to changes in the vehicle deployment profile, tonnages and engine
oil type.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Workshop routines DPF information

( Fig. 19.215)
TG3 - - -
Fig. 19.215
► Click on the “DPF information” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.


Fig. 19.216
► Double-click on the “DPF information” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.217
1 Bar graph (bar chart) Display of the percentage ash load of the diesel particulate
filter.

2 Forecast remaining run- On some engines it is not possible to calculate the projected
ning time in hours (h) remaining running time/mileage.
Forecast remaining mile- In this case, the display shows calculation not possible.
age in kilometres (km)
Workshop recommenda- If a DPF replacement is recommended, a list with follow-up
tion work is displayed.
Replacing the diesel particulate filter

Starting the routine for resetting the particulate filter re-
placement
Starting the routine for resetting the ageing counter for
the diesel particulate filter
Deleting the vehicle diagnostic memory
3 Generates a PDF report that is displayed directly.
The PDF log can be accessed in the vehicle information por-
tal.
4 Output: This takes you back to the system navigation.

19.10.4 Version display
Introduction With the “Version display” application, it is possible to display all relevant information on versioning
between the vehicle data file stored in the service memory, the customer-specific data file and the
This information may be needed for support requests, in the event of problems when ordering
conversions or if conversions are cancelled.
The read-out information can be transferred to the MAN server or saved as a log (PDF document).
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Programming Version display
TG3 Action with vehicle Workshop routines Version display

( Fig. 19.218)
Fig. 19.218
► Double-click on the “Version display” menu Item ( Item 1).

After reading out the vehicle management computer, you are provided with an overview with infor-
mation on the vehicle data file stored in the vehicle management computer and the customer-spe-
cific data file.

Fig. 19.219
► Click on the “Purge data” button ( Item 2).

The data of the customer-specific data file is transferred to the MAN server.


19.11 WWH OBD and OBD
Introduction The on-board diagnosis (OBD) or world-wide harmonised on-board diagnosis (WWH-OBD) mon-
itors the emission-relevant functions and components of the vehicle in accordance with interna-
tional standards. The “OBD” or “WWH-OBD” area with its individual applications enables you to
retrieve malfunction messages, status information etc. via a standardised interface. This is the
same as for scan tools (OBD testers) that are freely available on the market.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle OBD -
TG3 Action with vehicle WWH OBD ( Fig. 19.220) -
Fig. 19.220
Functions/application Section
Diagnostic memory  Chapter “Diagnostic memory”
► Click on the “WWH OBD” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

19.11.1 Diagnostic memory
Faults that occur in systems of the vehicle relevant to the exhaust gas are permanently stored in Introduction
the OBD or WWH-OBD diagnostic memory.
Instructions
Fig. 19.221
► Double-click on the “Diagnostic memory” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.222
Item Category Description
1 Control unit Control unit designation

2 P-Code Diagnostic memory entries for the driveline (Powertrain)
Standardised representation

3 Description Description of the P-code

The text displayed is internationally standardised and is in English.
4 Status Memory status of the diagnostic memory entry
Diagnostic memory entry present and saved
Diagnostic memory entry saved
Intermittent diagnostic memory entry
No diagnostic memory entry present
5 Category Fault class of the diagnostic memory entry

OBD threshold exceeded
Potential exceeding of OBD thresholds

Exact influence cannot be evaluated
Faults that impair the monitoring of A and B1 faults
(must) or B2 and C faults (can)
Influence on emissions, OBD threshold verifiably not
exceeded
Malfunctions that impair the monitoring of B2 and C
faults
Influence on emissions
Emission limits verifiably not exceeded
6 The diagnostic memory is read out again.
7 The diagnostic memory is deleted and read out again.

The PDF log can be accessed in the vehicle information portal under
“Diagnostic memory”.
Drive: C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats) > MAN-cats > Brand
(e.g. MAN or Neoplan) > VIN (e.g. WMA06xxxxxxxxxxxxx) > Diagnos-
ticMemory
9 Switch between compact view and detailed view.
Description: Detailed composition of the selected diagnostic memory
entry.
Contents: Values of the selected diagnostic memory entry.

19.11.2 Control unit identification
Identification of OBD or WWH-OBD emission-relevant control units of the vehicle. Introduction
Instructions
Fig. 19.223
► Double-click on the “Control unit identification” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.224
1 Control unit Control unit designation

2 DID Standardised designation of the read-out value
ISO27145

3 Name Value description

4 Contents Value read out
The PDF log can be accessed in the vehicle information portal under
OBD system identification.
Drive: C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats) > MAN-cats > Brand
(e.g. MAN or Neoplan) > VIN (e.g. WMA06xxxxxxxxxxxxx) > Identifica-
tion

19.11.3 System status
Instructions
Fig. 19.225
► Double-click on the “System status” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.226

► Click on the “Control unit” button ( Item 1) to select the required control unit.
Available signals ( Item 10) are displayed.
► Refer to the table for the following work steps.
Button Instruction
► Mark the required signals ( Item 10).
► Click on the “Transfers the marked signals to the selection window” button
( Item 3).
Selected signals ( Item 4) are transferred.
► Click on the “Transfers all signals to the selection window” button ( Item 3).
All available signals ( Item 4) are transferred.
► Mark signals that are not required ( Item 4).
► Click on the “Removes all marked signals from the selection window” button
( Item 4).
All marked signals are removed ( Item 10).
► Click on the “Removes all signals from the selection window” button
( Item 3).
All available signals are removed ( Item 10).
The input field ( Item 9) opens.
► Enter the term to be used for filtering in the input field ( Item 9).
Available signals ( Item 10) are updated.
It may be possible to select additional signals from other control units.
► Refer to the previous table for the procedure for selecting or deselecting the signals.
If signals from a control unit are no longer required.

► Mark a signal of the required control unit in the selection window ( Item 4).
► Click on the “Removes all signals of a marked control unit” button ( Item 8).
All signals of the selected control unit are removed ( Item 10).

The selection ( Fig. 19.226) is applied
Save the selection ( Item 4) for reuse.
► Click on the “Save file” button ( Item 5).

The “Monitoring” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.227) opens.
Fig. 19.227
► If necessary, assign a unique file name ( Item 1).

The selection is saved and the dialogue box closes.
Load “Save existing selection for reuse”.
► Click on the “Open” button ( Item 6;  Fig. 19.226).


Fig. 19.228
► Select the corresponding file ( Item 1).

The file is loaded ( Fig. 19.229).
Fig. 19.229

Item Button Description
1 - Signal description
2 - Read-out progress of signals in percent.
3 Change monitoring display between standard view (bar graph, digital and
text display) and trace view.
4 Start recording of the signals displayed in the view.
5 Interrupt (pause) the read-out operation of the displayed signals from the
control unit.
6 Opens the configuration settings of the monitoring display.

19.11.4 System monitoring
Instructions
Fig. 19.230
► Double-click on the “System monitoring” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.231
Available signals ( Item 10) are displayed.
► Refer to the table for the following work steps.

Button Instruction
► Mark the required signals ( Item 10).
► Click on the “Transfers the marked signals to the selection window” button
( Item 3).
Selected signals ( Item 4) are transferred.
► Click on the “Transfers all signals to the selection window” button ( Item 3).
All available signals ( Item 4) are transferred.
► Mark signals that are not required ( Item 4).
► Click on the “Removes all marked signals from the selection window” button
( Item 4).
All marked signals are removed ( Item 10).
► Click on the “Removes all signals from the selection window” button
( Item 3).
All available signals are removed ( Item 10).
The input field ( Item 9) opens.
► Enter the term to be used for filtering in the input field ( Item 9).
Available signals ( Item 10) are updated.
It may be possible to select additional signals from other control units.
► Refer to the previous table for the procedure for selecting or deselecting the signals.
If signals from a control unit are no longer required.
► Mark a signal of the required control unit in the selection window ( Item 4).
► Click on the “Removes all signals of a marked control unit” button ( Item 8).
All signals of the selected control unit are removed ( Item 10).

The selection ( Fig. 19.231) is applied.
Save the selection ( Item 4) for reuse.
► Click on the “Save file” button ( Item 5).


Fig. 19.232
► If necessary, assign a unique file name ( Item 1).

The selection is saved and the dialogue box closes.
Load “Save existing selection for reuse”.
► Click on the “Open” button ( Item 6;  Fig. 19.231).

Fig. 19.233
► Select the corresponding file ( Item 1).

The selection file is loaded ( Fig. 19.234).
Fig. 19.234
Item Button Description
1 - Signal description
2 - Read-out progress of signals in percent.
3 Change monitoring display between standard view (bar graph, digital
and text display) and trace view.
4 Start recording of the signals displayed in the view.
5 Interrupt (pause) the read-out operation of the displayed signals from

the control unit.
6 Opens the configuration settings of the monitoring display.

19.11.5 Reading out IUPR data
Introduction With the introduction of the Euro 6 emission standard, vehicle manufacturers were obliged to
provide proof of the sustained quality of the on-board diagnosis (OBD) systems in their vehicle to
the responsible legislative bodies. This is done on the basis of so-called IUPR data (In-Use-Per-
formance-Ratio).
The “IUPR data” application allows the data required for IUPR reporting to be read out from the
vehicles. At the end of the diagnostic session, the read-out data is transmitted to an MAN server.
Instructions
Fig. 19.235
► Double-click on the “IUPR data” menu Item ( Item 1).

Fig. 19.236
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 1) to start reading out the IUPR data ( Fig. 19.237).

Fig. 19.237
The IUPR data has been successfully uploaded if the status ( Item 1) indicates “Step has
been carried out”.


19.12 Bus/coach body container
Introduction In the case of buses/coaches, a distinction is made in the current data bus structures between bus/
coach chassis and bus/coach body. As a result, programming of the control units that are respon-
sible for controlling the bus body (e.g. door control, air-conditioning control system) differs from
programming of control units that are responsible for controlling the bus chassis (e.g. EBS, EDC).
This means that the control units installed in bus bodies cannot be programmed with MAN-cats in
most cases. The programming data for these control units is stored in so-called body containers
and can be downloaded with MAN-cats and saved on the service computer. The data made avail-
able by MAN must then be installed on the corresponding control units using external software.
A distinction is made between two body container types:
Body container
The body container is comparable with a vehicle data file and describes the current configura-
tion of the vehicle.
Body conversion container

A body conversion container is different from a body container in respect of at least one Item that
is to be modified (converted).
Overview of the different body containers:
Designation Description Use
Body data contain- Data file with all parameters of the cur- For programming individual
er (only bus/coach rent vehicle configuration control units with external soft-
with TEPS) ware.
Body conversion Data file with all required parameters for For programming individual
container (only bus/ changing the vehicle configuration control units with external soft-
coach with TEPS) ware as part of conversion.
A program for extracting compressed data is required to open the body containers. The program
7-Zip is recommended.
External software is required for programming the affected control units.
TG1/TG2 Vehicle Body container ( Fig. 19.205)
TG3 - -

Fig. 19.238
► Click on the “Body container” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.
Fig. 19.239
► Double-click on the “Body container” menu Item ( Item 1).


Fig. 19.240
( Item 1).
► Select the corresponding data container type ( Item 2).
► Click on the “Confirm” button ( Item 4) to confirm the input.

The “Download and confirm” dialogue box ( Fig. 19.105) opens.

The “Bus/coach body container” application is closed. This takes you back to the system nav-
igation.
If a body conversion container is selected, archiving of the new vehicle data file on the MAN
Truck & Bus SE server must be confirmed ( Fig. 19.105). The user confirms here that the data
will be programmed with a suitable external tool.

The following dialogue box is displayed only when “Body conversion container” is selected.
Fig. 19.241

The dialogue box for saving the data container ( Fig. 19.242) opens.
Fig. 19.242
► Adopt the default setting of the storage location or select a new storage location and start the
download of the data container by clicking on the “Save” button ( Item 1).
It is recommended not to change the file name. This will make it easier to find the corresponding
data container later.

Fig. 19.243
After download, a corresponding feedback message ( Fig. 19.244) is displayed with respect to

the successful provision of the data container and the storage location.
Fig. 19.244
► Read through the information and make notes if required or use the “Screenshot” button
( Item 1).

You are returned to the input screen ( Fig. 19.245).

Fig. 19.245


20 l System-related diagnostics
Contents
20.1 System navigation...............................................................524
20.2 Control unit detection...........................................................526
20.3 Reading out diagnostic memory...........................................527
20.4 Control unit identification.....................................................533
20.5 Monitoring............................................................................535
20.6 Actuator test........................................................................554
HMC600_0 System-related diagnostics 523

20.1 System navigation
Introduction All diagnostic applications that can be applied to the individual electronic vehicle systems are lo-
cated in the “Systems” or “Control units” areas.
Fig. 20.1
The respective scope of available functions and applications within a system-related diagnostics
area depends on the electronic system, control unit type and control unit version.
Differences in system navigation between vehicle architectures
In terms of system-related diagnostics, there are differences in system navigation between the
vehicle architectures TG1/TG2, no CAN architecture, engine for installation and marine engine
and TG3.
TG1/TG2 … TG3
systems Control units
Central computer Central modules

Driveline systems Driveline
Braking and chassis systems Brake system and running gear
Operation and display systems Operation and display
Driver Assistance Infotainment
Interface systems Safety
Telematics
Functions
- MAN HydroDrive
- PTOs
- Fuel tank
- …
524 System-related diagnostics HMC600_0

The individual systems, e.g. the management computer, are contained in the system groups.
Different applications are displayed depending on the system. Diagnosis of vehicle functions within
the system navigation will be expanded depending on the further development of the vehicle.

20.2 Control unit detection
Introduction Control unit detection is performed after opening a control unit group. This function attempts to
establish a connection to all control units that are required for this system area. MAN-cats performs
automatic control unit detection when the corresponding menu Item is called up. In the event of a
malfunction in control unit detection, this can be repeated either in dependence on the application
or manually.
The dialogue box for control unit detection is automatically closed at the end of the operation.
Instructions Example of control unit detection system area.
Fig. 20.2
► Click on the “Creates a screenshot” button ( Item 1) to take a screenshot.
► The “Help” button ( Item 2) in the dialogue box of the control unit detection function currently
has no function.
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 3) to cancel control unit detection.
► The “Confirm” button ( Item 4) in the dialogue box for control unit detection is currently inop-
erative.
The function for repeating control unit detection is located in the system-related diagnostics area
in the navigation menu for the corresponding control unit type.

20.3 Reading out diagnostic memory
The “Diagnostic memory” application offers you the option of reading out the specific diagnostic Introduction
memory of an individual control unit.
The application is located in the system navigation under: Instructions
Vehicle archi-
System navigation Menu items Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
tecture
TG1/TG2 systems System group System Diagnostic memory

TG3 Control units Control unit Control unit Diagnostic memory
group ( Fig. 20.3)
The description is based on the “Management computer” system by way of example.
Fig. 20.3
► Click on the “Management computer” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.
► Double-click on the “Diagnostic memory” menu Item ( Item 2).

In the next work step, the diagnostic memory of the previously selected control unit is read out.

Fig. 20.4
The diagnostic memory is read out without any user interaction.

After the read-out operation has been completed, an overview is displayed with all diagnostic
memory entries of the selected control unit.
Fig. 20.5
Item Name/symbol Description
1 SPN Numeric code for the diagnostic memory entry (Suspect Parameter
Number)
2 Designation Description (clear text) of the diagnostic memory entry.
3 Status Status display of the diagnostic memory entry with symbol.
4 ? Display of availability of further documentation.
5 # Frequency of occurrence of the diagnostic memory entry.
6 Occurrence Mileage when the diagnostic memory entry occurred.
7 1st timestamp Time of first occurrence of the diagnostic memory entry.
In the diagnostic memory display of the function, the control units in which the various diagnostic
memory entries have been stored are also displayed. Functions can be distributed across sever-
al systems.

► The diagnostic memory is read out again with the “Read out diagnostic memory” button
( Item 8).
► All diagnostic memory entries are saved in the form of a list with the “Save file” button ( Item 9).
Clicking on the button opens a dialogue box for defining the storage location.
► All diagnostic memory entries are deleted and the control unit is read out again with the “Delete
diagnostic memory and read out again” button ( Item 10).

Clicking on one of the displayed diagnostic memory entries marks this in colour (blue). If availa-
ble, additional buttons matching the diagnostic memory entry are also activated ( Fig. 20.6).
Fig. 20.6
► The “Additional documentation” button ( Item 2) displays available detailed information and
instructions for the marked diagnostic memory entry.
► Click on the “Change between compact view/detailed view” button ( Item 1).

The dialogue box for information on the marked diagnostic memory entry ( Fig. 20.7) opens.

Fig. 20.7
Brief description of the detailed view ( Item 1) of a diagnostic memory entry:

When a diagnostic memory entry appears for the first time, the first time stamp is set and stored
in the control unit with the corresponding environmental data. The environmental data contains
information such as the time of occurrence, mileage and, if necessary, additional information in
the form of another SPN number including environmental information (e.g. engine speed values,
voltage values or speed etc. at the time of occurrence).
The second time stamp remains empty at first, and is not displayed as a result.
The frequency counter of the diagnostic memory entry is set to “1”.
If the status of the diagnostic memory entry changes from “passive” to “active” again, the second
time stamp is set. The current environmental data for the time stamp is also stored. The first time
stamp remains unchanged.
The frequency counter is incremented by “1”.
This process is always repeated whenever the status of the diagnostic memory entry changes from
“passive” to “active”. The second time stamp thus always documents the last status change of the
diagnostic memory entry.
The short description of the detailed view describes standard-compliant control units. Deviations
from this are possible.
► If necessary, click on the “Exit” button ( Item 3) to end the application. This takes you back to
the system navigation.
► Click on the “Change between detailed view/compact view” button ( Item 2).

The dialogue box with the information on the marked diagnostic memory entry closes and the
compact view is displayed ( Fig. 20.5).

20.4 Control unit identification
Various information relating to the selected control unit can be read out with the “Control unit Introduction
identification” application. For example, this includes Item numbers, parametrisation time stamps,
system descriptions or version information.
Vehicle archi-
tecture
TG1/TG2 systems System group System Control unit identifi-

cation
TG3 Control units Control unit Control unit Control unit identifi-
group cation ( Fig. 20.8)
Fig. 20.8
► Double-click on the “Control unit identification” menu Item ( Item 1).

An overview opens after control unit identification has been performed ( Fig. 20.9).
Control unit identification is available for all control unit groups.

Example of control unit identification.
Fig. 20.9
The information displayed in the overview is dependent on the selected control unit type and/or
the control unit version.
► The displayed information can be saved as a PDF file on the service computer with the “Gen-
erates PDF report” button ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Exit” button ( Item 2) to end the application. This takes you back to the system
navigation.

20.5 Monitoring
The monitoring application can be used to display the data and measured values that are pro- Introduction
cessed in the control units. The read-out information can be shown in a standard view or a trace
view. In the standard view, the individual values are displayed in the form of a bar graph or as a
digital and text display. It is also possible to log the read-out data.
Vehicle archi-
tecture
TG1/TG2 systems System group System Monitoring

TG3 Control units Control unit Control unit Monitoring
Fig. 20.10
► Click on the “Monitoring” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.
► Double-click on the menu Item of the desired application ( Item 2).

The corresponding monitoring application ( Fig. 20.11) is started.
The data and measured values of the control unit to be diagnosed are shown in the monitoring
display (standard view) in the form of bar graphs or as digital and text displays.

Fig. 20.11
Each of the displayed bar graphs has a signal designation and a measured value scale. A defined
measured value range is displayed for certain monitoring values. Recognition of the measured
value is supported visually with a coloured background to the bar graph. In addition, the minimum
and maximum values in the permissible measured value range can be shown with symbols.
Components of a bar graph in the monitoring display:
Fig. 20.12
Item Description
1 Signal designation or substitute value (display of substitute value – optional)

2 Bar graph display
3 Lower limit value of the defined range (optional)
4 Lower limit of the defined range (optional)
5 Upper limit of the defined range (optional)
6 Upper limit of the defined range (optional)
7 Scaling
8 Current signal value with unit (display of unit – optional)

Schematic representation of the possible bar graphs:
Bar graph displays Explanation
Measured value within the defined range (bar graph colour-

ed green, limit value symbols coloured black).
Measured value outside the defined range, minimum value

not reached (bar graph and lower limit value symbol colour-
ed red).
Measured value outside the defined range, maximum value

exceeded (bar graph and upper limit value symbol coloured
red).
No measured value range defined, no limit value symbols

present (bar graph coloured blue).
If a problem was detected by the control unit and a substitute value is available in the control unit
for the affected sensor or signal path, the substitute value will be used. If a substitute value is used,
the bar graph and signal designation are displayed in red with the additional comment “Fault” or
“Substitute value”. The replacement value is always within the defined value range.

Functions within the monitoring application.
Fig. 20.13
Item Description
1 Change monitoring display between standard view (bar graph, digital and text display)
and trace view ( Chapter “Changing the monitoring display”)..
2 Start recording of the signals displayed in the view
( Chapter “Recording of monitoring signals”).
3 Interrupt (pause) the read-out operation of the displayed signals from the control unit
( Chapter “Pause function”).
4 Opens the configuration settings of the monitoring display
( Chapter “Configuration of the monitoring display”).
5 Resets the monitoring display to the factory settings
( Chapter “Resetting the monitoring display”).
► Click on the “Exit” button ( Item 6) to end the application.


20.5.1 Changing the monitoring display
This function offers the option of switching from the standard view to the trace view and vice versa. Introduction
The trace view offers the possibility of viewing the monitoring signals over time as part of trouble-
shooting or signal analysis.
Instructions
Fig. 20.14
► Click on the “Changes monitoring display” button ( Item 1) (bar graph/trace display).
The view changes from the standard view to the trace view ( Fig. 20.15).
Fig. 20.15
In the trace view, the measured values are shown in the form of trace lines. The characteristic
curves shown here are assigned by colours to the corresponding measured value axes. The meas-
ured value axes ( Item 1) run vertically from bottom to top, and the time axis ( Item 2) runs from
left to right.

A maximum of 8 signals can be displayed in the trace view. The number of mon-
itoring signals to be displayed can be adapted with the monitoring configuration
( Chapter “Configuration of the monitoring display”).
Button Explanation
“Zoom in” button ( Item 3) for enlarging the trace view.
“Zoom out” button ( Item 4) for reducing the trace view.
“Stop complete trace display” button ( Item 5) for stopping (pausing) the display
of signals at the end of the trace display. The signals from the control unit con-
tinue to be read out in the background. The button is replaced by the “Continue
trace display” button when clicked on.
Click on the “Continue trace display” button ( Item 5) to continue the trace dis-
play. The button is replaced by the “Stop trace display” button when clicked on.
The individual measuring points are displayed in the trace view with the “Data
point” button ( Item 6).
Click on the button again to hide it again.
Markers can be added to the trace view using the “Add marker” button ( Item 7).

20.5.2 Pause function
This function allows you to stop (pause) updating of the monitoring display. No further data is read Introduction
out of the control unit from the time the function is called up.
Instructions
Fig. 20.16
► Click on the “Pause” button ( Item 1).

The pause function ( Fig. 20.17) is executed.
The “Pause” button is replaced by the “Continue” button when clicked on.
The yellow border colour of the application area indicates whether the pause function is active.

Fig. 20.17
► Click on the “Continue” button ( Item 1).

The paused monitoring display is continued.
The button is replaced by the “Pause” button when clicked on.
The pause function is also available in the trace view.

20.5.3 Recording of monitoring signals
This function offers the option of recording monitoring signals. These can be used later for more Introduction
detailed examination as part of signal analysis or troubleshooting, or they can be made available
to MAN Support.
Monitoring signals can be recorded in both the standard view and trace view. Instructions
Fig. 20.18
► Click on the “Starts signal recording” button ( Item 1).

Recording of monitoring signals ( Fig. 20.19) is started.
The button is replaced by the “Ends signal recording” button when clicked on.

Recording monitoring signals (framed in red) in the standard view.
Fig. 20.19
► Click on the “Ends signal recording” button ( Item 1).

Recording of monitoring signals is ended.
The button is replaced by the “Starts signal recording” button when clicked on.
► In the displayed dialogue box, enter a corresponding file name in the input field provided and
save the recording by clicking on the “Save” button.
We recommend that you retain the default setting for the storage location. This ensures that all
recordings can be made available via the vehicle-specific information portal, for example. The
recordings are saved in the file format SNPZ.
Displaying recordings of monitoring signals

Double-click on the saved SNPZ file in order to display the recorded monitoring signals.
A detailed description of how the recorded monitoring signals are displayed can be found in the
separate user manual “Monitoring analysis”.

20.5.4 Configuration of the monitoring display
This function enables you to adapt the monitoring signals and sampling intervals of the predefined Introduction
monitoring display. This also applies for the “Freely definable monitoring” area
Example of a monitoring display before possible adaptations. Instructions
Fig. 20.20
► Click on the “Opens configuration page” button ( Item 1).

The configuration menu for the monitoring display ( Fig. 20.21) opens.
Fig. 20.21
► Mark the corresponding monitoring signals ( Item 1) by selecting them.

Signals to be displayed are highlighted in blue.
► Click on the selection list ( Item 2) to set the sampling interval of all monitoring signals.

If the selected sampling interval cannot be displayed in the current monitoring display, the next
smaller or next larger sampling interval is automatically used.
► A screenshot is created and saved with the “Screenshot” button ( Item 3).
► All monitoring signals are selected with the “Marks all table rows” button ( Item 4).
► All monitoring signals are deselected with the button “Deselects all table rows” ( Item 5).
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 6) to discard the changes made and return to the previous
monitoring display.

The changes made are applied and the view switches to the new monitoring display
( Fig. 20.22).
Only the selected signals are shown in the new monitoring display. The settings are also applied
to the trace view.
Fig. 20.22
If a configured monitoring window is closed and called up again, the system returns to the prede-
fined monitoring display.

20.5.5 Resetting the monitoring display
This function enables you to adapt the monitoring signals and sampling intervals of the predefined Introduction
monitoring display. This also applies for the “Freely definable monitoring” area
Example of a monitoring display before possible adaptations. Instructions
Fig. 20.23
► Click on the “Reset to factory settings” button ( Item 1).

The configured monitoring display is reset to the predefined display ( Fig. 20.24).
Fig. 20.24

20.5.6 Freely definable monitoring
Introduction In the "Freely definable monitoring" application, it is possible to configure individual monitoring
windows and to fill them with the required signals and values. Furthermore, the monitoring displays
that you have defined can be stored for repeated use.
Instructions The application is located in the system navigation under:
Vehicle archi-
tecture
TG1/TG2 systems System group System Monitoring

TG3 Control units Control unit Control unit Monitoring
group
Fig. 20.25
► Double-click on the menu Item “Freely definable monitoring” ( Item 1).

The menu Item “Freely definable monitoring” is always the last menu Item on the monitoring
level.

Adopting monitoring signals
Fig. 20.26
Item Description
1 Currently selected control unit.

2 Display field for the monitoring signals and values selected by you.
3 List of all available monitoring signals and values for the ( Item 1) selected control
unit.
Fig. 20.27
► Mark the corresponding monitoring signals that are to be displayed in the new monitoring dis-
play in the display field “Available signals” ( Item 1).
Monitoring signals to be displayed are highlighted in blue.

► Click on the “Adopts marked signals” button ( Item 2).
All selected monitoring signals and values have been adopted for the monitoring display
( Fig. 20.28).
► All monitoring signals and values are transferred to the monitoring display with the “Adopts all
signals” button ( Item 3).
In the interests of clarity and performance, you should only configure as many monitoring signals
as fit on a monitoring display.
► If the “Fault classification is read out” button ( Item 4) is active, the monitoring function dis-
plays a fault classification for the corresponding signals.
This button is active only for control units that have a fault classification. Reading out the fault
classification may lead to a loss of performance in the monitoring display.
► Click on the “Fault classification is read out” button ( Item 4) to deactivate read-out of the fault
classification.
The “Fault classification is not read out” button is displayed in the same place ( Item 4).
Removing monitoring signals
Fig. 20.28
► Mark monitoring signals that are not to be adopted in the “Selected signals” display field
( Item 2).
The signals that are not to be adopted are highlighted in blue.

► Click on the “Removes all marked signals” button ( Item 3).
All selected monitoring signals and values for the monitoring display are removed.
► All monitoring signals and values for the monitoring display are removed with the “Removes all
signals” button ( Item 4).
► With the “Removes all signals of a marked control unit” button ( Item 5), all monitoring signals
and values of the displayed control unit ( Item 1) are removed from the “Selected signals”
display field ( Item 2).
Saving a freely definable monitoring display
Fig. 20.29
► Click on the “Save file” button ( Item 1) to save the configuration of the monitoring display.
The dialogue box for defining the storage location opens.
► Enter a name for your configured monitoring display in the input field provided. Then click on the
“Save” button to save the monitoring display on the service computer in the form of an XML file.

Calling up a previously saved monitoring display
Fig. 20.30
► Click on the “Open” button ( Item 1) to open a previously saved monitoring display.
The dialogue box for selecting the storage location opens.
► Select the desired monitoring display (XML file) and then click on “Open” to adopt the corre-
sponding monitoring signals and values in the “Selected signals” display field.
► Click on the “Fault categorisation is read out” button ( Item 2) if it is wished to display the
information on the fault classification in the monitoring display.
This button is active only for control units that have a fault classification.
Reading out the fault classification may lead to a loss of performance in the monitoring display.
► Click on the “Cancel” button ( Item 3) to discard the changes made. You are returned to the
“Monitoring” selection menu.

The configuration is adopted and the view switches to the new monitoring display ( Fig. 20.21).

Fig. 20.31
The freely definable monitoring display offers the same control and function options as control
unit monitoring.

20.6 Actuator test
Definition An actuator test allows individual components of the vehicle to be activated and their functionality
to be tested. The corresponding components can be tested by predefined test sequences or op-
tionally through manual actuation.
The layout of the actuator test display depends on the scope of the functional test as well as the
information to be displayed, and may consist of up to four display areas.
Instructions The application is located in the system navigation under:
Vehicle archi-
tecture
TG1/TG2 systems System group System Actuator test

TG3 Control units Control unit Control unit Actuator test
Fig. 20.32
► Click on the “Actuator test” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.
► Double-click on the menu Item of the desired actuator test ( Item 2).

The desired application is started.
The working area of the selected actuator test then opens ( Fig. 20.34; ). Fig. 20.33 
Fig. 20.35 This provides you with information about the name of the vehicle component, and
information on the TARGET status and ACTUAL status (optional) of the component. In addition,
a description is provided on the sequence or required framework conditions for carrying out the
actuator test.
The following description explains the standard actuator test. Different actuator tests may be
available depending on the specific system. These are usually operated using the standard oper-
ating elements.

Fig. 20.33
Fig. 20.34
Item Area Availability
1 Name and status of the actuator test component Always

2 User instructions/information Optional
3 Additional graphic representation Optional
4 Monitoring display Optional

Fig. 20.35
► Click on the “Start” button ( Item 3) to call up an automatically executed test sequence.
► Click on the “Switch to manual control” button ( Item 4) to start manual actuation of the actu-
ator test component. Manual actuation is available depending on the respective actuator test.
► Actuation of the actuator test component is stopped with the “Stop” button ( Item 5) and the
initial state is restored.
► Clicking on the “Exit” button ( Position 6) stops the actuation of the actuator test component
and ends the application. You are returned to the “Actuator test” selection menu.

21 l Tools
Contents
21.1 Tools....................................................................................558
21.2 DLS coil tester.....................................................................559
HMC600_0 Tools 557

21.1 Tools
Introduction The “Tools” system level contains applications that are needed to use special tools. The special
tools required for execution of the individual routines are not included in the scope of delivery of
MAN-cats and must be purchased separately.
TG1/TG2 Tools DSL tester
TG3 Tools DSL-Tester EDC7 ( Fig. 21.1)
Fig. 21.1
► Click on the “Tools” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu ( Fig. 21.2).
Fig. 21.2
558 Tools HMC600_0

21.2 DLS coil tester
The DLS coil tester is a special tool that is used for leak testing in Common Rail injection systems. Introduction
The DLS coil tester is not included in the scope of delivery of MAN-cats and must be purchased
separately.
The following tests can be performed with the DLS coil tester:
Leak tests of injectors

Leak testing of the pressure-limiting valve
The DLS coil tester is intended solely for performing leak tests on injectors and the pressure-lim-
iting valve. Any other use of the DLS coil tester shall be considered misuse and can give rise to
incorrect results and/or damage to the device.
Performing tests with the DLS coil tester offers the following advantages:
The risk of dirt being carried into the Common Rail injection system is excluded.
Complex and time-consuming individual checks for leaks are not necessary.
The pressure-limiting valve can be tested without the need for a test drive.
The test result is documented with MAN-cats.
Further information on use of the tool is available in the User Manual of the DLS coil tester or on
the MAN After Sales Portal.
Instructions
Fig. 21.3
► Double-click on the “DLS tester EDC7” button ( Item 2).

The application starts.
HMC600_0 Tools 559

560 Tools HMC600_0
22 l Application tools
Contents
22.1 Screenshots.........................................................................562
22.2 Document viewer.................................................................567
22.3 Purging data........................................................................569
22.4 Internal data logger..............................................................570
HMC600_0 Application tools 561

22.1 Screenshots
Introduction MAN-cats enables you to make screenshots of the different working areas. This not only helps you
when you are submitting support requests, but also allows you to save every working area graph-
ically for documentation purposes.
For system-related reasons, there are restrictions relating to making screenshots in the area of
the system navigation and the navigation tree located there.
The button for producing screenshots is always in the permanent toolbar and is always active.
22.1.1 Producing screenshots

Instructions
Fig. 22.1
► Click on the “Screenshot” button ( Item 1) to make a screenshot.

562 Application tools HMC600_0

Fig. 22.2
► Assign a corresponding file name in the input field provided ( Item 1).
► Click on the “Save” button ( Item 2) to save the screenshot.
We recommend that you retain the default setting for the storage location. This ensures that all
screenshots can be made available via the vehicle-specific information portal, for example. The
screenshots are saved in the PNG file format.
The screenshots are saved in different locations depending on the working area in which they are
made or when they are made:
Overview of possible storage locations: Overview
Storage location
Variant
Description
1 Drive C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats) > MAN-cats > DiagnosticSystem >
Screenshot
All screenshots that were made before the vehicle information page are stored here.
2 Drive C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats) > MAN-cats > DiagnosticSystem >
Brand (e.g. MAN or Neoplan) > UNDEFINED > Screenshot
After brand and model selection (as from the vehicle information page), all screenshots
are stored in this file path.
3 Drive C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats) > MAN-cats > Brand (e.g. MAN or
Neoplan) > VIN (e.g. WMA06xxxxxxxxxxxxx) > Screenshot
After the vehicle or control unit configuration has been read out, the screenshots are
saved under the vehicle identification number (VIN).

22.1.2 Displaying screenshots
Introduction There are two basic options for displaying the stored screenshots. The corresponding buttons are
located in the permanent toolbar.
Option 1
Instructions
Fig. 22.3
► Click on the “Vehicle information page” button ( Item 1).

The vehicle information page ( Fig. 22.4) opens.
Fig. 22.4
► Click on the corresponding menu Item to display the screenshots.

The vehicle-specific information portal ( Fig. 22.5) opens.

Fig. 22.5
► Click on the “Screenshot” menu Item ( Item 1) to open the sub-menu.

Saved screenshots are listed.
► Select the desired “Screenshot” ( Item 2).

The screenshot in question is displayed in the display window ( Item 3).
Option 2
Fig. 22.6

Windows Explorer ( Fig. 22.7) opens.

Fig. 22.7
► Double-click on the desired screenshot ( Item 1).

The screenshot is opened in a display program.

22.2 Document viewer
The document viewer is used to display a wide range of documents in MAN-cats, such as online Introduction
help pages, instructions or documents relating to diagnostic memory entries.
It may occasionally happen that you click with the mouse cursor on an area outside of the docu-
ment viewer. In this case, the document viewer may disappear into the background. In this case,
repeat the first work instruction.
Instructions
Fig. 22.8
► Click on the “Help” button ( Item 1).

The document viewer ( Fig. 22.9) opens.
Overview
Fig. 22.9

1 Close Closes the “Document viewer” window.

2 Display area All content is displayed in the display area.
3 Buttons With this button, it is possible to scroll backwards
between several documents within the document
viewer.
With this button, it is possible to scroll forwards
between several documents within the document
viewer.
This button updates the currently selected docu-
ment.
The current document is closed with this button.
The open document is sent to a printer for printing

with this button. This function is available only
if a printer is installed and set up on the service
computer.
4 Minimise/maximise Minimise or maximise the size of the “Document viewer”
window.
Instructions The document viewer is started by clicking on certain buttons.
► Click on the “Help” button ( Item 1) to open an online help document for the current screen
view.
► Click on the “Additional documentation” button to create an additional document, e.g. for diag-
nostic memory entries.

22.3 Purging data
When working with MAN-cats, a large quantity of service data (e.g. diagnostic memory entries, Introduction
vehicle configuration and invoicing data, etc.) is produced which has to be transmitted to various
MAN servers at the end of a diagnostic session (purged).
This data purging normally takes place directly at the end of a diagnostic session. If this is not pos-
sible for certain reasons, e.g. if the MAN-cats system is required immediately for the next session
or if the system is used in the field at the customer’s premises etc., this service data is temporarily
The “Purge data” button ( Item 1) is provided in the vehicle identification area so that this stored
service data can be transmitted (purged) as quickly and easily as possible.
A connection to the MAN server is required for transmission (purging) of service data.
Instructions
Fig. 22.10
► Click on the “Purge data” button ( Item 1) to transmit (purge) the temporarily stored service
data of the completed diagnostic sessions.
When the service data is transmitted (purged), the MAN-cats control files are simultaneously
updated ( Chapter “Updating the MAN-cats software”).
A further option for transmitting (purging) temporarily stored service data can be found in
 Chapter “Purging data”.

22.4 Internal data logger
Introduction The MAN-cats internal data logger can record the diagnostic bus communication for CAN and K-Line. The
log files can be uploaded to the MAN server together with a request ID.
Instructions
Fig. 22.11
The “Internal data logger/Start VCI recording” button ( Item 1) should only be clicked on after
consultation with the support team.

23 l System settings
Contents
23.1 Opening system settings......................................................572
23.2 System settings interface.....................................................573
23.3 Overview of system settings:...............................................580
HMC600_0 System settings 571

23.1 Opening system settings
Introduction Using the system settings, you can check the configuration of MAN-cats and perform settings to
adapt MAN-cats to your requirements.
Instructions
Fig. 23.1
► Click on the “Opens the user preferences” button ( Item 1).

The “System settings” dialogue box ( Fig. 23.2) opens.
Fig. 23.2
A detailed description is provided in ( Chapter “System settings interface”).
The full scope of system settings becomes available only after logging in to MAN-cats, and in
some cases after running certain functions or applications.
572 System settings HMC600_0

23.2 System settings interface
Fig. 23.3
1 Navigation area with Contains a menu tree with all system settings. This and the
search field search field help you to find the desired information or settings
( Chapter “Navigation area of system settings”).
2 Display area The contents of the selected menu
Item from the navigation area are displayed
( Chapter “Display area of the selected menu item”).
3 Button for exiting the Click on the corresponding button to close the system settings.
system settings Click on “OK” to close the system settings with the changes made
or click on “Cancel” to exit the system settings without adopting
any changes.
4 Button for calling up Select a menu Item in the navigation area and
the online help click on “Help” for the corresponding help topics
( Chapter “Online help for system settings”).

23.2.1 Navigation area of system settings
Fig. 23.4
The left-hand screen area ( Item 1) of the system settings contains the navigation tree and the
input field for the search and filter function.
The navigation tree ( Item 2) in the system settings helps you to find the desired information or
settings. It contains a menu Item with further menu sub-items. These are indicated by icons when
the mouse cursor is in this area.
The navigation tree is displayed in alphabetical order. This may need to be noted when switching
languages.

23.2.1.1 Search field
Fig. 23.5
The search field ( Item 1) enables a desired menu Item to be found quickly.
Enter the desired search term in the input field ( Item 1). Instead of the complete navigation tree,
all system areas and the corresponding sub-items of the search term are then displayed in the
navigation area.

23.2.2 Display area of the selected menu item
Fig. 23.6
The right-hand screen area of the system settings contains various buttons as well as the contents
of the menu Item selected from the navigation area.
In the header ( Item 1) of the display area, you will find the designation (left) of the currently se-
lected system area and the navigation buttons (right) to jump forwards or backwards between the
system areas that have already been opened.
All information or input screens for the selected system area are shown in the display/setting area
( Item 2).
Depending on the selected system area, two buttons ( Item 3) are also provided.
The displayed values can be reset to the original values with the "Restore default values" button.
The changes and inputs made are applied with the “Apply” button.

23.2.3 Online help for system settings
Fig. 23.8
The integrated help system provides detailed or additional information on the corresponding sys-
tem settings.
► Mark the desired menu Item in the navigation tree ( Item 1) to obtain additional information
about the selected menu item.
► Click on the “Help” button ( Item 4) to open the online help display area ( Item 2).
► Click on the hyperlink provided ( Item 3) to display the additional information.
With the typical Windows functions, you can alter the size of the display areas by dragging the
mouse at the transitions of the display areas or at the edge of the windows.

23.2.2.1 Online help display area
Fig. 23.7
1 Header Hyperlinks for calling up all help topics, the search for help topics
as well as bookmarks.
Contents: Click on this hyperlink for an overview (navigation
tree) of all help topics ( Fig. 23.9).
Search: This hyperlink opens a view for a quick search for a help
topic ( Fig. 23.10).
Bookmark: Click on this hyperlink if you have already created a
bookmark in the online help.
2 Page navigation The navigation buttons enable you to jump forwards and back-
wards between the called-up areas. The (X) button closes the
online help.
3 Display area Name of the settings/information selected in the navigation tree.
Name of menu item
4 Display area Hyperlink for calling up the desired help topic.

Hyperlink

Manual selection of help topics
Fig. 23.9
The navigation tree is displayed in alphabetical order. This may need to be noted when switching
languages.
Search window to find help topics quickly
Fig. 23.10

23.3 Overview of system settings:
Overview The following table provides an overview of the available system settings and helps you to find the
required settings or information in MAN-cats.
Overview of system settings:
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Diagnosis settings Colour settings

Number plate
Personal settings
Information User Rights package

SmartCard
Workshop
PIN
System
Control file versions
Logging settings
General settings User survey

User settings
Diagnostic session properties
Additional ODX projects
Network connection
Network connection
Program settings Substitute language 1

Substitute language 2
Language
Language for MAN-cats I
Support language
System test

24 l Uninstalling MAN-cats
Contents
24.1 Preparing uninstallation.......................................................584
24.2 Uninstalling MAN-cats.........................................................585
24.3 Uninstalling CodeMeter Runtime (WIBU).............................590
24.4 Uninstalling the Diagnostic Assistant Application (MAN)......592
24.5 Uninstalling MAN-cats registry.............................................593
24.6 Uninstalling MAN-cats I Emulator........................................594
24.7 Uninstalling MAN VCI T400 software...................................596
24.8 Uninstalling MAN VCI T200 software (optional)...................597
24.9 Manually deleting file directories..........................................601
HMC600_0 Uninstalling MAN-cats 581

Introduction MAN-cats and its associated software packages are uninstalled automatically except for deletion
of the file storage directories. There are modules of the diagnostic system, e.g. CodeMeter (Wibu),
that may still be being used by other software programs or Windows at the time of uninstalling.
These are therefore not automatically deleted. The same may apply to a damaged MAN-cats in-
stallation, which is why it may be necessary to uninstall the individual software packages manually
(see list below).
The following chapter describes how to uninstall MAN-cats and its individual software packages.
The following steps must be performed:
Prepare uninstallation ( Chapter “Preparing uninstallation”)

Uninstall MAN-cats software ( Chapter “Uninstalling MAN-cats”)
Uninstall CodeMeter (Wibu) ( Chapter “Uninstalling CodeMeter Runtime (WIBU)”)
Uninstall Diagnostic Assistant Application (MAN)
( Chapter “Uninstalling the Diagnostic Assistant Application (MAN)”)
Uninstall MAN-cats registry ( Chapter “Uninstalling MAN-cats registry”)
Uninstall the software of the Vehicle Communication Interface T42x/T43x
( Chapter “Uninstalling MAN VCI T400 software”)
Uninstall the T200 Vehicle Communication Interface software
( Chapter “Uninstalling MAN VCI T200 software (optional)”)
Uninstall MAN-cats 1 emulator ( Chapter “Uninstalling MAN-cats I Emulator”)
Manually delete various file directories ( Chapter “Manually deleting file directories”)
If MAN-cats is not properly uninstalled, this may lead to problems when re-installing. The system
should therefore always be uninstalled by the MAN-cats administrator or the IT manager.
582 Uninstalling MAN-cats HMC600_0

MAN-cats and its associated programs are uninstalled in the Windows control panel under “Pro- Instructions
grams and Features”.
Fig. 24.1
► Open the area for uninstalling programs as follows:

Start > Control Panel > Programs and Features
The uninstall process for MAN-cats can also be started from the Windows start menu:
Start > Programs > MAN-cats > Uninstall MAN-cats.
To ensure that all software packages or modules relevant to MAN-cats have been removed, you
should then restart the MAN-cats service computer and check again that everything has been
uninstalled under “Programs and Features”.

24.1 Preparing uninstallation
Introduction Before uninstalling MAN-cats and the associated applications, it must be ensured that all open
tasks have been completed, information saved and all relevant data purged.
For this reason, you should carry out the following:
Close all open diagnostic sessions, orders, conversions and workflows

If required, save any stored logs, diagnostic memories, screenshots, reports, bus containers,
etc.
You can find the defined file storage directory in the MAN-cats system settings under:
User preferences > General settings > Diagnostic session settings > Directory for user data.
Purging data ( Chapter “Purging data”)

24.2 Uninstalling MAN-cats
Depending on when MAN-cats was installed, the application is called MAN-cats III or TRATON
Diagnostic.
Fig. 24.2
► Select the “MAN-cats Setup” or “TRATON Diagnostic” application ( Item 2) from the list of Instructions
applications offered.

Fig. 24.3
Confirm that you want to uninstall the MAN-cats software.

Note on conditions for uninstallation.
Fig. 24.4
► Observe the note and click on the “OK” button ( Item 1) to confirm the message.
During the uninstall process, various dialogue boxes for the individual software packages (e.g.
VCI T200, VCI T400, Diagnostic Assistant Application, registry entries, SPD2PDF, etc.) will be
displayed. Confirm these dialogue boxes by clicking on the corresponding buttons.

Fig. 24.5
The MAN-cats application is uninstalled.
► Wait until the “Windows Installer” dialogue box ( Fig. 24.6) opens.
Fig. 24.6
► Select the “Yes” button ( Item 1) to confirm the uninstall process.
Finish uninstalling the MAN-cats software.

Normally, all software packages are uninstalled automatically, with the exception of the CodeM-
eter Runtime (WIBU) ( Chapter “Uninstalling CodeMeter Runtime (WIBU)”) and the Diagnostic
Assistant application ( Chapter “Uninstalling the Diagnostic Assistant Application (MAN)”).
If a MAN-cats installation is damaged, problems may occur in the automatic uninstall process. In
this case, you should observe the instructions in the following chapters.

If further applications ( Item 2) are open in the background, the following information window is
displayed ( Fig. 24.7).
Fig. 24.7
► Select the option ( Item 1) to automatically close all applications.

These will be restarted after the uninstall process.
► Select the option ( Item 4) to not close the applications.

A restart is required.
► Confirm your selection with the “OK” button ( Item 3) to continue with the uninstall process.
The individual applications will be uninstalled. A status window is displayed for each application
( Fig. 24.8).

Example:
Fig. 24.8
The uninstallation of this software package is complete when all dialogue boxes have been
closed.

24.3 Uninstalling CodeMeter Runtime (WIBU)
If the “CodeMeter Runtime (WIBU)” software was not automatically uninstalled with MAN-cats, it
must be removed from the service computer manually.
Fig. 24.9
Instructions ► Select the “DSA CodeMeter Runtime Installer” application ( Item 2) from the list of applica-
tions offered.

Fig. 24.10
► Select the “Yes” button to confirm the uninstallation.
The application will be uninstalled. Progress can be seen in the following window ( Fig. 24.11).

Fig. 24.11
The window ( Fig. 24.11) closes when the process is complete. The following messages (
Fig. 24.12;  Fig. 24.13) appear:
Fig. 24.12
Fig. 24.13
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 1) of the dialogue boxes ( Fig. 24.12 and  Fig. 24.13) to
complete the uninstall process.
closed.

24.4 Uninstalling the Diagnostic Assistant Application (MAN)
If the “Diagnostic Assistant Application” software was not automatically uninstalled with
MAN-cats, it must be removed from the service computer manually.
Fig. 24.14
Instructions ► Select the “Diagnostic Assistant Application” ( Item 2) from the list of applications offered.

Fig. 24.15
The “Diagnostic Assistant Application” application is uninstalled.
closed.

24.5 Uninstalling MAN-cats registry
If the “MAN-cats Registry” software was not automatically uninstalled with MAN-cats, the soft-
ware must be removed from the service computer manually.
Fig. 24.16
► Select the “MAN-cats Registry” application ( Item 2) from the list of applications offered. Instructions

Fig. 24.17
The “MAN-cats Registry” application is uninstalled.
closed.

24.6 Uninstalling MAN-cats I Emulator
If the “MCI Emulator” software was not automatically uninstalled with MAN-cats, the software
must be removed from the service computer manually.
Fig. 24.18
Instructions ► Select the “MCI Emulator” application ( Item 2) from the list of applications offered.

Fig. 24.19
► Select the “Yes” button to confirm the uninstallation.

The uninstall process for the “MCI Emulator” application starts.

Message confirming that the software has been successfully uninstalled.
Fig. 24.20
► Click on the “OK” button ( Item 1) to complete the uninstall process.
closed.

24.7 Uninstalling MAN VCI T400 software
If the MAN Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) “T42x/T43x” software was not automatically
uninstalled with MAN-cats, the software must be removed from the service computer manually.
Fig. 24.21
Instructions ► Select the application “T42x/T43x” ( Item 2) from the list of applications offered.

Fig. 24.22
The “Diagnostic Assistant Application” application is uninstalled.
closed.

24.8 Uninstalling MAN VCI T200 software (optional)
If the MAN Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI) “T200” software was not automatically unin-
stalled with MAN-cats, the software must be removed from the service computer manually.
Fig. 24.23
► Select “T200” application ( Item 2) from the list of applications offered. Instructions

Fig. 24.24

Fig. 24.25

The uninstall process of the SPX D-PDU API software package is prepared.
Fig. 24.26
After the uninstall process for the “SPX D-PDU API” software package has been completed, the
S-MVCI application software package uninstalls automatically.
Confirm that you wish to uninstall the software package “S-MVCI application”.
Fig. 24.27

Complete the uninstallation of the S-MVCI software package.
If further applications ( Item 2) are open in the background, the following information window is
displayed ( Fig. 24.28).
Fig. 24.28
► Select the option ( Item 1) to automatically close all applications.

These will be restarted again after the uninstall process.
► Select the option ( Item 4) to not close the applications.

A restart is required.
► Confirm your selection with the “OK” button ( Item 3) to continue with the uninstall process.
The uninstall process is continued ( Fig. 24.29).

Fig. 24.29
closed.

24.9 Manually deleting file directories
In order to completely delete MAN-cats from the service computer, it is finally necessary to delete Instructions
various file directories manually.
► Open Windows Explorer, e.g. by clicking on the corresponding icon in the Windows taskbar.
Delete the following directories manually:
► “.smartstart”, “.dsa” and “MAN-cats III”:

Drive C:/ > User > User account (e.g. MAN-cats)
► “Mancats3” and “CodeMeter” directories:

Drive C:/ > ProgramData
► “Elasticsearch-for-MAN” directory
Drive C:/ > ProgramData > Elastic
(The “ProgramData” directory may be marked as "hidden" by the operating system, in which case
it must first be made visible using the operating system settings.)
► “MAN” and/or “TRATON” directories:

Drive C:/ >
The directory structure described is based on a default MAN-cats installation. Differences are
possible.
Complete uninstallation MAN-cats is finished after deletion of the file directories.

25 l Buttons and status displays
Contents
25.1 General buttons...................................................................604
25.2 Buttons on the permanent toolbar........................................604
25.3 Application-dependent buttons.............................................605
25.4 Status symbols and displays................................................ 611
HMC600_0 Buttons and status displays 603

The following chapters provide an overview of the buttons and status displays used in MAN-cats.
25.1 General buttons

Button Explanation
Confirm
Confirms the current selection.
Cancel
Cancels the process.
Output
End the application and return to system navigation.
Print
Prints a currently displayed document (complete, including invisible area), e.g.

calibration log.
25.2 Buttons on the permanent toolbar

Button Explanation Button Explanation
Vehicle navigation System navigation

Opens the navigation tree at Opens the navigation tree and shows
the vehicle level. your previously selected application.
Opens the vehicle informa- General information portal
tion
Opens the vehicle informa- Opens the general information portal.
tion page.
External software Open file
Starts MAN-cats accessory Opens a file manager for loading the
software. saved data.
Opens the document search Screenshot
Starts the MAN Diagnostic Takes a photo of the current screen

Assistant. display.
Help User specifications
Opens the online help relat- Opens the user settings, support
ing to the current screen. assistance and user information.
Closes the application/cur-
rent session/current view.
Ends the current session and
closes MAN-cats.
604 Buttons and status displays HMC600_0

25.3 Application-dependent buttons
Screen keyboard Login with rights file

Opens the screen keyboard. The Windows Explorer window
opens.
Language setting VCI Manager
Select the system, output Starts the VCI Manager.
and substitute languages.
Installation details Log in with the Smart Card
Display and install the load- Starts the selected action.
ed updates.
Changes the monitoring Opens the configuration page
display (bar graph/trace
display).
Switches between monitor- Opens a configuration page for the
ing displays (bar graph/trace monitoring display.
display).
Starts signal recording Ends signal recording
Starts the recording of meas- Stops the value recording previously
ured values requested by the started by the user and opens a file
user. All measured values manager window for saving or dis-
present at the time of activa- carding the recorded values.
tion are discarded.
Break Continue
Pause recording of the moni- Continue recording of the monitoring
toring trace display. trace display.
Start Stop
Starts the calibration routine. Stops the calibration routine.
Shows the complete trace. Zoom out

Shows the full monitoring Zooms out from the saved monitoring
trace on the screen. trace.
Zoom in Reset to factory settings
Zooms into the saved moni- Resets the configuration to the facto-
toring trace. ry settings/default settings.
Adds marker Displays measuring points
Monitoring trace display, add Monitoring trace display, show meas-
marker. uring points.

Stop entire progress display Removes all table row selections
Monitoring trace display, Closes all tables.

pause.
Selects all table rows Switch to automatic control.
Opens all tables. Stops the actuator test in manual

mode and switches to automatic
mode.
Actuator test Switch to manual control
Initiate actuator test (e.g. for Stops the actuator test in automatic
generic ODX applications). mode and switches to manual mode.
Maximum value Minimum value
Set to maximum value. Set to minimum value (custom-
er-specific).
Starts VCI recording Stops VCI recording.
Starts the VCI recording. Stops the VCI recording.
Datalogger Configures VCI recording.

Call up the data logger. Configures the VCI recording.
Switch between compact Switch between detailed view/com-

view/detailed view pact view
Switches the display of the Switches the display of the control
control unit overview from unit overview from detailed to com-
compact to detailed. pact.
Read out overall diagnostic Deletes diagnostic memory of com-
memory plete vehicle
Read out the diagnostic mem- The diagnostic memories of all de-
ory again (without first delet- tected control units are deleted.
ing the diagnostic memory).
Delete complete diagnostic Start subsequent identification of
memory and read it out again unidentified control units and read
out diagnostic memory
Delete diagnostic memory of Start subsequent detection of un-
complete vehicle and read out detected control units and read out
again. their diagnostic memories.

Start “Diagnostic memory of Reading out diagnostic memory

complete vehicle” view.
Opens the "Control Reads out the diagnostic memory of
unit-Overview-Diagnostics" a previously selected control unit and
view. updates the display.
Call up navigation tree/con- Delete diagnostic memory and read
trol unit out again
Display for “Open control The selected diagnostic memory is
unit directory in naviga- deleted and read out again.
tion tree” after clicking on
a "Control unit tile" in the
diagnostic memory of com-
plete vehicle.
Deleting diagnostic memory Writes data to the control unit.
Deletes the selected diag- Write data to control unit.

nostic memory.
Control unit identification Call up diagnostic memory/control unit
Control unit identification Display for “Open control unit diagnos-

for the generic ODX appli- tic memory” after clicking on a "Control
cation unit tile" in the diagnostic memory of
complete vehicle
Switches to the “Diagnostic Save file
memory of complete vehi-
cle” view
Switch diagnostic memory Opens a file directory for saving data
(overview – table). and information.
Brief activation (up) Brief activation (down)
Long activation (up) Long activation (down)
Rough actuation (right) Rough actuation (left)
Fine adjustment (right) Fine adjustment (left)
Transfers the selected Deletes all selected signals from the

signals to the selection selection window
window
Transfers the marked ob- Removes the highlighted object from
jects (left half of window) to the selection window (right) and trans-
the selection window (right). fers it to the left half of the window.

Transfers all signals to the Removes all signals of a highlighted

selection window control unit
Transfers all objects from the Removes all objects of the selected
left half of the window to the control unit(s) from the selection
selection window (right). window (right).
Removes all signals of a high- Reduce
lighted control unit
Removes all objects of the Go back one step.
selected control unit(s) from
the selection window (right).
Increase Starts connection wizard
One step forwards Starts connection wizard and helps
with connection problems between
the communication interface and the
service computer.
Starts configuration wizard Imports configuration file
Starts the configuration wiz- Import of a configuration file.
ard for a connection with a
communication interface.
Exports configuration file Selection of VCI manufacturer
Export of a configuration file. Within the VCI Manager, change the

DPU-API of the VCI by changing the
VCI manufacturer.
Start Launching the VCI Manager
Starts the VCI application. Starts the VCI Manager.
Update Opens shopping cart

Updates the list of open ses- Open shopping cart.
sions (server query).
Change configuration Reset order
Opens a new screen that Reset order for a conversion.
enables adaptations and set-
tings to be made.
Add to shopping cart Purging data
Remembers the selected Sets up an online connection and
Technical Information sheet purges existing data.
(TI) for online ordering (pro-
vision for download) of the
relevant files (e.g. flash files).

View open sessions Vehicle info page, documents

Opens a new page with the Menu call-up for documents on the
current open sessions (not vehicle info page
linked to SmartCard).
Generates PDF report Start filter
Generates a PDF report and Apply filter in the vehicle identifica-

displays it in the document tion.
viewer. Report for calibra-
tion, maintenance, diagnostic
memory of complete vehicle.
Reset filter Call up technical support
Cancels the filter selection in Call up technical support.
the vehicle identification.
Opens vehicle directory Flashing
Writes data to the selected For generic ODX application.
control unit.
Parametrisation Delete software package
For generic ODX application. Conversion: Delete software pack-
age.
Ignore fault message Repeat
Skip Repeat procedure.
Terminate workflow Workflow overview

End workflow prematurely. Start overview.
Delete selection Copy to clipboard

Deletes changes made, e.g. Copies data from the screen view to
within an ordering procedure. the clipboard.
Download vehicle data file Deletes entry
Opens application for down- Offers the option of deleting entries
loading vehicle data files. quickly.
Close diagnostic session Removes all signals of a highlighted
control unit
Closes all open diagnostic Removes all objects of the selected
sessions. control unit(s) from the selection
window (right).
Find Read out the OBDU diagnostic
memory
Opens a (general) search Within the “Diagnostic memory of
screen. complete vehicle” application

Further documentation Fault classification is read out.

Opens an action instruction. Fault classification is read out.
Fault classification is not Signals have no fault classification.

read out
Fault classification is not Signals have no fault classification.
read out.
Circuit diagram Complete circuit diagram
Opens the circuit diagram Circuit diagram is completely ren-
pool. dered.
Circuit diagram incrementally Datalogger
Circuit diagram is completely Call up the data logger.
rendered.

25.4 Status symbols and displays
Status display, diagnostic Status display, intermittent entry in

memory entry saved diagnostic memory
Status display, diagnostic Status display, no diagnostic memory

memory entry present and entry present
saved
Status display, diagnostic Status display, intermittent entry in
memory entry saved (entry diagnostic memory (entry cannot be
cannot be deleted, removal deleted, removal by self-recovery)
by self-recovery)
Status display, diagnostic Status display, no permanent diag-
memory entry present and is nostic memory entry present
saved (entry cannot be delet-
ed, removal by self-recovery)
Diagnostic memory, Class A Diagnostic memory, Class B1 fault
fault
Diagnostic memory, Class B2 Diagnostic memory, Class C fault

fault
Signal above the defined Signal below the defined range

range
Signal in the defined range Signal not in the defined range, re-
placement value is used
Lower limit of the defined Upper limit of the defined range

range
Perceived symptom Executable process
Fault cause confirmed Fault cause suspected
Fault cause not relevant Fault remedied
Repaired Repair failed

Folder structure Workflow step not yet started
Workflow step completed Workflow step failed
Optional workflow step not Optional workflow step completed

yet started
Optional workflow step failed Workflow completed
Workflow in progress, next Read out trend data, no trend data

selected workflow step available.
Work step can be performed Step is waiting for preparations.
Step inactive Step was carried out.
Step had critical error. Too high
Illogical, absurd Too low
Short circuit to ground No signal present
short circuit Short circuit to +UBatt
Device fault Faulty signal
Loose contact Discontinuity
Discontinuity or short circuit Diagnostic memory entry not speci-

to +UBatt fied
Minor system fault Discontinuity or short circuit to

ground
Major system fault Medium system fault

RSS feed, new messages RSS feed, no new messages availa-

available ble (only messages that have already
been read are available)
SmartCard inserted and Smart Card not inserted or not rec-
ready ognised
Smart Card is being checked SmartCard not yet activated
Runtime rights available for Runtime rights available for less than
longer than four weeks one week
Runtime rights available for Runtime rights shorter than one

more than one and less than week until expiry
four weeks
Installation package available Installation package not available
Sliding switch, ON Sliding switch, OFF

25.5 MAN-cats Installer
TRATON desktop link MAN taskbar link
Close window Maximise windows
Restore windows Minimise windows
Minimise window in icon area Back to start page (TRATON brand

selection)
Settings Log
Download Exit application
Check for updates Trouble-shooting
Install package Export working area
General user settings Connection settings
File system settings Actions
Open file path information
The storage location page is Select directory

displayed
Create working area snap- Carry out troubleshooting

shot
Delete saved proxy pass- Resubmit download request

word
Display licence agreement Search input field

Confirm Cancel
FAQ entry Export log
Print log Search log
Empty log Copy ID
First page Previous page
Next page Last page
Downloading application Downloading file
Continue download Stop download
Download package Display FAQ
Show Help Continue download
Fault found Open repair
No faults found Information text is displayed
“Back” button (white) End page is displayed

25.6 VCI Manager
VCI overview Settings
VCI Manager Help Information on the application
VCI search Filter list
Reset list VCI Help
Next Back
Back Open firmware updater
Open VCI web interface Load configuration file in VCI
Set up on PC Save information from the selected

VCI
Retrieving a configuration file System

from VCI
Saving information of all Advanced network

available VCIs
Network Activate change/apply update
VCI connected via USB VCI connected via WiFi
VCI connected via Ethernet

26 Tips and tricks
The problem solutions described below require in-depth system and network knowledge. Incor-
rect settings on the service computer or network can lead to serious damage. For this reason,
you should contact your system or network administrator.
Description of the problem Description of the problem
An update of the runtime Check that MAN-cats software is up-to-date

rights of the technician Smart- ( Chapter “Updating the MAN-cats software”).
Card failed. Check the network settings.
Check the settings of the system clock and the time zone.
MAN-cats download from the Check the Internet connection.
Internet does not start. Check your browser and proxy settings.
Check firewall settings (connection may be blocked).
A MAN-cats update cannot Close all MAN-cats programs (MAN-cats, MAN-cats Installer, VCI
be performed (not possible to applications, etc.) and restart MAN-cats.
rename RTS). Close all MAN-cats directories/files that were opened with ex-
ternal programs (e.g. Explorer, Word Pad, etc.) and then restart
MAN-cats.
Reboot the service computer.
1. Deactivate the anti-virus software and start MAN-cats again
(only if the other solutions did not remedy the problem).
2. After successfully updating MAN-cats, activate your anti-virus
software.
Problems when installing or Run the troubleshooting wizard in the MAN-cats Installer.
operating MAN-cats
HMC600_0 Tips and tricks 617

27 Support
The MAN After Sales Portal contains comprehensive information about MAN-cats:
MAN After Sales Portal > Diagnostics
618 Support HMC600_0

MAN Truck & Bus SE
Postfach 50 06 20
80976 München
www.mantruckandbus.com
Last updated: 06/2021 - Text and illustrations non-binding

We reserve the right to make changes due to technical progress.
MAN Truck & Bus – A member of the TRATON Group

Opis Instalacji Man Cats

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Opis Instalacji Man Cats

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TESTING AND DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM

Editorial deadline: 06/2021

Copyright© 2021 MAN Truck & Bus SE

Cross-references to chapters, Item numbers in pictures or to other manuals can be found in brack-

8 General safety instructions HMC600_0

 Vehicle configuration data, e.g. regarding installed electronic systems

HMC600_0 Recording vehicle data 9

4.1.1 Service computer

Random access memory 8 GB or more

4.1.2 Vehicle Communication Interface (VCI)

 Interface compatible with D-PDU-API-ISO 22900 Version 2.2

Correctly set time zone on the service computer.

4.2.1 MAN-cats requirements

4.3.1 Connection configuration

4.3.2 Overview of connection variants

Variant 1 Cable connection between Wireless connection Connection via USB

Variant 2 Wireless connection between Cable connection Connection to the service

VCI/service computer Internet Requirements

Variant 3 Wireless connection between Wireless connection WLAN access to the

 Broadband connection (e.g. DSL) or company network

HMC600_0 Brief overview of start-up 17

5.1 Preparatory measures

► Log into/register in the MAN After Sales Portal.

► Purchase MAN-cats SmartCard via the MAN After Sales Portal

18 Brief overview of start-up HMC600_0

 Installation via download from the MAN After Sales Portal

An Internet connection is required to download the MAN-cats software.

► Install the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software.

5.2.2 Offline installation

► Open the directory in which the MAN-cats software is located.

► Double-click on the file “MAN-cats setup.exe”.

► Install the MAN-cats testing and diagnostic software.

HMC600_0 Brief overview of start-up 19

 MAN-cats start-up with technician SmartCard

5.3.1 MAN-cats start-up with technician SmartCard

► Activate the MAN-cats technician SmartCard.

► Activate the runtime rights packages on the MAN-cats technician SmartCard.

An Internet connection is required to activate the runtime rights packages.

► Set up a vehicle communication interface in MAN-cats using the VCI Manager.

5.3.2 MAN-cats start-up without SmartCard

► Log into MAN-cats with the licence file.

20 Brief overview of start-up HMC600_0

HMC600_0 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) 21

Overview of content (selection):

 Repair and maintenance manuals

Why do I need the MAN After Sales Portal?

 Users with MAN-cats SmartCard ( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights”)

 Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal

22 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) HMC600_0

Registering on the MAN After Sales Portal Instructions

► Follow the instructions during the registration process until it is complete.

HMC600_0 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) 23

1 The “My profile” area contains the following menu items:

24 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) HMC600_0

Pos. Column Explanation

1 Product search Targeted search for an Item number or designation.

HMC600_0 MAN After Sales Portal (ASP) 25

HMC600_0 MAN-cats installation 27

Installation via download from the MAN After Sales Portal

The download hyperlink is available only to workshops without a MAN contract.

28 MAN-cats installation HMC600_0

HMC600_0 MAN-cats installation 29

► Confirm the dialogue box for user account control.

30 MAN-cats installation HMC600_0

Vehicle configuration data, e.g. regarding installed electronic systems

Interface compatible with D-PDU-API-ISO 22900 Version 2.2

Broadband connection (e.g. DSL) or company network

Installation via download from the MAN After Sales Portal

MAN-cats start-up with technician SmartCard

Repair and maintenance manuals

Users with MAN-cats SmartCard ( Chapter “Purchasing runtime rights”)

Registration on the MAN After Sales Portal

Administrator Order SmartCard ( Chapter “SmartCard”)